FCC ID: XX6SCG2229 TETRA Mobile Terminal

SCG22 SERIES MOBILE RADIO SIZE AND WEIGHT TRANSCEIVER Standard option:

938g 179mm x 50mm x 116mm FREQUENCY BANDS 380 - 470MHz POWER SUPPLY 10.8 to 15.6V DC, typical 13.8V DC RF PERFORMANCE 10 watt RF power output (Class 2) RF power adjustable in steps of 5dB, independently adjustable for TMO &

DMO operations Adaptive power control supported Receiver static sensitivity -115dBm

(-118dBm typical) Receiver dynamic sensitivity -107dBm

(-109.5dBm typical) Receiver class A & B AUDIO Rated audio output - 8 W @1kHz into 4 Ohms Dual speaker configuration capable of driving two 4 Ohm speakers (to be wired in parallel by installer) Fixed level line-out audio option enabling broadcast & recording support 2x1W of additional audio drive via speaker mics or handsets attached to up to two SCC front-mounted accessory ports1 Line-in audio for third-party console interface support Five independent volume controls for loudspeaker & audio accessories 2, 3 Up to three audio accessories per console ENVIRONMENTAL VOICE SERVICES Dust & water protection to IEC60529 IP54 ETS 300 019 -2-5 drop, vibration &

humidity Operational temperature (min./max.)

-30C to +70C4 Operational temperature (conformance tested) -20C to +55C Storage temperature -40C to +85C4 IP67 SCC3 console option IP67 HCU handlebar control unit option PRODUCT OPTIONS GNSS location tracking Bluetooth/Wi-Fi broadband module Micro SDHC card 32GB DMO repeater type 1A (licence enabled) DMO gateway (licence enabled) Air Interface encryption options5 End-to-end encryption options5 Wide range of languages supported including Cyrillic, Chinese, Korean &

Arabic Coloured bezels on SCC3 Local & remote smart card support Line in/out audio support (licence enabled) Extensive console support: SCC3, HBC3, AIU. Specialist solutions include HCU handlebar control unit & marine consoles, embedded car console. FEATURE LICENSES DMO-Repeater DMO-Gateway Virtual Console Audio Line In & Line Out Soft Key Function via PEI Callout Picture Message Push Premium Application Pack (SDA) Profile by Talkgroup Network Selection by Talkgroup DMO/TMO Selection by Talkgroup Reset to Default Status Extended Preferred & Fixed LA list Dynamic Home Screen Set DMO Power from MMI Air Interface Migration End-to-End Encryption Security Class 3G Lone Worker Packet Data WAP AT Commands Status Triggered Function Sepura Public Protocol (SPP) Performance Monitoring Position Report Buffer Full-duplex calls (to MS & PABX/PSTN) Half-duplex calls (individual & group) Priority call Emergency call (pre-emptive priority) Intelligent alarm reporting Talking party identity Calling line identity presentation DTMF dialling MSISDN dialling Abbreviated dialling Dynamic group number assignment Background (hidden) groups Ambience listening Privacy mode Whisper mode Group focus DMO individual call DMO group call DMO emergency call DMO intelligent emergency call Independent volume control Gateway pairing DATA SERVICES Status messaging (in TMO & DMO) SDS messaging (in TMO & DMO) SDS store & forward SDS via DMO gateway Auto-capitalisation on SDS text entry Concatenated SDS messaging Multi-slot packet data Circuit mode data TETRA paging & call out WAP browsing WAP shortcuts in SDS WAP support:

WAP 2.0 WAP browsing via TETRA WAP shortcuts embedded in SDS for instant data access WAP onboard:

Micro SDHC-based WAP sites for instant access to intelligence, images, maps &

text Data maintained by Radio Manager2 Bluetooth module:

Bluetooth v2.1+EDR Bluetooth v4.x Bluetooth audio:

Headset profile (HSP) PTT extension to HSP support Bluetooth data services:

Serial Port Profile (SPP) for data connectivity Dial-up networking (DUN) Discovery mode Generic attributes profile (GATT) Hardware-ready for:

Object push profile PROGRAMMING CAPABILITY Micro SDHC contents manageable via Radio Manager 2 On-screen programming progress bar High-speed programming via USB slave cable Background over the air programming via Wi-Fi Radio Manager 2 compatible 1- Factory fit option 2 - Further information available on request 3 - Accessories connected at the rear of a console use the same volume level 4 - Operating at temperature extremes may limit some aspects of operational performance 5 - Functionality is subject to an export license 6 - GNSS any 2 of 4 Heart device (heart rate &

temperature) Battery service profile Devices identity profile Message Access profile Human Interface Device (HID) profile HID over GATT profile Bluetooth trusted device, auto re-

connect Battery status advised immediately on start-up Short data applications (SDAs) Lone Worker feature Missed event application 30 quick status messages AppSPACE Allows use of secure apps on your radio Apps increase operational safety and productivity whilst reducing costs Apps can be customised to suit your workflows Controlled deployment by your fleet manager GNSS LOCATION-BASED SERVICES

(OPTIONAL)6 GPS -194dBw (-164dBm) tracking sensitivity Over-The-Air GPS reporting:

ETSI location standard reporting (LIP) NMEA & Sepura compact messaging Max. simultaneous satellite track = 24 Integral antenna plus active external antenna input option for use in sky obscured vehicles GPS-based compass On-board mapping capable Enhanced start-up & acquire through predictive ephemeris Glonass and BeiDou2 support6 34-channel concurrent GPS/GLONASS receiver SBAS differential GPS support

-191dBW (-161dBm) acquisition sensitivity

-191dBW (-161dBm) tracking sensitivity Over-The-Air GPS reporting using the following protocols:

ETSI location standard reporting (LIP) NMEA & Sepura compact messaging Active anti-jamming of Continuous Wave (CW) jammers Multipath mitigation SECURITY SERVICES Authentication: mutual and SwMI initiated TMO & DMO Air Interface encryption support: TEA1, TEA2, TEA3 & TEA45 Trunked mode class 1, 2, 3 & 3G TETRA security Direct mode DM-2C support PIN & PUK entry temporary enable and disable Fully integrated E2E hardware with tamper protection Public & private algorithm E2E support enabled via software upgrade5 Integral SIM connector for smart card-

based E2EE options5 Optional remote smart card reader Dual E2EE algorithm support with dynamic switching of active algorithm5 Software authenticity & protection employing digital signature GATEWAY SERVICES (LICENCE REQUIRED) Group voice call between DMO & TMO Individual voice calls between DMO

&TMO Emergency group call from DMO to TMO

& TMO to DMO Pre-emption (in either direction) of existing call SDS messaging in either direction Configurable routing of SDS messages to console or PEI intelligent handling of point to point calls & SDS messages whilst operating as a gateway REPEATER SERVICES (LICENCE REQUIRED) DMO voice repeated DMO tone signalling repeated Group status & SDS repeated Type 1A efficient operation over one RF channel Presence signal support Emergency call Monitoring & participation in calls CONNECTIVITY TETRA voice & data Bluetooth support for voice & data Wi-Fi support PEI data via RS232, or USB data cables direct to radio or via SCC3 Accessory connections via consoles and AIU SASI high speed interface for feature-

rich audio accessories Digital I/O lines expandable via AIU or expand by second board in main unit Line level audio connection Remote control via status-triggered functions Ethernet 1 (hardware ready)

User Guide HBC3 handset-based console Original Instructions: ENGLISH Document Number: PD-UG-0006 Issue 8.0 Copyright Sepura Limited 20022020 All rights reserved. No part of the information contained herein and the other referred documents may be copied, distributed or transmitted by any means to any other party without prior written permission of Sepura Limited. The distribution of this document may require a Non-Disclosure Agreement (NDA) between Sepura Limited and their agents or customers. This document, the referred documents and the described product are considered protected by copyright according to the applicable laws. Disclaimer Although every reasonable effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information contained herein and any other referred document, this should not be construed as a commitment on the part of Sepura Limited and the liability of Sepura Limited for any errors and omissions shall be limited to the correction of such errors and omissions. Sepura Limited welcomes any comment and feedback as a way to improve any delivered documentation. The information contained herein has been prepared for the use of appropriately trained personnel, and it is intended for the purpose of the agreement under which the information is submitted. Any party using or relying upon this information assumes full responsibility for such use and in no event shall Sepura Limited be liable to anyone for especial, collateral, incidental, or consequential damages in connection with or arising out of the use of this information. The information or statements given in these documents regarding the suitability, capacity or performance of the mentioned hardware or software products cannot be considered binding but shall be defined in the agreement made between Sepura Limited and the customer. Sepura Limited reserves the right to revise these documents and to make changes to its content at any time, without prior notification. Trademarks The Sepura logo and some product branding logos and names are registered trademarks of Sepura Limited. All other trademarks appearing in this document are the property of their respective owners. Software license agreement CAREFULLY READ THE LEGAL AGREEMENT CORRESPONDING TO THE LICENSE YOU PURCHASED, WHICH DESCRIBES THE GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR THE USE OF THE LICENSED SOFTWARE. 9000 Cambridge Research Park Contact Details Sepura Limited Beach Drive Waterbeach Cambridge CB25 9TL United Kingdom sepura.com General information This user guide describes the default operation and features of the HBC3 handset. Your service provider or organisation may have customised your radio to optimise its performance to suit your individual needs. There may be differences between this guide and the way your product operates. Contact your service provider or organisation for information about the customisation of your radio. Before operating the HBC3 handset-based console, read the safety instructions contained in the Product Safety Guide (SPR-DOC-00170) supplied with the product. Safety Regulatory European regulations Sepura declares that its TETRA radio products are compliant with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the European Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU on the harmonisation of the laws of the Member States relating to the making available on the market of radio equipment and repealing Directive 1999/5/EC. These products are also compliant with directive 2011/65/EU having been designed and manufactured to the RoHS requirements. Simplified EU declaration of conformity Sepura declares that the radio equipment types SC21, SC20 and STP9000 series hand-portable radios and SRG3900/SCG22 mobile radio are in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:

www.sepura.com/support/compliance-documents. Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment disposal information This symbol on the product or its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of as household or commercial waste. Some countries have set up collection and recycling systems for waste electrical and electronic products. By ensuring that this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potentially negative consequences for the environment and human health, and help conserve natural resources. Please dispose of your waste product according to your national and local regulations. Contact your service provider or Sepura for information on how to return this product for waste disposal. Disposing of waste batteries Sepura radios are supplied with a rechargeable battery. This symbol on the battery and its packaging indicates that it must not be disposed of with household or commercial waste. Please dispose of your waste batteries according to your national and local regulations. Contact your service provider or Sepura for advice on disposing batteries in your area of the world. User Guide i Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Regulations Sepura TETRA radios generate, use and radiate RF energy. Radios that comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant of part 15 of the FCC rules are identified by an FCC certification ID label (located under the battery). Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment (rule part 15.21). This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. US and Canada Markets FCC radiation exposure statement This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled applications where users have been made aware of the potential risks for exposure and can exercise control over their exposure. This product is not authorised for general population, consumer or similar use. This transmitter must not be co-

located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. IC RSS warning The term IC: before the certification/registration number only signifies that the ISEDC technical specifications were met. IC radiation exposure statement This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled applications where users have been made aware of the potential risks for exposure and can exercise control over their exposure. This product is not authorised for general population, consumer or similar use. This transmitter must not be co-

located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. ii HBC3 handset-based console CONTENTS Safety Regulatory Your handset at a glance Connection with the SRG3900/SCG22 mobile radio Console and Application Interface Unit Mobile radio audio control Controls & indicators Navi-keys Navigation Keys Soft keys Context keys Status icons LED indicators Emergency button Getting Started Power on Power off Locking and unlocking the keypad Home screen Shortcut Bar Notifications Menu SmartMenus Help Emergency operation Making an Alarm call Receiving an Alarm call Clearing an Alarm call Power on Alarm call Sound Adjusting the volume Muting audio Loudspeaker high/low audio mode Independent volume control feature Whisper mode Public/Private mode Audible tone alerts Personalising your radio Adjusting the backlight i i 1 2 2 2 4 4 4 5 5 6 9 10 11 11 11 11 12 13 13 14 15 16 17 17 18 18 19 20 20 20 21 21 22 23 23 25 25 User Guide iii Day/Night mode Adjusting text and icon size Setting the display language Menu style Time and Date Talkgroups and folders Special folders Talkgroup Selection Mode Typical folder arrangement Selecting a talkgroup Folder Selection Mode Contacts Searching and filtering contacts View contact details Creating contacts Editing contacts Delete all contacts Calls Text entry Cursor movement Character sets Chinese character sets Messages Message Inbox Opening messages View message details Reply to a message Saved messages SDS report request Picture messages Paging alerts Networks Authentication Change Network Call types Call History Group calls Individual calls Broadcast calls Quick Calls Smart Calls Modifying your call setup Changing the behaviour of the PTTduring TMO group calls 25 26 27 27 28 29 30 31 32 32 37 45 45 46 46 47 48 49 49 50 51 52 55 55 55 56 57 59 59 60 60 62 62 63 63 64 65 68 69 69 70 70 70 iv HBC3 handset-based console Transmit Inhibit Fallback Mode Operating Modes DMO Mode DMO gateway operation Repeater Mode Callout alerts Responding to Callouts Callout display Group calls to Callout group Information Phase Features Privacy Screen User profiles WAP Using WAP Browser menu Navigation menu Settings History menu Using bookmarks Call handling Location Services Position Direction Reporting options GNSS selection Security End-to-End Encryption Zeroising Asset management Labelling Customising your radio 71 72 73 73 75 78 82 82 86 88 88 90 90 90 92 92 92 93 94 95 96 97 99 99 100 100 100 101 101 102 103 103 103 User Guide v vi HBC3 handset-based console Your handset at a glance Item Description Emergency Button. Press and hold (2 seconds) to initiate an Alarm Call. Right context key. Press to select the option shown above the key in all screens. Red (Cancel/Home) key. Press and hold (2 seconds) to power on your radio. From the Home screen, press and hold (4 seconds) to power off. Press and hold (2 seconds) to return to the Home screen from any other screen. Alphanumeric keypad with backlight, and Loudspeaker and Microphone behind. The Loudspeaker is used during half-duplex calls when an audio acccessory is not connected and the radio is held in the hand. The microphone is used during full-duplex calls. Use the keypad to enter alphanumeric characters for text editing and dialling. Keys 09, # and * are programmable soft keys. Navigation keys. Scroll through lists. Move the cursor when writing text. Green (Select/Send) key. Press to initiate a half-duplex individual call or a full-duplex call. Press to select a menu item or action a function, or send a status or text (SDS) message. Left context key. Press to select the option shown above the key in all screens. Centre context key. Press to activate the feature or option that appears directly above the key. Colour display with backlight. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 User Guide 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Blue LED. (indicator). Indicates a missed event such as a call, Callout or message. Tri-colour LED. (indicator). Indicates various operational states of the radio. Navi-keys. Press + or - to adjust the earpiece volume or volume of a loudspeaker attached to the SRG3900/SCG22 mobile radio. Handset Mode Earpiece. PTT (Push-to-Talk) button. Press and hold to talk during a group call. Release to listen to other radio users. Magnetic Hook Switch. Handset Mode Microphone. Disabled in Fist Mic mode. Connector to mobile radio via the HBC Interface and Hands-free Box Connection with the SRG3900/SCG22 mobile radio Your handset works using the SRG3900/SCG22 mobile radio, with the optional provision of the Applications Interface Unit (AIU). Console and Application Interface Unit The SRG3900 mobile radio supports the connection of up to two consoles, either a Standard Console, Colour Console or a Handset-based Console (via an Interface and Handsfree box), or an Applications Interface Unit, which is similar to a console but does not have a keypad and display. With the optional expansion board fitted, the SCG22 can also support two consoles. Through the use of a console, the SRG3900/SCG22 mobile radio can support the connection of up to 6 of the following audio accessories:

built-in handset up to one hands-free kit If two consoles are fitted, they display the same information. This makes it possible to move from one console to another without having to take any special action. If two users are using the same mobile radio, operational procedures are required to ensure that the actions of the two users do not conflict. On some configurations it is possible to have a hands-free kit attached to each console. If this is the case, only one of the remote microphones is live during a call. The remote microphone which is live is the one attached to the console which accepted or made the call or switched the call to hands-free. Mobile radio audio control The mobile radio supports the concept of a single controlling audio accessory for a call. The controlling audio accessory is the one in control of the call, and the only one on which the microphone becomes active. When a fist microphone or hands-free kit is used, the received audio is directed to the loudspeaker connected to the mobile unit. When a handset is used, the received audio is directed to the handset earpiece. 2 HBC3 handset-based console The controlling audio accessory is normally the Remote Microphone used in conjunction with the loudspeaker, i.e. the hands-free kit or Public mode. To make a different accessory become the controlling accessory, press the PTT button on that accessory or take it off hook. If the new controlling accessory has an earpiece then normally this is used for received audio instead of the Loudspeaker (Private mode). When in Private mode you can switch to Public mode by pressing the hands free soft key (if configured). Taking a handset off hook, or using its PTT will return to Private mode. While the controlling accessory is not the Remote Microphone, you may switch to another accessory by pressing the PTT button on that accessory. Taking that accessory off-hook does not change the controlling accessory. This allows a second user to listen to received audio on another accessory. If the controlling accessory is placed on-hook this clears the call unless customised differently. Other accessories can be put back on-hook without clearing the call in progress. All earpiece audio is left on all the time in order that multiple users may listen to the received audio. The audio presentation for duplex (telephone) calls depends on the capability of the controlling accessory. With a duplex controlling accessory, duplex calls have a duplex presentation. With a half-

duplex accessory, half-duplex (Group) calls are controlled using the PTT button. User Guide 3 Controls & indicators Your radio has a number of controls and indicators. Navi-keys The Navi-keys are used to control the volume in normal mode. The Navi-keys are also used to perform various functions. To do this Do this Press / Press and hold a Navi-key Adjust speaker volume (or enable/disable Whisper Mode [customisable]). See Whisper mode on page22. Move cursor and select characters Scroll through available Status Messages Press a Navi-key in Text Entry Mode or Editing Mode From the Home screen, press Groups 2 times + press a Navi-key Scroll through available User Profiles (see User profiles on page90). From the Home screen, press Groups 3 times + press a Navi-key Navigation Keys Your mobile radio console has four navigation keys (left/right/up/down). Key Action Up/Down Use to move the scroll bar up and down to see more information. Scroll a list of options. To independently adjust the volume of accessories. See Independent volume control feature on page21 Down Open the top level menu from the Home screen. Up Repeated presses moves upwards through the options and menu levels until the top level menu is reached. Left/Right Moves between options on the top level menu. Moves through the text characters for selection when writing. 4 HBC3 handset-based console Soft keys Some keys on your radio may be customised to provide one-touch access to regularly used features. These programmable keys are referred to as soft keys. To activate the soft key function:

assigned to a programmable soft key, press and release assigned to other keys (such as the keypad, Cancel/Home and Select/Send keys), press and hold for one second The following keys can be customised as soft keys:

the Select/Send key the Cancel/Home key the left and right navigation keys all radio keypad keys (19, *, 0, #,) the Emergency Button (if not assigned to Emergency operation) NOTE: During full-duplex PSTN/PBX calls, take care when trying to activate soft keys (designated as 09,* and # keys) because they also generate DTMF tones. There are many functions that can be assigned to a Soft key. Some functions are activated immediately, such as the keypad lock/unlock or loudspeaker on/off. There are some special functions that use a navigate to screen function. This means that on activation, a screen displays and you need to take some additional action, such as activating a SmartMenu where you have to select an option. Context keys Your mobile radio console has a left, centre and right context key which you use to select options displayed adjacent to them. Context labels appear at the bottom of the screen, directly above each context key. These labels show the action of the key when it is pressed; either activating a feature or performing a function such as clearing a call (Clear) or selecting an option (Select). The labels and actions of the context keys in the Home screen are:

Context key Label Action Left Menu Press to enter the main menu. User Guide 5 Context key Label Centre Groups Action Press to change the talkgroup. See Selecting a talkgroup on page32 Status Profiles Press 2 times to send a status message. See Messages on page62. Press 3 times to select a user profile. See User profiles on page90 Right Shortcut Press to open the Shortcut Bar to quickly access regularly used features or clear a notification. See Notifications on page13 and Shortcut Bar on page13 Set context key shortcut The shortcuts available for selection as shortcuts are set during the customisation of your radio. NOTE: You can only use the left and right context keys and soft keys on the top level screen (Home Screen). To set a context key Home Screen shortcut 1. Open the Home screen. 2. Press and hold the context key until the Context Key Selection box appears. 3. Navigate to the shortcut in the list and press Select. The key is reconfigured and the new shortcut label appears in the Home screen. Status icons Icons appear on the status line (at the top of the display) when the radio is engaged in certain activities or when certain functions are active. Icon Description Security and Emergency Emergency Appears when emergency operation mode is active on your radio and an Alarm call is in progress. Air Interface Encryption disabled Calls and Callouts will not be encrypted. 6 HBC3 handset-based console Icon Description E2E Encryption enabled The Secure Communications icon indicates that the selected talkgroup is customised for End-to-End Encryption. In other words, calls you make by pressing the PTT button are End-to-End Encrypted. E2E Encryption disabled Indicates that the call is not encrypted. Key agreement Indicates that a cryptographic key agreement is in progress between the radio and the Key Management Centre (KMC) on the network. (See End-to-End Encryption on page101.). Trunked Mode Operation (TMO) Outgoing TMOcall in progress You are in a call that you initiated. Incoming TMO call in progress You are in a call that was initiated by another person or your dispatcher on the TMO network. Missed incoming TMO call You have missed an incoming TMO call. The blue LEDflashes. A notification alerting you to the missed call appears in the Shortcut Bar. Scanning enabled You radio is scanning (listening) to all available talkgroups within your scan list for activity. Broadcast Call A high-priority group call (point-to-multi-point) initiated by your Dispatcher to all network radio users. You cannot reply to the caller. Incoming DMO call You are in a DMO call that was initiated by another radio user. Outgoing DMO call in progress You are in a call to another radio user. Missed incoming DMO Call The blue LEDflashes to notify you that you have missed an incoming DMO call. A notification alerting you to the missed call appears in the Shortcut Bar. DMOGateway detected Appears when the radio has detected a DMO gateway. The icon disappears when the radio moves out of range of the gateway. Direct Mode Operation (DMO) User Guide 7 General icons Icon Description DMO Gateway off DMO Repeater detected Appears when a DMO repeater is detected and the radio can communicate with any other radios in the selected DMO talkgroup which are also in range of the repeater. Repeater ignored Repeater mode off DMO transmission power. The radio has been set to a higher transmission power than the normal transmission power level. DMO transmission power. The radio has been set to a lower transmission power than the normal transmission power level. Migrated Your radio is registered on a Visited Network. Signal Strength Shows the current signal strength. More bars indicate a stronger signal. Good radio coverage Indicates good radio coverage. No service Indicates poor signal or no radio coverage. Keypad locked Transmit Inhibit Indicates that you have activated transmit inhibit and the radio is unable to transmit (overridden when Emergency mode is activated). Privacy mode active during a call Appears for the duration of a call when Privacy mode has been activated to prevent any other calls interrupting an important individual call. Pre-emptive Call If pre-emptive priority calls have been customised on the radio. The icon is displayed if you or another user has initiated a pre-

emptive call on the network. Covert operation mode enabled The radio turns off any visual and sound alerts, and displays this icon when covert operation mode is enabled. 8 HBC3 handset-based console Icon Description Group Focus Appears when Group Focus is enabled, preventing any calls from other talkgroups (other than the selected talkgroup) connecting to the radio. User Profile Appears when a user profile is activated. Your radio may be programmed for a number of user profiles. The number next to the icon indicates the chosen user profile. Communication Type Mismatch This icon appears when there is a mismatch in communications and is activated when:

the radio is out of range of a gateway when another radio within range of the gateway is in a group call, and you cannot participate in the call. and that you cannot take part in the call. a radio out of range of the gateway is attempting to respond to a group call, and the speech if not being routed using the gateway to TMO users. a radio within range of a DMORepeater cannot make a call and attempts to set up a call in DMO instead, the icon appears on all radios within the talkgroup to indicate that there are members of the talkgroup who cannot take part in the call. GPS tracking enabled Indicates that the GNSS (Global Navigation Satellite System) function has been enabled. GPS tracking not available LED indicators Blue LED The blue LED indicates either a missed event, such as a missed call or unread message, or your Bluetooth status (if enabled). Notifications alerting you to the missed calls, Callouts or unread messages appear in the Shortcut Bar. See Notifications on page13. LED Indication Description Flashing on for 1 second, off for one second, on for another second, then off for seven seconds Missed event One flash every 10s Bluetooth function is enabled Continuous rapid flashing Radio is in Bluetooth discoverable

(visible) mode User Guide 9 Tri-colour LED The tri-colour LED indicates the operational state of the radio. LED Colour Description Solid green Solid red Radio is powering on or in a call and receiving Radio is in a call and transmitting Intermittent flashing red Attempting to connect to the network or incoming telephone SDS/Status message Flashing orange Incoming telephone call or SDS/Status message Intermittent four flashes orange Transmit Inhibit mode or Fallback mode are active Emergency button The red button on your radio is typically programmed to activate an Alarm Call. See Emergency operation on page17. Press and hold (2 seconds) the Emergency button to initiate an Alarm Call. If the radio is powered off, press and hold (3 seconds) to power on and initiate an Alarm Call. It may take several seconds for the radio to complete its power on process before initiating the Alarm call. 10 HBC3 handset-based console Getting Started Power on To power on, press and hold (2 seconds) the Cancel/Home key. Your radio attaches to the last selected talkgroup when it is powered off (if it is 'in service'). This is customisable. Depending on your radio's customisation any of the following may display:

a company logo a splash screen a welcome screen a PIN entry screen Power off NOTE: A message may appear if your software licence has or is about to expire. If your radio supports Radio User Assignment (RUA), which authenticates your radio on the network, you may be prompted to log on to your network. See Authentication on page70. To power off, from the Home screen press and hold (4 seconds) the Cancel/Home key. Scroll to the Shutdown option, then press the Select key to power off your radio. Before powering down, alerts and messages may be sent. If your radio is configured to provide an option to delete Callouts, navigate to Shutdown or Delete Callouts then press the Select key. Locking and unlocking the keypad To prevent accidental activity during operation, you can lock the keypad. This will also prevent access to the radio's functions if the radio is stolen. When the keypad is locked, the appears in the status line. Key icon The keypad can be locked manually or set to lock automatically after a period of inactivity. NOTE: If customised, your radio's keypad can be locked when an accessory is attached. User Guide 11 Receiving calls with locked keypad If you receive a telephone call when the keypad is locked your radio can be customised so that the Select/Send key can still be pressed to answer it. If the call is accepted the whole keypad is unlocked. Your radio can also be customised so that you can press the Cancel/Home key to reject the call and in this case the keypad remains locked. To lock/unlock the keypad:

Press the * (star) key (or a designated soft key), then press the OK context key to lock/unlock the keypad. To quickly lock and unlock the keypad, press and hold (2 seconds) the * (star) key. If you press any other key while the keypad is locked no action is taken. The Navi-keys remains unlocked when the keypad lock is enabled. A message is displayed to remind you that the keypad is locked. Alternatively, you can:

1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > Keypad Lock. 2. Press Lock to lock the keypad. Setting the radio to automatically lock the keypad You can set the radio to automatically lock the keypad after a period of inactivity. 1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > Timed Keypad Lock. 2. Press Toggle to enable/disable auto keypad lock. Home screen The top level screen, known as the home screen, appears when the radio powers on and when it is idle. To quickly get back to the home Screen, press and hold (2 seconds) the Cancel/Home key. The status line, at the top of the screen, displays various icons to indicate the state of operation or when certain functions such as keypad lock have been activated. It can also be configured to display the Network Name when the radio is idle. The context key labels at the bottom of the screen indicate what the context key directly below the label is configured to do. These labels change according to where you are in the menu hierarchy. 12 HBC3 handset-based console

1 2

1 2 3 Description Status line showing the radio coverage signal strength and operational status icons. Information area containing information that only appears on the Home screen. This is customised by your service provider or organisation. It may show date and time, your selected talkgroup, folder and network name (Mobile Network Code Alias). 3 Context key options (available in the Home screen). Shortcut Bar You can easily access commonly used radio features such as your Inbox, and turn features on and off using the Shortcut Bar. The Shortcut Bar can contain up to 5 radio features and some of these can be paired with notifications to alert you to a missed call or a new message in your Inbox. To open the Shortcut Bar, in the Home screen press the Shortcut context key or the Up navigation key. Description Use the navigation keys to scroll through the notifications and features. Notifications always appear to the left of features. Press the Right navigation key to continue scrolling right to view more shortcuts (if available). To open a notification or feature, highlight it and press the Select context key. Press the Back context key to close the Shortcut Bar without opening a feature. The Shortcut Bar cannot be closed if there are notifications. Notifications Like a Smartphone, your radio can display notifications to indicate a missed call or new message. They also appear when certain functions are enabled such as mute and transmit inhibit. Your radio can display up to 5 notifications, and up to 5 shortcuts for commonly used radio features. Some features can be paired with notifications, such as your Inbox so when a message is received a notification appears in the Shortcut Bar to alert you to the unread message. When paired with a feature, the feature icon appears with a notification badge . Notifications paired with features appear to the left of all other feature icons. The following notifications can be paired with a feature:

Icon Notification Paired Feature Unread message Inbox User Guide 13 Missed call Missed Callout Call History Callout To close a notification:

From the Home screen, press the Shortcut context key or the Up navigation key to open the Shortcut Bar, highlight the notification then press the Select context key. Use the feature in the usual way, for example, read an unread message or respond to a missed call. The notification automatically closes and disappears from the Shortcut Bar. Menu Your radio is customised by your service provider or organisation with a number of features that are accessed from the main menu. To open the main menu, in the Home screen press Menu. To open a sub-menu or menu option, scroll to the option (highlight it) and press Select. To return to a higher level menu, press Back. To return to the Home screen at any time within the menu hierarchy, press and hold (2 seconds) the Cancel/Home key. Menu options The following icons are used to identify the sub-menus that provide access to further options. Icon Menu option Phone Add, edit and delete your personal contacts within your personal folder. Search (or filter) your contacts to locate the contact you want and initiate a call. Review your call history. Messages Read, create, save and send text (SDS) messages. View picture messages

(if customised). Select and send a status message. Clear your mailbox of unwanted messages. Groups Search your talkgroup folders and select a talkgroup. Enable scanning of your selected talkgroups. Set up your speech call settings. GPS Manage your GPS location and position settings. View your current location, direction and speed. 14 HBC3 handset-based console Icon Menu option Applications Your radio may be customised with a number of applications. Your service provider or organisation may have installed specific applications (Short Data Applications) to help you in your role. Access WAP sites. Networks Manage your network connections and DMO options. Change your operating mode (TMO/DMO/Repeater). Enable/disable Transmit Inhibit mode when working in RF sensitive areas. Options Personalise your radio settings such as backlight, text size and language. Reset your radio to the last customisation, with options to keep personal data settings such as contacts in the phonebook. User Profiles Select customised profiles designed specifically for the way you work. Help View help, such as a list of customised soft keys on your radio. SmartMenus SmartMenus are designed to provide quick access to regularly used radio features, usually with a common theme. Your service provider or organisation may customise your radio with a number of SmartMenus, for example you may have a SmartMenu containing all your Quick Status messages, another for user profiles and another for selecting operational modes such as toggling on/off covert mode, Transmit Inhibit, loudspeaker mute and so on. SmartMenus are assigned to a soft key, either a Side key or one of the keys on the keypad. To open a SmartMenu, press the Side key or press and hold (1 second) the assigned key on the keypad. Use the navigation keys to scroll the list of options on the SmartMenu. Options are labelled with a number, shown to the right of the option. To select the option, press the key that corresponds to the number of the option, for example to select option 3, press the 3 key. Note that using this method only options numbered 1 to 12 can be selected using the keys on the keypad (press 0 for option 10, the Star (*) key for option 11 and the Hash (#) key for option 12). For options numbered 13 onwards, scroll to the option (highlight it), and press Select. User Guide 15 Help To access help Use one of the following:

The Help menu displays a free text area which is usually customised to indicate radio soft key assignments. It may also be used to record any required help text. Press the Up navigation key (or Shortcut) to open the Shortcut Bar, then select Help. Press a dedicated soft key (default is normally key 0 zero). Press Menu > Help. 16 HBC3 handset-based console Emergency operation Emergency operation is available in TMO if the radio is in service. If your radio is operating in DMO when you make the emergency call, the radio switches to TMO before making the emergency call. If the radio cannot make the call in TMO, the radio automatically switches back to DMO to make the call. If your radio is customised for Gateway and Repeater mode, it will make an Alarm call in TMO. The red button on the top of your console can be programmed to initiate an Alarm call at any time when your radio is in operation. This button is known as the Emergency button. Your radio may be customised to perform one or more of the following:

Initiate an Alarm call set up to one or more pre-defined users (typically to your dispatcher and other members of your talkgroup) and/or;

Send an Emergency Status message to an individual, the dispatcher or a talkgroup and/or;

Send a position report (GPS dependent). If you are working in RF sensitive areas and have enabled Transmit Inhibit, prohibiting radio transmission, initiating an Alarm call will override the Transmit Inhibit feature and the Alarm call will be transmitted. Your service provider or organisation can provide information on how your radio is customised for Alarm calls and how to operate your radio in emergency situations. If you are working in a sensitive environment your radio may be customised for Silent Alarm calls where audible and display alerts are disabled, or your radio may be customised for Live Microphone that allows you to call for assistance hands-free without pressing the PTT button. Silent Alarm Call If you are working in sensitive environments where the audible and display alerts associated with an Alarm call are inappropriate, your radio can be customised to make a Silent Alarm call (without acoustic or screen alerts). When a Silent Alarm call is made, the radio displays the Home screen with the talkgroup associated with call. During the call you may navigate away from the Home screen. Live Microphone feature Your radio may be customised with the Live Microphone feature. This feature allows you to broadcast a call for assistance hands-free for a specified period of time and without having to press the PTT button. The radio automatically cycles between transmit and receive communication during a programmed period of time (seconds). Live Microphone is cancelled when the time expires or by pressing the PTT button. Making an Alarm call You can still make an Alarm call if the keypad is locked. User Guide 17 To make an Alarm call During an Alarm call:

1. Press and hold (2 seconds) the Emergency button; a confirmation beep sounds. 2. Release the button and speak into the microphone. the microphone is live for a programmed period (seconds) allowing you to speak hands-free without pressing the PTT button (customisable) the LED illuminates solid red your radio sounds audible tones a large emergency symbol appears on the screen your identity and talkgroup appears on the display of those receiving the Alarm call Receiving an Alarm call An Alarm call overrides any existing calls on the talkgroup. You know you are receiving an Alarm call when:

your radio sounds an audible tone the LED flashes red the emergency symbol appears on the screen your radio status changes to Emergency Clearing an Alarm call You can only clear an Alarm call that you have initiated. To cancel the Alarm call, press the Clear context key. To cancel the Alarm call, press the Call Clear key, the Clear context key or the Cancel/Home key. Alternatively, your radio may be customised to use the Emergency button to cancel the Alarm call. Depending on which network is being used, if the TETRA Alarm call is a group call, thenalthough both of the TETRA Alarm call exit functions will clear the TETRA Alarm call on the call originators radioit will not remove the alarm from the system. Radios alerted to the emergency may, depending upon the infrastructure configuration, remain in the TETRA Alarm call condition until the dispatcher clears the call from the system. When the Alarm call is cancelled, your radio returns to the talkgroup that was selected before the call was initiated. 18 HBC3 handset-based console Power on Alarm call If your radio supports Radio User Assignment (RUA), which authenticates your radio on the network, you may be prompted to log on to your network before the Alarm call is initiated. Contact your service provider for information. See Authentication on page70. Standard Operation If your radio is powered off, press and hold (3 seconds) the Emergency button to power on and initiate an Alarm call. Any customised Welcome screen is not displayed during power on. It may take several seconds for the radio to complete its power on process before initiating the Alarm call. Customised Operation (PIN entry bypass) If your radio is powered off, press and hold (3 seconds) the Emergency button to power on and initiate an Alarm call. Any customised Welcome screen is not displayed during power on. It may take several seconds for the radio to complete its power on process before initiating the Alarm call. If the radio is powered on and is at the PIN entry screen, pressing the Emergency button for 3 seconds will also initiate the Alarm call, without the need to enter your PIN. User Guide 19 Sound Adjusting the volume Muting audio Your radio is equipped with a loudspeaker for use during PTTcalls and an earpiece for use during telephone calls. You can adjust the volume of the speaker and increase the sensitivity of the microphone (see Whisper mode on page22) so that you can speak more quietly. Your radio also uses sound to alert you to the various operational states. Press either the + or - Navi-key to adjust the earpiece volume or the volume of the loudspeaker attached to the SRG3900/SCG22 mobile radio. The vertical volume meter displayed on screen indicates the current volume level. The radio sounds an audible tone at the new volume level. Soft keys may be customised to mute the audio output of loudspeakers and earpieces connected to the radio or consoles. In an installation with two consoles connected, audio devices can be muted on the local and remote console. Individual soft keys may be customised specifically to:

Mute the primary loudspeaker(s) connected to the radio Mute the secondary loudspeaker(s) connected to console(s) Mute all connected loudspeakers and earpieces, including Bluetooth devices Pressing the same soft key again will cancel the mute and restore audio to the previous volume levels. An icon is displayed on the status line to indicate the current audio mute mode:

Icon Notification Primary Loudspeaker 1 (connected to the radio) muted Primary Loudspeaker 2 (connected to the radio) muted Primary Loudspeakers 1 and 2 muted Secondary Loudspeaker 1 (connected to the local console) muted Secondary Loudspeaker 2 (connected to the remote console) muted Secondary Loudspeaker 1 and 2 muted 20 HBC3 handset-based console Loudspeaker high/low audio mode A soft key may be customised to toggle the audio output between the radios speaker (high audio mode) and earpiece (low audio mode) as required. An icon is displayed on the status line to indicate the current mode:

Icon Notification High audio mode Low audio mode When the radio is in the loudspeaker high/low audio mode:

In normal operation, audio is routed to the primary loudspeaker in high audio mode and to the earpiece in low audio mode. If an earpiece accessory is connected, audio is routed to the accessory in both modes. During incoming or outgoing emergency calls, audio is always routed to the radio's speaker. A full duplex call is always routed to the radio's earpiece. Independent volume control feature You can adjust the earpiece volume of a HBC3 in Handset Mode and the loudspeaker attached to the SRG3900/SCG22 mobile radio independently, as well as to adjust the levels of the HBC3 and loudspeaker at the same time. In Fist Mic mode the independent volume control feature only adjusts the loudspeaker. When you switch to Whisper mode on the next page the sensitivity for all attached microphones is adjusted regardless of which speaker(s) volume is selected for adjustment. To adjust the volume:

1. Press the Navi-keys to display the volume level. 2. The volume level displays the volume for the default accessory. The default accessory, when the radio is in a call, is the controlling accessory and when not in a call is usually the loudspeaker attached to the SRG3900/SCG22 mobile radio. 3. Use the Up and Down navigation keys to scroll through all attached accessories. An icon displays in the volume bar, next to the volume level to indicate which accessory is selected, for example a handset icon displays when a headset (or similar) is being adjusted, and likewise a loudspeaker icon indicates that you are adjusting the loudspeaker. Icon Device Handset-base Console (HBC) #1 attached to Vehicle Accessory Connector (VAC) Handset-base Console (HBC) #2 attached to VAC User Guide 21 Handset Loudspeaker attached to VAC Speaker Microphone Loudspeaker attached to VAC Loudspeaker attached to radio All accessories mode (volume of all speakers adjusted together) For attached consoles the icon shows the number of the console for which the volume level is being adjusted. If more than one console is connected, you can only adjust the volume level for one console at a time. The icon number indicates which console is being adjusted. In all accessories mode the volume level of all connected accessories is controlled simultaneously. The blue bar shows the volume range of the attached accessories, and is moved up and down within the volume bar as the volume level is adjusted. Whisper mode Whisper mode allows you to talk more quietly than normal but still be heard and understood by the person you are calling. It can be useful to switch to Whisper mode when providing confidential information. If you select a User Profile which already increases the sensitivity of the microphone, depending on your radio's customisation Whisper mode may not increase the sensitivity further. To enable Whisper mode Depending on customisation, to enable Whisper mode, you can:

22 HBC3 handset-based console press a programmed soft key press the Navi-keys to decrease the volume to below its lowest level The radio sounds a low-high level alert when Whisper mode is enabled. To disable Whisper mode:

Depending on customisation, to disable Whisper mode, you can:

press a programmed soft key increase the volume until the volume level meter displays at least the minimum level increase the volume to its loudest level then attempt to increase the volume further The radio sounds a low-high level alert when Whisper mode is disabled. Public/Private mode When Public mode is enabled, audio output is via primary loudspeaker connected to the radio or an accessory secondary loudspeaker. When Private mode is enabled, audio output uses the connected accessory earpieces and mutes any loudspeakers. This provides the facility of completely discreet audio reception during calls. To enable Private mode Depending on customisation, to enable Private mode, you can:

press a programmed soft key press the PTT button on an accessory with an earpiece attached The radio sounds a low-high level alert when Private mode is enabled. To disable Private mode:

Depending on customisation, to disable Private mode, you can:

press a programmed soft key place the accessory back on-hook release the PTT button on the accessory Audible tone alerts Certain events on your radio initiate audible tone alerts. These alerts are attenuated when you select a user profile which uses covert mode (see User profiles on page90). 1. To toggle audible alerts 2. Select Menu > Options > Alerts > Audio Alerts. 3. Press Toggle (or the Select/Send key) to toggle alerts on/off. User Guide 23 If your radio is powered off with Audio Alerts disabled, they remain disabled when the radio is next powered on. 24 HBC3 handset-based console Personalising your radio You can personalise your display settings (such as text size, backlight, inverting the screen and change languages) and create a personal phone book containing your own contacts. When a call or message is received, and when you press any key, the backlight lights up the display and keypad. The length of time the backlight illuminates is set during customisation. You can toggle the backlight on/off by using a soft key or from a SmartMenus on page15 (if customised). 1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > Display Settings > Backlight. 1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > Display Settings > Day/Night Mode. 3. Press the +/- Navi-keys to adjust the intensity of the backlight and the keypad illumination on a Adjusting the backlight To adjust the backlight:

Alternatively:

2. Press the Toggle context key. To adjust brightness:

2. Select Backlight Level. scale of 17 (max.). Day/Night mode When a call or message is received, and when you press any key, the backlight lights up the display and keypad. A bright display can be a potential distraction, particularly when driving at night or in poor lighting conditions. Day/Night mode lets you adjust the intensity of the backlight and keypad illumination to suit your working conditions. Night mode reduces the glare from the display, making it ideally suited for night time use. When the preferences for day and night mode have been set, switching between the modes automatically adjusts the backlight and display settings. A soft key may be customised to switch between Day/Night mode. User Guide 25 To change Day/Night mode settings 1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > Display Settings > Day/Night Mode. 2. Scroll to each option (highlight it) to make your adjustments:

Day Modeto toggle between Day Mode and Night Mode press the Toggle context key. Backlight Enabledto toggle the backlight on/off press the Toggle context key. When a tick appears in the box, the backlight is on, and when the box is empty, the backlight is off. Backlight Levelto adjust the intensity of the backlight and the key pad illumination on a scale of 1 to 7 press the +/- Navi-keys. Adjusting text and icon size Your radio uses the default size for the text and icons set during customisation, however it also supports a number of different size modes that control how text and icons are displayed, which can make them easier to see from a distance. NOTE: When selecting larger modes, some prompts or icons may not appear on the radio display. Your radio supports the following modes:

Normal Mode allows the maximum amount of information available to be displayed in a compact character size. Large Mode displays screen information in a large character size. Very Large Mode displays the talkgroup number or talkgroup name, as customised, in an extra large size on the Home screen with all other screens in Large mode. Custom displays the Home screen, menu and WAP browser in predefined text sizes set during customisation. Only the Home screen supports Very Large mode, with other screens set to either Normal or Large mode. NOTE: Depending on the customisation of the Home screen, if the date is shown on the Home screen it may be truncated in Very Large Mode. If the date format YYYY.MM.DD is used, then the day does not display. To change text mode:

1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > Display Settings > Text Size. 2. Use the Up and Down Navigation keys to highlight the mode and then press the Select context key. The radio displays the Home screen, with the text and icons appearing in the chosen mode. 26 HBC3 handset-based console Default text mode Your radio may be customised with a pre-configured default text mode set. When the radio is powered on or restarted, the display reverts to the default text mode size. NOTE: If the radio has been configured to change to large mode when fitted to a car kit, the display will not revert to the default text mode. Setting the display language Your radio operates in the language chosen during customisation and can support two display languages. The display uses the default language if the radio is only customised for a single language, or the currently selected language if two languages are programmed. Your radio may be customised with a soft key or provide an option on a SmartMenu to change the display language. See SmartMenus on page15. To change the language:

1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > Language. 2. Scroll to the language option, and then press the Select context key. The Home screen appears and the display shows the selected language. Menu style You can display the menu in Grid, List or Compatibility style. 1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > Display Settings > Menu Style. 2. Select one option:

Gridset Grid menu style Listset List menu style Cardset Card (Compatibility) menu style Grid style User Guide 27 highlight items using the four navigation keys to open an item press Select to return to the top level screen press Cancel or Cancel/Home key. List style highlight items using the Down and Up navigation keys. to open an item press Select to return to the top level screen press Cancel or the Cancel/Home key. Compatibility style (card) highlight items using the Left and Right navigation keys to open an item press Select to return to the top level screen press Cancel or Cancel/Home key. Time and Date Your radio can be customised to display the current time and date on the Home screen. The time is shown in 24 hour format. To view and edit the time and date 1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > Time and Date. 2. Press Edit or press the Select/Send key. 3. Enter the digits required (see Text entry on page59). 4. Press OK or the Select/Send key to save your changes; press Cancel or the Cancel/Home key to abandon your changes. 28 HBC3 handset-based console Talkgroups and folders Talkgroups are pre-programmed onto your radio. Each talkgroup typically contains users who have a similar role or who are within a distinct location or who provide a service that you would use. They are organised into folders to help you quickly select one that is applicable to your environment or situation. A folder can contain both DMO and TMO talkgroups, but only those talkgroups applicable to the current operating mode, either DMO or TMO, appear when a folder is opened. In TMO, only those talkgroups available on the current network are displayed. The folders available depend on the customisation of your radio; various special folders are also programmed into your radio (see Special folders on the next page). NOTE: If you want to change from a DMO talkgroup to a TMO one, you need to change the operating mode first (see Operating Modes on page73). A top level folder can have a number of sub-folders, similar to a folder structure on a computer, and a folder can contain both folders and talkgroups. If a folder contains sub-folders and talkgroups, two tabs appearone for sub-folders and the other for navigation keys to switch between the tabs. talkgroups. You can use the Left or Right Your radio may be customised for Talkgroup Selection Mode or Folder Selection Mode. How you select a talkgroup depends on which mode your radio is customised to use. When you select a talkgroup, the radio attaches to that talkgroup. Your radio can only participate in calls with talkgroups it is attached to via the network. When ongoing calls are detected on any talkgroup your radio is scanning you can join in by pressing the PTT. Your radio may be customised so that folders can have a subscriber class attribute. The radio will then use cells with a matching subscriber class if a talkgroup is selected from the folder. When the radio is attached to a talkgroup, the talkgroup and folder appear on the Home screen (see Home screen on page12). If a talkgroup and folder are not shown:

the radio may not have attached to the last used talkgroup at power on, or it was attached to a DGNA talkgroup which has been deassigned, or it may be attached to hidden background talkgroups, or a folder has not been selected (Folder Selection Mode only), or a change of network may have occurred and the last used talkgroup may not be usable on the current network. When your radio is powered on, if possible it re-selects either the default talkgroup or connects to your last selected talkgroup. User Guide 29 Special folders In addition to the standard folders created to contain your talkgroups, your radio can be customised with Special folders. Special folders can only contain talkgroups (they cannot contain folders). Some Special folders are continuously scanned, and when ongoing calls are detected you can join in by pressing the PTT. The following special folders may be programmed into your radio during customisation:

Favouritesfrequently used talkgroups that can be added to the folder during customisation or added by the user. Allcontains every talkgroup programmed into your radio including those in special folders. Only available on radios customised for Talkgroup Selection mode. DGNAcontains up to 50 dynamically assigned groups. The contents are automatically maintained by the radio and are not customisable in Talkgroup Selection Mode. You can select a DGNA talkgroup. In Folder Selection Mode, the scan state (scanning enabled or disabled) of a talkgroup can be changed and the folder can be emptied using the Folder Restore option. UDSLuser-defined scan list(s), see User Defined Scan Lists on page35. A list of talkgroups which you can modify yourself. If you select a UDSL instead of a specific talkgroup your radio scans all the talkgroups in that UDSL. Until a UDSL is selected its talkgroups are not scanned for activity. For more information see User Defined Scan Lists on page35. Only available on radios customised for Talkgroup Selection mode. Always attachedtalkgroups which the radio scans continuously for activity. A talkgroup in this folder can be selected as the requested talkgroup in Talkgroup Selection Mode. Backgroundtalkgroups which the radio scans continuously for activity. You cannot select a background talkgroup in this folder as your requested talkgroup. 30 HBC3 handset-based console Talkgroup Selection Mode When the radio is customised for Talkgroup Selection Mode, the selected talkgroup becomes the requested talkgroup to which you make calls. You can insert frequently used talkgroups in the Favourites folder, making it quicker and easier to change your talkgroup. Additionally your radio may be customised for Quick Groups that allow you to change to a frequently used talkgroup using a soft key. You can create your own user defined scan lists that are saved into the UDSL special folder. The UDSL folder greys out (disables) talkgroups that are invalid for the current network. The scan list allows you to set scanning priorities on the talkgroups, so the radio can prioritise calls between the scanned talkgroups. See User Defined Scan Lists on page35. User Guide 31 Typical folder arrangement The following illustration shows how the folders can be used to organise talkgroups:

Selecting a talkgroup You can use one of the following methods to select a talkgroup:

From the Home screen, press Groups. From the Menu navigate to the Groups menu. Use a soft key to return to your Quick Group. 32 HBC3 handset-based console NOTE: Talkgroups in the Smart Call Folder-1 or Smart Call Folder-2 folders can only be accessed when the appropriate Smart Call mode has been selected from the Speech Call Settings screen or by using a soft key. (See Smart Calls on page55.) Standard talkgroup selection 1. From the Home Screen, press the Groups key. The current selected folder and talkgroup appear in the talkgroup selection box. 2. If you want to change to another talkgroup within the same folder, simply enter the number of the talkgroup, or select the All Folder which contains all the talkgroups and enter the number of the talkgroup. 3. Use the Left and Right navigation keys to move between folders at the same level. Use the Up and Down navigation keys to move between the folder levels (sub-folders). 4. Press the Navi-keys to select the desired talkgroup within the folder. The directional arrows under the talkgroup name indicate which Navi-key to use +/-. 5. Press the Select context key to attach to the talkgroup. Customised talkgroup selection When the radio is customised to use the Left and Right navigation keys for talkgroup selection:

1. From the Home Screen, press the Left or Right navigation keys. The current selected folder and previous/next talkgroup folders appear in the talkgroup selection box. If customised you can scroll through the talkgroups continuously. 2. Use the Navi-keys to move between the folder levels (sub-folders). 3. Press the Select context key to attach to the talkgroup. User Guide 33 Opening a folder 1. Select Menu > Groups > Folders. 2. Highlight a folder and press Open. To navigate back up the folders list, press Back. Searching for folders and talkgroups You can search for talkgroups or folders by filtering on a text string. Items which do not match the string are temporarily filtered out of the list. You can use either:

Search cardto filter the current talkgroup/folder folder. Search allto filter across all talkgroups and folders 1. To search inside a specific folder, open that folder. 2. Press Options then select Search card or Search all. 3. Enter characters you wish to filter against (see Text entry on page59). The list of matching names is dynamically filtered as characters are entered. Only matching talkgroups or folders remain in the list. 4. To cancel the filter operation select the Stop search option. Inserting a talkgroup into a folder If a folder is editable you can use the Insert option to insert a talkgroup into it. Deleting a talkgroup from a folder If a folder is editable you can use the Delete option to remove a talkgroup from it. The talkgroup can still be selected from the All folder if customised, or by entering the talkgroup number directly in the Talkgroup Selection box. Create a favourite talkgroup folder To quickly access frequently used talkgroups, you can add them to the Favourites folder. 1. Select Menu > Groups > Folders > Favourites. 2. Press Options, then select Open. 3. Navigate to the New Group option then press Options. 4. Press Insert. 5. Select the talkgroup you want to add (from any folder). 6. Press Select to insert the talkgroup into the Favourites folder. 34 HBC3 handset-based console If the New Group option is not available, you do not have 'edit' permissions on the Favourites folder. The Favourites folder must be set to 'Edit' at customisation. Quick Groups You can quickly change to a different talkgroup by pressing a customised Quick Group soft key specified for that talkgroup. To select the Quick Group talkgroup Press the customised Quick Group soft key. Alternatively, view the Quick Group using the menu then press Select. To view your Quick Groups You can view the talkgroups and folders associated with your assigned Quick Groups. 1. Select Menu > Groups > Quick Groups. 2. Use the Up and Down navigation keys to highlight a Quick Group then press Select. To change the talkgroup associated with a Quick Group Your radio can be customised to allow you to change the talkgroup associated with a Quick Group. These changes may be overwritten when your radio is reprogrammed. Select and view a Quick Group (described in To view your Quick Groups above) then:

Select Options > Change > Current. Your current talkgroup is now associated with the selected Quick Group. User Defined Scan Lists A User Defined Scan List (UDSL) is a list of talkgroups which are either fixed, or user-definable. Any talkgroups in the UDSL that are invalid for the current network are disabled and are shown greyed out in the talkgroup list. Until a UDSL is selected the talkgroups it contains are not scanned and your radio cannot receive calls from them. Your radio can have a maximum of 20 UDSLs, and up to 10 talkgroups can reside within each UDSL. If you select a UDSL (in the same way as you select a talkgroup):

the talkgroups it contains are scanned, allowing your radio to receive calls from any of the talkgroups in the UDSL the UDSL icon is displayed in the right hand corner of the radio display calls are made to the talkgroup designated as the 'selected talkgroup'. If there is no selected talkgroup in the UDSL, calls are made to the talkgroup with the highest priority. Each talkgroup in a UDSL can have up to three different levels of user-definable group scan priorities which are used by your radio when deciding which call to follow when a call on one talkgroup is active and a call on another talkgroup is received. The scan priority of each talkgroup in a User Guide 35 UDSL is shown at the right hand side of the screen as

(Low). You can designate a selected talkgroup in each UDSL. You can add and remove talkgroups from a UDSL.

(Normal) or

(High), View and edit scan list 1. Select Menu > Groups > Scan Lists. 2. Use the Up and Down navigation keys to select one of the UDSLs and press Open. 3. Press Edit. 1. Use the Up and Down navigation keys to select one of the talkgroups in the UDSL. 2. The talkgroup selection box is activated. Select a talkgroup as described in Selecting a Change default (selected) talkgroup 2. Select Edit > Options > Select. 3. Select Edit > Options > Save. Add a talkgroup 1. Press Options > Add. talkgroup on page32 then press Select. 3. Select Edit > Options > Save. Remove a talkgroup Select the talkgroup you wish to remove then:

1. Select Edit > Options > Delete. 2. Select Edit > Options > Save. Changing group scanning priority 1. Select Edit > Options > Change Priority. 2. Select scan priority

(High),

(Normal) or

(Low) then press Select. 3. Select Edit > Options > Save. 36 HBC3 handset-based console Scanning ON/OFF Scanning of talkgroups can be enabled and disabled. If scanning is disabled, the radio will ignore incoming calls on these talkgroups. Your current talkgroup is always scanned. Background talkgroups are always scanned and will continue to be scanned when scanning is disabled. 1. Select Menu > Groups > Scanning ON/OFF. 2. Press Toggle (or the Select/Send key) to enable/disable scanning. Folder Selection Mode If you radio is customised for Folder Selection Mode, you will need to select a folder, which is typically configured with zero or one selected TMO talkgroup and/or one selected DMO talkgroup, which the radio uses to make calls. When a folder is selected and a talkgroup within that folder is selected as the requested talkgroup, they appear on the Home screen. If a folder is not selected when the radio powers on, the message

'No Folder' appears on the Home screen. When a folder is selected that does not have a selected talkgroup, the message 'No Selected Group' appears. Depending on the customisation of your radio, when you press the Groups key from the Home screen, one of the following is activated:

Folder list. The current selected folder opens. You can change the talkgroup within the selected folder or use the Back key to display the Folder list (a list of selectable and non-

selectable programmed into your radio) and choose a new folder. The selected folder within the Folder list and the selected talkgroup within a folder are indicated by the icon. Talkgroup Selection box. The selected talkgroup (appears in bold typeface) and the selected folder are displayed within a selection box. Only those talkgroups that are selectable within the selected folder appear in the selection box and you can scroll through the talkgroups using the Navi-keys. An icon appears to the left of a TMO talkgroup, indicating the scanning priority and whether or not the talkgroup is scan-enabled. You can select another folder by scrolling through the folders at the same level as the current folder or those at a higher level or sub-folders within the hierarchy. NOTE: Only those talkgroups and folders that are selectable appear in the Talkgroup Selection box. Non-selectable folders and talkgroups, such as the Always Attached and the Background folders, do not appear for selection. The exception is the DGNA folder where a talkgroup from the folder can be selected, but the selected folder remains unchanged. All the TMO talkgroups within the selected folder that are scan-enabled1 and valid for the current network contribute to the scan list that the radio uses to prioritise calls. If a talkgroup is editable2 you 1In Radio Manager folder properties, the talkgroup option In Scan List is selected. 2In Radio Manager folder properties, the talkgroup option Editable is selected. User Guide 37 can change its scan state (to enable or disable scanning), change its scanning priority (see Scanning talkgroups on page41) and select or deselect it. A talkgroup can be copied from a folder to another editable folder1, for example you can copy talkgroups from Special folders such as the Always Attached folder into a generic folder and copy frequently used talkgroups to the Favourites folder, making it quicker and easier to change your talkgroup. Your radio may be customised for Quick Folders, which allow you to quickly change to a frequently used folder using a soft key. Opening the current folder Use one of the following methods to open the current folder:

From the Home screen, press Groups and depending on the customisation of your radio, either the current selected folder opens displaying all talkgroups within the folder, or the Talkgroup Selection box opens displaying the selected talkgroup and folder. From the Menu select Groups > Folders to open the current selected folder. Selecting a folder Use one of the following methods to select the current folder:

From the Home screen, press Menu then select Groups > Folders to display the current selected folder containing the selected talkgroup. From the Home screen, press Groups. Depending on the customisation of your radio, either the current selected folder opens displaying all talkgroups within the folder, or the Talkgroup Selection box opens displaying the selected talkgroup and folder. Additionally, you can select a folder by pressing a soft key to select a Quick Folder or select a folder by entering its Folder ID (see Selecting a folder using the folder ID on the facing page) if customised. You cannot select the DGNA, Always Attached, Background or Smart Call folder as your selected folder. A talkgroup within the folder must be selected before you can make calls. See Selecting a talkgroup on the facing page. To select a folder using the folder list:

1. From the Home screen, press Menu, then select Groups > Folders to open the current 2. Press Back to navigate back 'up' the folders list. 3. Scroll to the folder (highlight it) and press Options, then scroll to the Select option and press folder. Select. Only talkgroups which are valid for the current network are listed in the folder. 1In Radio Manager folder properties, the Subject Content option is set to Edit. 38 HBC3 handset-based console To select a folder and talkgroup using the Talkgroup Selection box:

1. From the Home screen, press Groups. The current selected folder and talkgroup are displayed in the Talkgroup Selection box. Note that the selected talkgroup appears in bold typeface and an icon indicating the scanning priority and whether or not the talkgroup is scan-

enabled (no icon appears for DMO talkgroups). If you want to change to another talkgroup within the same folder, simply enter the number of the talkgroup. 2. Use the Left and Right navigation keys to move between folders at the same level. Use the Up and Down navigation keys to move between the folder levels (sub-folders). 3. Press the Navi-keys to scroll through the talkgroups within the currently selected folder. 4. Press Select to select the folder and attach to the talkgroup. Selecting a folder using the folder ID Every folder has a unique identification number (ID) and you can use this IDto quickly select the folder. Press the assigned soft key to open the Folder ID box. Enter the number of the folder (the name of the folder appears) and press Select. The folder is now your selected folder and the selected talkgroup within the folder is your requested talkgroup. If the folder name does not appear when you entered the folder ID, the folder ID is incorrect. Selecting a talkgroup The selected talkgroup within each folder only becomes your requested talkgroup when the folder is selected. Depending on the customisation of your radio, you will use one of the following methods to change the talkgroup. You can only select a talkgroup that is editable. To select a talkgroup from the folder:

1. From the Home screen, press Groups to open the current folder. The selected talkgroup within the folder is indicated by the icon. User Guide 39 2. Scroll to the talkgroup you want as your requested talkgroup and press Select. Selection is indicated by the icon. To select a talkgroup using the Talkgroup Selection box:

1. From the Home screen, press Groups. The selected talkgroup and folder appear in the Talkgroup Selection box. The current talkgroup appears in bold typeface. 2. Press the Navi-keys to scroll through the talkgroups within the currently selected folder. 3. Press Select to attach to the talkgroup. The talkgroup appears in bold typeface. If you have selected a TMO talkgroup, an icon appears to the left of the talkgroup name indicating the scanning priority and whether or not the talkgroup is scan-enabled (no icon appears for DMO talkgroups). Copy a talkgroup to another folder Sometimes you may want to copy a talkgroup to another folder, for example you may want to copy your frequently used talkgroups into the Favourites folder. You can copy talkgroups from any folder but only place them into a folder that is editable. You cannot copy a talkgroup from the Background or DGNA folder, or background/always scanned talkgroups within any folder. If all editable folders contain the maximum number of talkgroups, the Copy option is disabled because all of the destination folders are full. A talkgroup cannot be copied into a folder that already contains that talkgroup. When a talkgroup is copied, it does not retain its properties (scan state, scan priority and selection). For example, if you copied a talkgroup that has scanning enabled, a scanning priority of High and it is the selected talkgroup, when it is copied into the destination folder the scan state is disabled (not scanned), the scanning priority remains the same and it is not the selected talkgroup. NOTE: You can copy a talkgroup from the Always Attached folder for the purpose of making it your selected talkgroup. Any changes to the talkgroup's properties, such as the scanning priority and scan state, will be overridden by the properties set in the Always Attached folder. 40 HBC3 handset-based console To copy a talkgroup:

1. From the Home screen, press Menu then select Groups > Folders to open the current folder. If you want to open another folder press Back to navigate 'up' the folder list, select the folder and then press Open. 2. Select (highlight) the talkgroup you want to copy. 3. Press Options, scroll to the Copy option and press Select. 4. A list of available folders appears. Scroll to the folder you want to insert the talkgroup in to, and press Select. A green tick is displayed if the talkgroup has successfully been copied to the folder. Delete a talkgroup You can only delete a talkgroup from a folder if the folder is editable. 1. Select the talkgroup (highlight it) and press Options. 2. Scroll to the Delete option and press Select. 3. Press OK to delete the talkgroup from the folder. Scanning talkgroups The talkgroups that are scanned and the priority scanning order within a folder are set during customisation. If the talkgroup is editable, you can change the scan priority and the scan state

(enable or disable scanning). There are three scan priorities which are used by the radio when deciding which call to follow when in a call and another call is received. NOTE: You cannot edit the properties (scan state and scan priority) of the talkgroups in the Always Attached, Background or Smart Call folders. The scan priority appears on the left of the talkgroup as a series of bars (more bars indicate higher priority). If the scan state is enabled the icon appears in the right-hand corner of the scan priority icon. Symbol Priority Low priority scanned Low priority not scanned Medium priority scanned Medium priority not scanned User Guide 41 Symbol Priority High priority scanned High priority not scanned Background talkgroup not scanned Background talkgroup scanned To scan a talkgroup:

1. From the Home screen, press Menu then select Groups > Folders to open the current folder. If you want to open another folder, press Back to navigate 'up' the folder list, select the folder and press Open. 2. Select the talkgroup you want to scan and press Options, then select the Scanned option iconappears in the right-hand corner of the scan priority and press Select. The scanning icon. To stop scanning a talkgroup, select the talkgroup and press Options, scroll to the Not Scanned option and press Select. To change the priority of a talkgroup:

1. From the Home screen, press Menu then select Groups > Folders to open the current folder. If you want to open another folder, press Back to navigate 'up' the folder list, select the folder and press Open. 2. Select the talkgroup and press Options. Scroll to the Set Priority option and press Select. 3. Scroll to the priority setting (High, Medium or low) and press Select. The scan priority icon to the left of the talkgroup changes to the new priority. Restore folders The selected folder or all folders can be restored to their original settings. Only editable generic folders, the Favourites and DGNA folders can be restored. When you restore a folder or all the folders, the following occurs:

any talkgroups added to a folder will be removed, any deleted talkgroups will be restored, talkgroup properties (scan state and scan priority) are restored, and the selected talkgroup for each mode (TMO and DMO) is reset. You cannot restore the Always Attached, Background or Smart Call folders. 42 HBC3 handset-based console To restore a folder:

1. Select the folder and press Options. Defs. and press Select. To restore all folders:

2. Scroll to the Restore Defaults option and press Select and then select the Restore Folder When all the folders are restored, the DGNA folder is emptied of talkgroups, and the radio will reboot on completion of restoring the folders. 1. From the folder list press Options, then scroll to the Restore Defaults option and press 2. Scroll to the Restore All Defaults option and press Select. Press Select to confirm the Select. request to reset all folders. Viewing attached groups You can quickly view all the talkgroups that the radio is currently attached to (scanning). Only those talkgroups in the generic, Background, DGNA, Always Attached and Smart Call folders are displayed. 1. From the Home screen, press Menu then select Groups > Folders to open the current folder. Press Back to navigate back 'up' the folder list. 2. With the folder selected (highlighted) press Options, then select the Attached Groups option and press Select. Use the Up and Down navigation keys to scroll through the list of attached talkgroups. Quick Folders You can quickly change to a different folder by pressing a customised Quick Folder soft key. Your radio may be customised for up to 5 Quick Folders (Folders 1-5) for each operating mode (TMO and DMO). Each Quick Folder is assigned to a soft key on the keypad. You can choose which frequently used folders to assign to your Quick Folders (if customised). You can view the folders that are assigned as Quick Folders, however no talkgroup information is displayed (you will need to open the folder to view the talkgroup information). To assign a folder as a Quick Folder:

1. From the Home screen, press Menu then select Groups > Folders to open the current folder, then press Back to navigate back 'up' the folders list. 2. Select the folder you want to assign to a Quick Folder. Press Options, scroll to the Set Quick Folder option and press Select. 3. Scroll to the Quick Folder (Folders 1 to 5) you want to assign this folder to and press Select. User Guide 43 To view your Quick Folders:

1. Select Menu > Groups > Quick Folders. Select the Folder (1 to 5 depending on customisation) and press Select to view the folder assigned as this Quick Folder. Scanning ON/OFF Scanning of talkgroups (those that are always scanned or are background talkgroups) in the current selected folder and the Background folder can be enabled and disabled. If scanning is disabled, the radio will ignore incoming calls on these talkgroups. Your current talkgroup is always scanned. 1. Select Menu > Groups > Scanning ON/OFF. 2. Press Toggle (or the Select/Send key) to enable/disable scanning. 44 HBC3 handset-based console Contacts Details of regularly used contacts are stored in a phone book. The phone book has a series of folders labelled Menu, Search, All and Personal. Your radio may have additional folders containing contacts programmed into your radio during customisation. The Personal folder contains contacts you create (personal contacts). This folder only appears when you create your first personal contact. The All folder contains both personal contacts and contacts programmed into your radio. Each contact can have up to six associated numbers. A maximum of 6000 numbers can be held in the phone book. The icon next to each contact indicates the dial mode, a radio telephone, of the first number associated with it. or to a Contacts are arranged in a series of up to 64 folders including the following:

All contains all contacts in the Phone book Menu contains options to create and delete contacts in your Personal folder Search allows you to search the entire Phone book for contacts and numbers. Initially lists the names of all the folders in the phone book and the number of contacts in each folder. Personal contains contacts you create. This is the only folder you can edit. NOTE: The Personal folder is hidden until you create your first personal contact. NOTE: If customised you can also press the >Shortcut context key in the Home screen to open the Shortcut Bar, then select the >Phone book. To open the Phone book, from the Home screen, press the Menu context key, then select Phone >

Contacts. Searching and filtering contacts You can search the entire phone book for contact names and numbers, or filter the contacts within a folder by entering a search string into the Search Bar at the top of any folder (except Menu):

When the search is complete:

the Search folder lists folders containing at least one entry containing the search string, and the number of entries in those folders. You can open any of the listed folders. all other folders are filtered to show their matching entries above a dotted line. All non-

matching entries are listed below the dotted line. Spaces in a search string split it into separate strings. Search attempts to match each string in sequence. User Guide 45 To search for contacts and numbers within the phone book:

1. Select Menu > Phone > Contacts. Navigate to the Search folder. 2. Press the Up navigation key to open the Search Bar. 3. Enter a search string (see Text entry on page59) and press the Search context key. 4. When the search is complete, any folder containing a possible match to your search (and the number of possible matches within that folder) appear in the Search folder. To open a folder, select it and then press the Open context key. 5. To clear the search string, press the Delete context key to delete each character in the search string, then press the Cancel context key, then the OK context key. To filter contacts within a folder:

1. Open the folder. 2. Press the Up navigation key to open the Search Bar. 3. Enter a search string (see Text entry on page59), then press the Filter context key. 4. Any contact in the folder that is a possible match to your search criteria appears at the top of the contact list. To view the contact's details, select the contact and press the Open context key. 5. To clear the search string, press the Delete context key to delete each character in the search string, then press the Cancel context key, then the OK context key. View contact details 1. Select Menu > Phone > Contacts. 2. Navigate to the contact you want to view details of then press the >>Open key. The contact numbers associated with the selected name are displayed. The icon next to each number indicates its dial mode (for example, to a radio or to a telephone). To return to the original folder, press Cancel or the Cancel/Home key. Creating contacts Contacts you create are added to your Personal folder. To create a contact:

1. Select Menu > Phone > Contacts. 2. Navigate to the Menu card and select Create Contact. 3. Enter the contact name (see Text entry on page59) then press the Save context key. 4. Select a dial mode for this contact, either TETRA Network (default) or telephone/mobile 46 HBC3 handset-based console network. To change the dial mode, press the Up navigation key to select the dial mode line then use the Left or Right navigation keys to switch dial modes. Press the Down navigation key to continue entering the number. If the message Wrong number type appears, change the dial mode or check that the length of the number is between 5 and 8 numbers. 5. Enter the number (see Text entry on page59) then press the Save context key. 6. To add more phone numbers for the contact select Add Next Number and repeat the previous step. To add further contact numbers to a saved contact, open the contact and select Add New Number at the end of its numbers list. 7. To return to the Personal folder press the Cancel context key or press the Cancel/Home key. Editing contacts You can edit (and delete) contacts in the Personal folder of the Phone book. To edit personal contacts:

1. Select Menu > Phone > Contacts and then select the Personal folder. 2. Navigate to the contact you want to edit, then press Open. 1. Select the number and then press Options. Select Edit and press Select. 2. Make changes: to add additional digits press the number keys; to delete digits press the Left To edit the name:

1. Select the name and then press Edit. 2. Make changes as required, then press Save. To edit a number:

navigation key. 3. After making changes press Save. To delete a contact:

1. Select the contact and press Open. 2. Press Options. 3. Select Edit > Delete contact, then press Select. User Guide 47 Delete all contacts You can delete all contacts in your Personal folder. You can also delete individual contacts or numbers associated with them, see Editing contacts on the previous page. To delete all contacts 1. Select Menu > Phone > Contacts. 2. Navigate to the Menu card then select Delete User Contacts. 48 HBC3 handset-based console Calls Call types Voice call types Group Individual PBX PSTN Broadcast Transmit Only The various types of voice and data calls that are supported by your radio, and the acoustic and visual alerts that accompany a call, depend on your radio's customisation. Sepura radios support the following voice- and data call types:

Voice call type Description A call between you and a group of other radio users in your attached talkgroup. A group call is always a half-duplex call. Users can join and leave the call at any time. Group calls are initiated by pressing the PTT button. See Talkgroups and folders on page29. A call to another user or dispatcher in the TETRA network, or to an external telephone subscriber via the Gateway. Full-duplex and half-duplex calls are supported. Individual calls to outside the TETRA network can be made between a terminal or a dispatcher and a telephone subscriber in a network to which the TETRA network has a gateway interface. These calls are always full-duplex. A full-duplex call is one in which both parties can speak at the same time. The Select/Send and Cancel\Home keys are used to initiate and end calls. In a half-duplex call only one person can speak at a time and needs to press the PTT button. A call to a user on a private branch exchange (PBX). This call needs to be set up by your service provider and allows you to call a person by dialling their extension number (preceded by a programmed digit used to dial the exchange). A call to a user on a the public switched telephone network

(PSTN). A special type of group call, which is received by all terminals in the system (system-wide broadcast call) or by a specific group. The originator of a Broadcast call is usually a dispatcher. The receiving members cannot talk. A customised type of group call, where a call you make on a transmit-only talk group can only be received by an authorised dispatcher. Other users in the group cannot listen to the call. User Guide 49 Voice call type Description A special individual call configured on a soft key to request help or information from a pre-configured individual or talkgroup destination in a non-emergency situation. Quick calls can also send status and position reports. They can have a call priority that is different from the calls normally set up using the PTT or the Select/Send key. A special individual call made in Smart Call mode which allows you to make group or broadcast calls to specific talkgroups without the need to notify the network about the talkgroup change. Smart Call mode is initiated from a configured soft key. Smart call priority can have a call priority value from 0 (undefined) to 15 (pre-emptive priority 4, emergency) in TMO and to a value from 0 (undefined) to 3 (Emergency pre-emptive priority call) in DMO. The Alarm Call has the highest call priority in TETRA. Usually initiated by pressing the Emergency Button. Alerts all other radio users on the talkgroup of the emergency situation. Data call type Description Individual full-duplex Circuit Mode Data Circuit Mode data calls have a very short transit delay and so are suitable real-time services A Status message may have 65536 possible status values. Of these, value 0 is defined to mean Emergency, values 132767 are reserved, and values 3276865535 are available for network or user-specific definition. A user-defined message that can be sent by individuals and received by individuals and talkgroups. TETRA Packet Data extends TETRA to act as an IP subnet. This enables application programmers to build their applications in a well-standardised environment. Quick Call Smart Call Alarm Call Data call types Status Message SDS Message Packet Data Call History The Call History records up to 20 recent individual calls. It can be customised to display Incoming Calls or Outgoing Calls or both sets of call types in a list. The following icons are used to distinguish different types of call events:

TETRA and PBX/PSTN 50 HBC3 handset-based console The call history is deleted if you do not switch off your radio correctly (using the Cancel/Home key). Icon Description Received TMO call Sent TMO call Missed call. Call was not answered or cleared. TETRA Alarm Call Received TETRA DMO Call Sent TETRA DMO Call To display the call history Select Menu > Phone > Call History. To display the call information Select a call in the call history list then press Open. To make a call from call history See Individual calls on the next page. Group calls Group (point-to-multipoint) calls are calls where you talk to other users within a nominated group of radio users (a talkgroup). In a group call only one person can talk at any one time (known as half-

duplex mode). During group calls the microphone is active and all received audio is routed to the loudspeaker attached to the mobile radio or through the earpiece. During group calls the microphone at the top of your radio is active and all received audio is routed to the loudspeaker. Making a group call 1. Press and hold the PTT button and speak into the top microphone. The LEDchanges to solid red to indicate that your radio is transmitting, and an audible tone is heard and your radio status text changes to 'Talk'. User Guide 51 2. When you have finished talking, release the PTT button and listen to audio received, through the loudspeaker or earpiece. The LED changes to solid green whilst the group call is active and your radio status text changes to Group Call. 3. You can also clear the group call by pressing:

Clear Call soft key (if customised) Cancel/Home key Receiving a group call When a group call is received, your radio status changes to Group Call. The name of the talkgroup, talkgroup folder and the callers ID are displayed. Individual calls Individual calls (point-to-point) are private calls between you and one other person. You can make individual calls in two modes:

individual calls (half-duplex mode)where only one person can talk at a time using the PTT button. individual phone calls (full-duplex mode)where both parties can talk simultaneously. Use the Select/Send and Cancel/Home keys to initiate and end the call. When an individual call is received, your radio sounds an audible alert and displays the identity of the caller (if the contact is stored in your phone book) or the ISSI of the caller. Privacy mode You can press a customised Privacy Mode soft key before dialling or during a call to prevent interruptions from other calls during important or sensitive call. When you have Privacy Mode enabled, calls made to your radio are marked as missed calls (see Call History on page50). Making individual calls (half-duplex mode) Calling a contact:

1. Select Menu > Phone > Contacts to open the contacts menu. 2. Navigate to a contacts folder (such as the All folder) and select your contact. Press the Open context key, then choose the phone number. 3. Press the PTT button to initiate the call (or press Options, select Dial then press Select. When the call is connected (the tri-colour LED illuminates green and a confirmation tone sounds). 4. To speak, press the PTT button; release the PTT button to listen. 5. To end the call, press the Clear context key or the Cancel/Home key. 52 HBC3 handset-based console If your radio has been customised with a single dial mode for TETRA, PBX and PSTN numbers, the dial mode icon cannot be changed. Calling by dialling:

1. From the Home Screen, dial the number of the person you are calling. 2. Press the PTT button to initiate the call (or press the Call context key). 3. To speak press the PTT button; release the PTT button to listen to the other radio users. 4. To end the call, press the Clear context or the Cancel/Home key. Calling a contact directly:

When the radio is customised with this feature, a call can be made to a contact without having to select a specific number, by pressing the PTT button. 1. Navigate to a contacts folder (such as the All folder) and select your contact as normal. 2. Press the PTT button to initiate the call:

The radio uses the first valid TETRA ID for the contact to make the call. If no TETRA ID exists for the contact, an error message will be displayed. 3. To speak press the PTT button; release the PTT button to listen to the other radio users. 4. To end the call, press the Clear context or the Cancel/Home key. Receiving individual calls (half-duplex) 1. Press the PTT button to answer the call or the Clear context key to reject the call. Making individual phone calls (full-duplex mode) Calling a contact:

1. Select Menu > Phone > Contacts to open the contacts menu. 2. Navigate to a contacts folder (such as the All folder) and select your contact. Press the Open context key, then choose the phone number. 3. To initiate the phone call press the Dial context key. 4. To end the call, press the Clear context key or the Cancel/Home key. If your radio has been customised with a single dial mode for TETRA, PBX and PSTN numbers, the dial mode icon cannot be changed. Calling by dialling:

1. From Home Screen, dial the number of the person you are calling. 2. Press Send or press the Select/Send key to initiate the call. 3. To end the call, press Clear. User Guide 53 If your radio has been customised with a single dial mode for TETRA, PBX and PSTN numbers, the dial mode icon cannot be changed. Calling a contact directly:

When the radio is customised with this feature, a call can be made to a contact without having to select a specific number, by pressing the Select/Send key. 1. Navigate to a contacts folder (such as the All folder) and select your contact as normal. 2. Press the Select/Send key to initiate the call:

The radio uses the first valid TETRA ID for the contact to make the call. If the TETRA call is not successful, the radio uses the first valid PSTN ID to make the call. If no TETRA ID exists for the contact, an error message will be displayed. 3. To end the call, press the Clear context or the Cancel/Home key. Hands-free mode If you are using a full-duplex audio accessory, simply press the Select/Send key and continue fully hands free. Receiving a phone call When an incoming phone call is received, your radio sounds an audible alert and displays the identity of the caller (if the contact or number is stored in your phone book). 1. Press the Accept context key or the Select/Send key to answer the call. Press the Reject context key or the Cancel/Home key to reject the call. 2. To end the call, press the Clear context key or the Cancel/Home key. Your radio can be customised to answer calls automatically after a set time period, exactly as if the Accept context key or the Select/Send key had been pressed. If the time period is set to zero the call may be answered before any alerts are audible. Answering phone calls in half-duplex mode You can answer an incoming full-duplex (phone) call as a half-duplex call. This is useful, for example, where a full-duplex call could pick up too much background noise for clear communications. 1. Press the PTT button to answer the call in half-duplex mode. 2. Continue as for Group calls and individual half-duplex calls:

To speak press and hold the PTT button and speak into the microphone. To listen release the PTT button and listen to audio received through the speaker. 3. To end the call, press the Clear context key or the Cancel/Home key. 54 HBC3 handset-based console Broadcast calls Sometimes it may be necessary for your Dispatcher to make a high-priority broadcast (also known as a Site Wide Call) to all network users. These calls take priority over any lower priority on-going calls, and you cannot respond to them: pressing the PTT key has no effect during a broadcast call. During a broadcast call the display changes to Broadcast Call and the displayed. Broadcast Call icon is A Quick Call allows you to request help or information in a non-emergency situation. Quick Calls To initiate a Quick Call 1. Press a pre-configured soft key. 2. Press the PTT to transmit. Depending on the configuration this causes all or some of the following to happen:

if your radio is in Smart Call Mode it reverts to Group or Individual Mode (see Smart Calls below). your radio sets up a voice call to a programmed recipient which can be individual or talkgroup your radio sends up to two Status messages your radio sends a position report Quick Calls cannot be made from a radio in Gateway Mode. Switch your radio to TMO or DMO before making a Quick Call. Quick Calls cannot be made from a radio which is making or receiving an emergency call or if your radio is in Transmit Inhibit mode. See Emergency operation on page17 and Transmit Inhibit on page71. Smart Calls A Smart Call is a high priority group or broadcast call to a specific talkgroup. This can be useful, for example, where you need to make an announcement to everyone in the vicinity of an incident, not just those in your selected talkgroup. The radio supports two separate Smart Call Modes (A and B) associated special folders Smart Call 1 and Smart Call 2 respectively. Each Smart Call Folder can be pre-configured with up to 75 talkgroups. You initiate a Smart Call by switching to Smart Call mode, then you press the PTT to transmit to a chosen talkgroup in the Smart Call Folder. Broadcast calls cannot be made from a radio which is in DMO. Attempting to make a Smart Call in DMO initiates a group call to the attached talkgroup. User Guide 55 It is not possible to make a Smart Call from a SRG3900/SCG22 radio operating in Gateway Mode and the Speech Call Settings option is not displayed. Make a Smart Call 1. Open the Smart Call menu either of the following:

Press a preconfigured soft key. Use the Speech Call Settings menu (see Speech call settings below. 2. Select mode Smart Call A or Smart Call B. Your radio goes into Smart Call Mode. The tri-colour LED flashes amber and the active Smart Call folder is displayed. 3. Select the required talkgroup in the current Smart Group Folder by . 4. Use the PTT (or press the Select context key or the Select/Send key) to transmit to the chosen talkgroup. To leave Smart Call Mode 1. Open the Smart Call menu either of the following:

Press a preconfigured soft key. Use the Speech Call Settings menu (see Speech call settings below. 2. Select Group or Individual:

Groupreturns you to your previous talkgroup Individualallow you to make an individual call by dialling Speech call settings The Speech Call Settings option is not available if your radio is operating in Gateway Mode. The Speech Call Settings option is not available if your radio is in Transmit Inhibit on page71. 1. Select Menu > Groups > Speech Call Settings. 2. Select one of the options. Modifying your call setup Under certain circumstances, the type of a call which is being initiated by your radio may be modified by the network or by the recipient of the call. For example, you might make a group call, but the actual call being established might be converted to an individual call to a dispatcher. This feature is typically used by network administrators to provide centralised control over certain services (e.g. customising all the radios so that Alarm Calls are all the same type and destination, 56 HBC3 handset-based console allowing the network to decide what type of call is made and the destination whenever an Alarm Call is initiated). When your call is modified you are alerted with specific visual and acoustic alert indications, to make you aware that a new type of call is being connected. The call continues as per any normal call of the new type, and the icons and information elements displayed inform you about the type of the ongoing call. Once the call is established, the characteristics of the new call are the same as those of any call of that type. For example, if the new call is half-duplex, you need to press PTT before starting to speak, releasing the PTT allows other parties to take the speech item, and the top microphone and half-

duplex loudspeakers are used. Changing the behaviour of the PTTduring TMO group calls Your radio may be customised to allow you to talk back on your TMO selected group even if you are currently receiving a group call from another talkgroup being scanned by your radio. When enabled, pressing the PTT when in a received group call will start a new call on the radio's selected talkgroup, allowing you to participate in that call whilst monitoring your current scanlist activity. There are two options:

To selected groupwhen the PTT is pressed in a received group call to a scanned group

(not the selected talkgroup), the radio leaves the existing call and starts a new call to the scanned talkgroup. To received groupwhen the PTT is pressed during a received group call, the radio transmits in the current call. If the PTT behaviour to set to the to selected group option, and the radio is in a group call from a scanned talkgroup that is not the currently selected talkgroup, an icon Information Box. When the radio leaves the scanned group, to start a call to the selected talkgroup, the icon is not displayed. appears in the Call The behaviour of the PTT button can be set for all group calls using the PTT Behaviour option available from the Options menu. Alternatively, you can override the default setting during a group call by pressing the PTT context key (which toggles the two options) and select the PTT behaviour that allows you to respond to the call. Your radio provides a notification message to show the change of PTT behaviour (either to selected group or to received group). When the call is terminated, the behaviour of the PTT button reverts to that selected using the menu option. If your radio is operating in Gateway mode, the radio can only respond to group calls in the selected talkgroup (to selected group). To set the PTT behaviour using the menu:

1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > PTT Behaviour. 2. Select the PTT behaviour (To received group or To selected group), then press the Select context key. User Guide 57 To change the PTTbehaviour during a group call:

1. When the group call is in progress, press the PTT context key. Select the PTT behaviour and press the Select context key. Alternatively, you can change the PTT behaviour during a group call by pressing the Options context key, then selecting the PTT Behaviour option. Press the Select context key to change the behaviour of the PTT, for example if your default behaviour is set to the to selected group option, the option to change to the received group appears for selection. 58 HBC3 handset-based console Text entry Writing and editing text on your radio is similar to most Smartphones. Text edit mode is automatically activated when you select certain functions, such as creating a message or adding a contact to your phone book. To enter characters:

Press a key repeatedly to highlight a character in its Character Selection Box at the bottom of the screen, then press the Select context key (or wait for the character to be auto-inserted). To delete a character:

To delete the character to the left of the cursor press the Delete context key. To enter special characters:

To insert punctuation (full stop, comma, or semi-colon) press zero (0) repeatedly until the symbol is highlighted in the Character Selection Box, then press the Select context key (or wait for the character to be auto-inserted). To insert a space press 1 (on the keypad). To insert symbols press the hash(#) key repeatedly until the symbol is highlighted in the Character Selection Box, then press the Select context key (or wait for the character to be auto-inserted). To change the character set:

Press the Star (*) key during text entry. Cursor movement When you enter text the cursor advances automatically. You can also move the cursor character by character or to the start or end of a sentence using the navigation keys. Cursor Movement Move one character at a time Move to the start of a sentence Move to the end of a sentence Description Press the Right or Left navigation key. Press the Up navigation key. Press the Down navigation key. Add a space Press the 1 key. User Guide 59 Character sets You can use character sets to change the style of the text, and to enter numbers and special characters. The character set can be changed as often as required when entering text. The following character sets are supported:

Character set Description Auto-capitalisation (Abc) The first letter is entered in upper-case, with all following characters in lower-case. New sentences start with a capital letter and end with a full stop (.), question mark (?) or exclamation mark (!) followed by one or more spaces. Upper case (ABC) All characters are entered in upper-case. Lower case (abc) All characters are entered in lower-case. Numeric (123) All characters are numbers. Special characters(!.@) You can select special characters such as full stops (.), semi-colon (;) and commas (,) by pressing the 0 key. Further special characters #@!$%&()*+- are available on the # key. Chinese characters Simplified and Zhiyan. See Chinese character sets below. The selected character set is indicated on the status line at the top of the display. Chinese character sets Simplified Chinese You can build up Simplified Chinese characters by pressing the appropriate keys on the keypad to input strokes. As strokes are entered they display in the top left of the character selection box and the set of possible matching characters is displayed above the Context keys. You can also use pinyin to enter a phonetic version of a Simplified Chinese character (e.g. Lu) which is displayed in the top left of the character selection boxin the same place as the strokes described aboveand the set of possible matching characters is displayed above the Context keys. When the right and/or left arrow icons are displayed in the character selection box, use the Left and Right navigation keys to select from the characters displayed. To see further characters press the Down navigation key, and press the Up navigation key to return to characters already viewed. The characters are displayed in sets of seven. To enter the highlighted characterpress Insert or press the Select/Send key. Zhiyan Chinese Zhiyan Chinese characters are composed and entered in a similar way to Simplified Chinese characters, however when the keys are pressed to input the strokes that build up the character you 60 HBC3 handset-based console must then press the Select/Send key to display the set of possible matching characters. User Guide 61 Messages Message Inbox Your radio supports messages. All message types are available from the Messages menu. status messages, text (SDS) messages and picture Incoming messages are displayed in the Inbox with the most recently received messages at the top. Unread messages appear in Bold. The Inbox can store up to 50 messages. When the Inbox is full, unsaved older messages are automatically deleted when new messages are received. If you want to keep a message, you must save it. If your radio is configured to show messages in tabs, the most recent message appears on the last numbered tab, for example if there are 5 messages in your Inbox a new message will appear on tab number 6. If you want to read older messages use the navigation keys to scroll through the message tabs. Unread message appear on black labelled tabs. To keep the Inbox to a manageable size it is recommended that messages are deleted or saved after reading them. See Saved messages on page65. When a new message arrives the New Message icon appears to show there is a new message in the Inbox. the radio vibrates the tri-colour LED flashes amber the blue LED flashes periodically (missed event) the display flashes periodically (missed event) if specified in the message, the text of the message (SDS message) or image (Picture message) is displayed on the screen as soon as it is received To open the Inbox:

Choose one of the following methods:

Press a customised soft key Open the Shortcut Bar (in the Home screen press the Shortcut context key or the Up navigation key) then navigate to the Inbox shortcut and press the Select context key. Message icons Various icons are used to identify the type of message received:

62 HBC3 handset-based console Icon Description Status message SDS message (unread) SDS message Broken message: there was a problem receiving the message. Its contents are lost or damaged. Saved Messages is nearly full to capacity [customisable]

SDS message with Paging Alert (unread) SDS message with Paging Alert Picture message (unread) Picture message Inbox operations You can perform a number of functions from the Inbox. With a message selected, press the Options context key to perform one of the following functions:

Open the message View the message details (See View message details below.) Reply to the message (not picture messages) Forward the message to a contact (not picture messages) Save the message (See Saved messages on page65.) Delete the message Opening messages To open a message:

1. Open your Inbox (see To open the Inbox: on the previous page). 2. Scroll to the message and then press the Open context key. View message details You can view the details of received messages. User Guide 63 To view message details:

1. Open your Inbox (see To open the Inbox: on page62). 2. Select a message then use Options > Details. 3. To exit the Details screen press Cancel. Item Description Message location (Inbox) Size. Note: this is a relative measure of the message size (not number of characters). You can use Size to decide which message(s) to delete if Saved Messages becomes full (see Message Inbox on page62) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Sender Time received Dial mode Date received Reply to a message To reply to a message:

1. From an open message, select Reply. 2. From Inbox, select a message then select Options > Reply. 3. Create your response (see Text entry on page59.) 4. When you have finished, press Send. 5. Select a recipient:

a. Send to Defaultsend to message sender b. Send to Groupsend to your current talkgroup 64 HBC3 handset-based console c. Phonebooksend to a contact in your phonebook d. Dialsend to a number you dial 6. Press Send. Open a URL in a message Open the message then select Options > Open URL. A text message may contain a URL which you can open in the WAP Browser. If your radio has been customised to do so, URLs in text messages can open automatically in the WAP Browser when they are received. Saved messages You can save up to 50 messages in your Saved messages folder. When the remaining space is insufficient to save a particular message, an error is displayed which indicates the amount of space required to store the current message. Delete one or more messages to clear some space for new ones to be saved. Saved Messages can be lost if the radio is not correctly switched off when powering down (see Power off on page11). To save a message:

1. Open the message (or select it in the Inbox). 2. Select Options > Save. A message indicating that the message has been stored is displayed. To view saved messages:

Select Menu > Messages > Saved Messages. Use the navigation keys to scroll through the list of messages. 1. View Saved Messages (see To view saved messages: above). To delete the selected saved message select Delete Message To delete all saved messages select Delete All To delete saved messages:

2. Select Options > Delete. 3. Select a delete option:

Create a text message 1. Select Menu > Messages > Create Message. An empty message box appears. 2. Enter your message text (see Text entry on page59). User Guide 65 To return to the top level menu screen, either wait for the inactivity timer to expire, or press and hold the Cancel/Home key, or press and hold the clear soft key. You can set an option to confirm that the message has been delivered, see SDS report request on page68. 1. View Saved Messages and select the saved message. 2. Select Options > Edit. 3. Edit the message as required. (See Text entry on page59.) 3. EITHER:

send the message immediately save the updated message To send the message immediately See Sending messages below. To save the message Select Options > Save. To edit a saved text message 4. EITHER:

send the message immediately save the updated message To send the message immediately See Sending messages below. To save the updated message Select Options > Save. Sending messages You can send text (SDS) and status messages to:

the currently selected talkgroup a Phonebook entry a destination you key in the default destination customised in your radio (for example, the message sender) For setting default destination see Set default destination on page 70. 66 HBC3 handset-based console 1. Choose one of the following methods:

Select a saved text message Select a status message from the Send Status List Create a text message 2. Select Send or Options > Send. 3. Select a destination (see below):

Send to default destination 1. Select Send to Group. The current talkgroup is shown. Send to current talkgroup 2. Select Send. Send to a Phonebook entry Select Send to Default then select Send. The message is sent and the radio returns to the message screen. 1. Select Phonebook. Your Phonebook opens. 2. Select your contact and press Open. 3. Select the phone number. (Contacts can have multiple phone numbers). 4. Press Send to send the message. While you are selecting the address for a message you cannot make outgoing calls to Phonebook. 2. Key in an individual address (ISSI, Individual Short Subscriber Identity) in the dial box. Send to a dialled destination 1. Select Dial. 3. Press Send to send the message. Send a status message To send a status message, choose one of the following methods:

Press Shortcut to open the Shortcut Bar, then select Quick Status (if customised). Shortcut Bar From the Home screen 1. In the Home screen, double-press the Groups key. 2. Press the Left and Right navigation keys to scroll through the status messages. 3. To send the message, press Send, then select Send to default (or choose another destination such as your talkgroup, contact in your phone book or dial the number). User Guide 67 Soft key (Quick Status message) Press a soft key. Messages sent from soft keys are called Quick Status messages. During a Group Call with the call dialogue screen displayed, you cannot send Quick Status messages using the Select/Send key or the Cancel/Home key. Instead, first press the Down navigation key to clear the call dialogue screen, or exit the call. Menu Send. 3. Select a destination. 1. Select Menu > Messages > Send Status. 2. Use the Up and Down navigation keys to highlight the status and then select Options >

Edit status messages before sending You can edit the text label of a status message prior to sending it. When the message is edited, it is sent as a text message, rather than as a status message code. With the status message selected, press Options and then select Edit . Enter your text before sending the message. The Edit option is only available when you open a status message from the menu. SDS report request You can request a Delivery Report and/or a Read Report when you send an SDS (text) message. These cause a pop-up box to open when sent messages are successfully delivered and read respectively. 1. Select Menu > Messages > SDS Report Status. 2. Navigate to a report type and press Toggle to toggle the report on (ticked) and off. Set default destination You can enter and update the default destination address that your radio offers when you send a status or SDS message. This can be either a talkgroup or an individual. 1. Select Menu > Messages > Status Destination. 2. Select Options (or press the Select/Send key) then select Edit. 3. Select Dial or Phonebook:

select Phonebook to open the Phonebook and choose a contact (Contacts on page45) select Dial to enter the required number directly from the radio keypad. 68 HBC3 handset-based console 4. Press Save or the Select/Send key to save the number (or press Cancel or the Cancel/Home key to cancel it and return to the previous number). Picture messages Picture messages Your radio can receive picture messages which may have accompanying text. You may also be alerted by an alarm (if specified in the message) and vibration and LED alerts (if customised). (You cannot reply to or forward a picture messages.) You can press any key to stop the audible alarm. Open picture message 1. Select a picture message then click Open. 2. To view the image full screen, use Options > View Image. The image and any text associated with it are displayed. If the image data has been corrupted the Broken Picture icon is displayed. Paging alerts The Paging Alerts feature allows the radio to act as a pager when it is in normal operating mode or when you select a user profile which results in the radio appearing to be switched off. (See User profiles on page90.) The Paging Alerts feature is triggered by receipt of a Status message which is automatically displayed. If there is also an associated SDS message to explain the reason for the Paging Alert this is automatically displayed on the radio. If a call is in progress the Paging Alert interrupts it. The SDS message is marked with an icon to indicate that it is associated with a Paging Alert. When the Paging Alert is triggered you hear a discordant two tone alarm and the tri-colour LED flashes amber to indicate that a Status message has been received. To stop the two tone alert press any key. Your radio can be customised so that a Paging Alert automatically makes it fully operational on receipt of the Status message which triggered the Paging Alert. User Guide 69 Networks Authentication Remote User Assignment (aliasing) If your radio supports Remote User Assignment (RUA) using TETRA Interoperability Profile (TIP) defined procedures and transactions, your presence on the network requires authentication. RUA allows you to be authenticated onto the network by entering a user identity and optionally a PIN

(maximum 7 digit). Once accepted by the system, you can be addressed by your user identity, if aliasing is supported by the system. At the start of a shift, you can take a pool radio and, after you log in, other radio users on the network can identify you by you user name. TETRA services including individual voice and data (Status and SDS) communication can be set up using your user name (provided your user name and your corresponding user ISSI are in the Phonebook). If you power on your radio using the Emergency button you must log on to the network before an Alarm call can be initiated. Network log on/off may be initiated by your dispatcher. To log on/off:

A screen appears:

Your radio may be customised to request PIN entry log on to the network when powered on. Alternatively select Menu > Networks > Log ON/OFF. Log Onenter you user ID and password then press Confirm. Log Offpress Confirm. Detailsindicates the current log on state of the radio. and displays the user's network identity. Change Network If your radio is customised to use other networks, you can manually select a network from a list of configured networks, or allow your radio to automatically use a suitable network when you move into its coverage area. If your radio is customises for End to End Encryption, the radio may change the End-to-End Encryption status when the selected network is changed. It may also provide a selection of talkgroups on other networks. If a talkgroup is selected that does not belong to the current network, your radio will change network accordingly. After switching to a different network, make sure that your selected talkgroup is valid for that network. For details of talkgroup selection see Talkgroups and folders on page29. 70 HBC3 handset-based console Your radio can be configured to display the Network Name continuously on the Radio Status Line

(RSL), subject to space, when it is idle. If your radio registers on a Visited Network network the Radio Status Line (RSL). Migrated icon is displayed in the To manually change network 1. Select Menu > Networks > Change Network. 2. Navigate to the required network then press Select or the Select/Send key. When you manually select a network it remains selected regardless of whether your radio is able to obtain service on that network. To automatically change network 1. Select Menu > Networks > Change Network. 2. Navigate to Automatic then press Select or the Select/Send key. The Network Name of the automatically selected network is displayed below the Automatic option in the list when the radio is able to obtain service. Transmit Inhibit Sometimes you may be working in areas that are sensitive to Radio Frequency (RF) signals such as healthcare facilities. To continue operating your radio in these areas, you can set your radio to Transmit Inhibit mode to prevent any RF transmission. When Transmit Inhibit is activated or deactivated, a status message can be sent confirming the operational state of your radio. You cannot activate Transmit Inhibit when you are in a call. Alarm Calls initiated in Transmit Inhibit mode are still transmitted. You cannot select Transmit Inhibit if user profile Do Not Disturb is selected. See User profiles on page90. Your radio automatically leaves Transmit Inhibit mode when you power it off; when powered on again Transmit Inhibit is not activated. To activate or deactivate Transmit Inhibit mode 1. Select Menu > Networks > Transmit Inhibit. 2. Select Toggle to toggle Transmit Inhibit on/off. When Transmit Inhibit mode is activated:

The Transmit Inhibit icon appears in the Shortcut Bar as a notification or the status line on the Home screen The Tri-colour LED flashes orange four times approximately every 2 seconds. There may be a soft key programmed to toggle Transmit Inhibit on/off. For a list of programmed soft keys refer to the radio's Help (Menu > Help). User Guide 71 Fallback Mode If a base station is customised to operate in fallback mode, when network communication is lost any radios using the base station will continue to operate, but with a reduced service. This is known as Fallback Mode. The base station broadcasts the loss of communication to all radios which are using it. In Fallback Mode your radio can only communicate with other radios that are registered on the same site: no inter-site communication is available. When your radio enters Fallback Mode:

the radio status bar indicates Fallback Mode and the warning triangle is displayed momentarily the Fallback Mode text box pops up in the centre of the screen for a few seconds showing a customisable text message the RSSI antenna icon flashes continuously the tri-colour LED flashes amber intermittently (indicating limited service mode) the radio generates a warning tone When your radio leaves Fallback Mode:

the radio status bar returns to normal (Ready or similar) the RSSI antenna icon stops flashing the tri-colour LED stops flashing a text box pops up indicating normal operation. the radio generates a warning tone. 72 HBC3 handset-based console Operating Modes Your radio supports the following operating modes:

In Trunked Mode Operation (TMO Mode) your radio operates on the network infrastructure supplied by your service provider. In Direct Mode Operation (DMO Mode) your radio can transmit directly to another radio

(antenna to antenna). In DMO mode radio coverage depends on the position of the caller and the receiving radio. When you switch to DMO your radio leaves the network and tunes to the selected DMO talkgroup. See also DMO Mode below. In Gateway mode your radio acts as a DMO gateway (or gateway) which allows users working in DMO to communicate with users operating on a Trunked Mode (TMO) Network. This extends the coverage of the network, allowing users in DMO mode to communicate with those operating in TMO. See also DMO gateway operation on page75. In Repeater mode your radio enables two or more radios operating in DMO mode to communicate over an extended range, automatically relaying voice and messages by operating as a repeater. See also Repeater Mode on page78. To change operating mode from the Home screen Press the Menu context key, then select Networks > Operating Mode. Scroll to the mode

(highlight it) and press Select. Alternatively, a soft key may be programmed as a shortcut to this function or a shortcut may be added to the Shortcut Bar. Open the Shortcut Bar (in the Home screen press the Shortcut context key), scroll to the Operating Modes shortcut and then press the Select context key. You can then select the operating mode. DMO Mode In Direct Mode Operation (DMO), radios communicate directly with other TETRA radios without using a network. The radios must all switch to DMO and select the same talkgroup, and that talkgroup must use the same channel (frequency). Communications to other users on the network are impossible unless they also switch to DMO and select the same talkgroup. This means that in DMO, communications to the dispatcher is impossible unless they also switch to DMO and select the same talkgroup, or if they communicate through a DMO gateway (see DMO gateway operation). Group calls DMO supports group calls (see Group calls on page51) which are made and received in the same way as radios operating in TMO. In DMO TETRA Alarm Calls are either sent to the currently selected DMO talkgroup or (if customised) may switch to TMO to make the call. If TMO is unavailable Alarm Calls are made using DMO. See Emergency operation on page17. User Guide 73 Individual calls Your radio can be customised to allow you to make individual calls to other radios working in DMO which are attached to the same talkgroup. In this case individual calls are initiated by pressing the PTT key. Your radio can also be customised to allow you to select a channel only talkgroup. If you select a channel only talkgroup your radio cannot make or receive group calls: it can only make or receive individual calls. You can enable Presence Checking so that your radio checks whether the receiving radio is available to receive when you attempt an Individual call. See DMO options on the facing page. Using a DMO gateway A DMO gateway (or gateway) is a device which allows users working in Direct Mode to communicate with users in Trunked Mode effectively extending the working range of a radio. When your radio is in DMO Mode and it is in range of a DMO gateway the if customised, an audible alert is generated. You can now make and receive group calls to TMO radios (and to the dispatcher) via the gateway. See DMO gateway operation on the facing page. gateway icon appears and, If your radio is outside the range of a gateway, you may still be able to hear the speech of another user who is in range of a gateway and who is involved in a group call via the gateway. In this case the Communication Mismatch icon is displayed to indicate that you cannot take part fully in the call. If you attempt to respond to the overheard speech, any radios within gateway range which can hear you also display a Communication Mismatch icon to tell them that the speech is not being routed via the gateway to TMO users. Using a DMO repeater You can extend DMO Mode range by using a DMO repeater (repeater). If your radio detects a DMO Repeater icon is displayed and your radio can communicate with any other repeater the radios in the selected DMO talkgroup which are also within the range of the repeater. See Repeater Mode on page78. 74 HBC3 handset-based console If a radio is within range of a repeater but for some reason a call cannot be set up through it your radio attempts to set up the call in DMO Mode and the displayed to all members of the talkgroup to indicate that there may be members of the talkgroup who cannot take part in the call. Communication Mismatch icon is DMO options You can select the following DMO options:

GW DMO Ind Address Set the default individual address to which a TMO Individual call is routed by a radio operating in DMO gateway mode. Press Select then Options. Editenter a new address as described in Text entry on page59. The dial mode may be changed by pressing the Up and Down Navigation keys. When the number and dial mode are as required press Save. Phonebookenter a new address from the phonebook. Navigate to the required phonebook contact then press Details see all numbers associated with the chosen contact. Select a number and press Save. Use Defaultreverts changes to the default value. Presence Check Specify whether Presence Checking is performed before DMO Individual calls are made. When Presence Checking is On your radio checks whether the intended receiving radio is available and in radio contact before it attempts to set up the call. GW/Rep Filter Specify whether your radio uses or ignores any gateway and/or repeater it detects. In the Gateway/Repeater Filter screen select one of the following options:

No GW/Repdo not use any gateways and repeaters detected by your radio Use RepeaterUse repeaters detected Use GatewayUse gateways detected Use GW/RepUse a gateway or a repeater detected by your radio. When option Use GW/Rep is selected, your radio selects the first gateway or repeater that it detects. If the radio selects a gateway, a stops sending a presence signal it will no longer be detected by your radio. gateway icon is displayed on the status line. If the gateway DMO gateway operation A DMO gateway (or gateway) is a device which allows users working in Direct Mode Operation

(DMO) to communicate with users operating on a Trunked Mode Operation (TMO) network (see User Guide 75 DMO Mode on page73). The gateway re-transmits information received on the DMO Interface onto the TMO interface, hence extending the working range of the DMO radios. Therefore if your radio is in DMO and is within range of a gateway you can make and receive Group calls to and from TMO radios, including your dispatcher. When you switch to Gateway mode, your radio connects your currently (or last selected) selected DMO and TMO talkgroups. Gateway connecting DMO radios to TMO network When in Gateway mode, with the exception of Emergency operation on page17 and Smart Calls on page55, no calls (voice or data) can be made or received on the radio being used as a gateway. The radio is acting only as a relay between Direct mode and Trunked mode. If you activate the Emergency Button when the radio is operating in Gateway mode, any calls that are currently active through the gateway cease. The radio reverts to Trunked Mode Operation and initiates an Alarm Call to the attached Trunked mode talkgroup. When the Alarm Call ends the radio remains in Trunked mode. If you are going to leave a gateway unattended for long periods of time, or as a permanent installation in a remote location, we recommend that you configure it as required (select and attach the required Trunked mode talkgroup and the required Direct mode talkgroup) and then power the radio off. This will save the configuration; each time the radio is powered on again, it will re-start with the saved configuration. This will ensure that the radio is always running with the correct gateway configuration even if it turns on unexpectedly after circumstances such as power failures. Switching to Gateway mode When you switch to Gateway mode, your radio connects your currently (or last selected) selected DMO and TMO talkgroups. If your radio has been reprogrammed, you may need to switch to DMO mode (see Operating Modes on page73) and select a DMO talkgroup before Gateway mode can be enabled. 76 HBC3 handset-based console To switch to Gateway mode Press a customised soft key. Alternatively follow these steps:

1. Press Menu then select Networks > Operating Mode. 2. Scroll to Gateway Mode and press Select. 3. A large tick graphic is displayed and the gateway icon is displayed on the status line. After various checks the top level screen message Ready: Gateway appears. (If this does not happen see the Tip above.) If you do not see message Ready: Gateway, select a DMO talkgroup to connect to (described in Selecting a talkgroup on page32). The radio remembers the last Direct mode talkgroup selected for use in Gateway mode, and uses it automatically the next time the radio is switched into Gateway mode. When the radio is configured as a Gateway, the top level screen shows the TMO and DMO talkgroups selected:

Description 1 2 TMO talkgroup DMO talkgroup Gateway states When in Gateway mode the radio makes no differentiation if the DMO talkgroup is a Channel Only talkgroup. Please see DMO Mode on page73 for more information on DMO Channel Only talkgroups. A gateway can enter several states of operation, depending upon the status of calls through the gateway, whether it has detected other gateways present or other users of the direct mode channel. These states are reported as top level screen messages including the following:

Message Monitoring Gateways Busy DMO Channel Other gateway found Description Displayed when the radio is first switched to Gateway mode, or when the DMO frequency is changed by requesting a new talkgroup or a previously Occupied or Reserved channel is detected as free. This screen is displayed if the DMO frequency is detected as being Occupied or Reserved. Another gateway offering the same or an overlapping DMO service has been detected. Ready: Gateway In Call: Gateway The gateway is ready and has no calls in progress. A call is in progress through the gateway. User Guide 77 Changing talkgroups in Gateway mode When a talkgroup is changed in Gateway mode, only the DMO talkgroup changes; the TMO talkgroup remains unchanged unless the radio has been configured with fixed pairs of DMO and TMO talkgroups. (The radio can be programmed with up to 100 pre-set pairs of TMO and DMO talkgroups.) In this case, if the selected DMO talkgroup is paired with a TMO talkgroup then the radio also automatically selects the paired TMO talkgroup. Changing TMO talkgroup 1. Select Trunked mode operation:

a. Press Menu then select Networks > Operating Mode. b. Scroll to Trunked Mode and press Select. c. Select the TMO talkgroup to connect to (see Selecting a talkgroup on page32). 2. Select Gateway mode operation:

a. Press Menu then select Networks > Operating Mode. b. Scroll to Gateway Mode and press Select. Changing DMO talkgroup Select the DMO talkgroup to connect to (see Selecting a talkgroup on page32 Repeater Mode A radio acting as a repeater provides a service to other radio users. It extends the range and enhances the reliability of Direct Mode communication compared with basic direct communication between radios. You can use a repeater to enable communication between radios which are out of range of each other. The following diagram shows radios A, B and C and a repeater which are on the same DMO talkgroup. A, B and C are in range of the repeater. Because of its location, the repeater can pass communications between A, B and C even though they are out of range of each other. 78 HBC3 handset-based console You can also use a repeater to enable communication between two radios which cannot communicate directly, perhaps because their users are do not have line of sight with each other. The following diagram shows radios A and B and a repeater which are on the same DMO talkgroup. A and B are in range of the repeater. Because of its location, the repeater can pass communications between A and B even though they cannot communicate directly. What repeaters cannot do In Repeater Mode the radio cannot:

User Guide 79 make individual calls take part in another group call send status or SDS messages use the Quick Status feature edit text use the phonebook view the library of pre-defined Status messages Participating in repeated calls A radio in Repeater Mode may (depending on its customisation) operate either as a Standard Repeater or as a Repeater with Call Participation. Standard Repeater If your radio is configured to operate as a Standard Repeater you cannot take part in calls which are being relayed through it. Repeater with call participation If your radio is configured to operate in Repeater Mode with Call Participation you can take part in the calls which are being relayed through it if the call participants are on the same DMO talkgroup as you. To stop participating in a call, press the Clear context key; you radio continues to act as a Repeater. You cannot switch to Repeater Mode if the radio is in Transmit Inhibit on page71 or if the radio has initiated an alarm call (see Emergency operation on page17) which has not been cleared. If you select Transmit Inhibit Mode while your radio is operating in Repeater Mode, the radio leaves Repeater Mode and it stops functioning as a Repeater. If you are going to leave a repeater unattended for long periods of time, or as a permanent installation in a remote location, we recommend that you configure it as required (select and attach the required Direct Mode talkgroup) and then power the radio off. This will save the configuration;

each time the radio is powered on again, it will re-start with the saved configuration. This will ensure that the radio is always running with the correct repeater configuration even if it turns on unexpectedly after circumstances such as power failures. Switching to Repeater Mode To switch to Repeater Mode see Operating Modes on page73. Before you can use the radio as a repeater you must select a Direct Mode talkgroup. Changing talkgroups in Repeater Mode You can change talkgroups while your radio is operating in Repeater Mode in the usual way (see Talkgroups and folders on page29.) 80 HBC3 handset-based console If you change to a different DMO talkgroup it may (depending on the customisation) terminate any calls active through the repeater. Using the Emergency Button in Repeater Mode If you use the Emergency Button when your radio is operating in Repeater Mode, any calls that are currently active through the repeater will cease. When the Alarm Call is subsequently cleared, the radio may not necessarily remain in Repeater Mode. Repeater states A radio acting as a repeater can enter several states of operation, depending upon the status of calls through the repeater and whether it has detected other users of the direct mode channel. These states are reported as the following top level screen messages:

Message Description Ready: Repeater The repeater is ready and has no calls in progress Busy DMO Channel The repeater has detected that the DMO channel is being used. In this case repeater operation is suspended. In Call: Repeater A call is in progress through the repeater. Talk Repeater Participating in a call and transmitting User Guide 81 Callout alerts Your radio can receive Callout Alerts sent over the network to inform you of incidents. When a Callout Alert arrives the radio sounds an audible alarm and a Callout message is displayed on the screen. To silence this alarm press any key. A voice call may also be initiated. Your radio may also be customised to alert you of Callouts in other ways (such as vibrator alert and/or a flashing LED alerts). When it receives a Callout Alert your radio goes into Protected Callout Mode (in which many features are disabled) for a set time period or until you respond to or acknowledge the Callout message. This mode is designed to stop you getting distracted and to focus your attention on an incident. To view Callout messages Press Menu then select Phone > Callout. Alternatively, press the Up navigation key (or Shortcut) to open the Shortcut Bar, then select Callout. If Callout messages have been received they are listed with Callout icons. To see the options for a Callout Highlight a Callout and press Options OR press the Select/Send key to activate the first option in the Options menu. (The Select/Send Key Shortcut icon between the Context keys indicates that this shortcut is available.) Open view the Callout message plus more information associated with the message dialogue Accept indicate you are accepting the Callout Reject indicate you are rejecting the Callout User Response compose a free-form text message to send to the Callout originator

[customisable]

Delete delete one or more Callouts Details view the details of the Callout message Status send or update your current Availability status. The Callout screen indicates that an Availability Status message has been sent. [customisable]

Responding to Callouts When you respond to a Callout your radio may automatically send a message (if programmed in the radio) or you can select a message from a list or select User Response (if customised) to compose and send a free-form text message. 82 HBC3 handset-based console Callouts requiring a response Some Callouts require a response. The following responses are possible:

Accept Reject Standby Press Accept to indicate that you intend to act on the Callout (or select Accept from the pop-up menu displayed from the Left or Right navigation key. If only one acceptance message is programmed in your radio an informative message is displayed to show that it has been sent to the originator of the Callout. If multiple messages have been programmed, select one of them and press Select to send it. Alternatively (if customised) you can compose and send a free-form text message. Depending how the Callout has been configured it may either exit once the acceptance message has been sent or it enter an Information Phase during which information may be sent to and received from the originator of the Callout. This could include a pre-set message, a free-form text message or a Callout group call. Press Reject to indicate you do not intend to act on the Callout (or select Reject from the pop-up menu displayed from the Left or Right navigation key. Your radio exits from the Callout and Protected Callout Mode and the top level screen is displayed. Select Standby to acknowledge receipt of the Callout and to indicate that you are standing by for further information before accepting or rejecting. During standby the Callout goes into its Information Phase during which information may be sent to and received from the originator of the Callout. During standby you can also accept or reject the Callout andif use of the PTT is permittedmake group calls to the Callout group. During Standby you can view the following Callout message details :

the Response required icon the Callout group time and date when the message was received the severity of the Callout Alert the Callout ID icons to show:

whether the Callout is to a group or an individual whether the Callout is incoming or outgoing whether or not the Callout is End-to-End Encrypted User Response Allows you to compose and send a free-form text message to the originator of the Callout.

[customisable]

User Guide 83 Exit Respond User Response Callouts not requiring a response Some Callouts do not require a response. You can respond to or ignore then as follows:

Press the Exit context key to exit the Callout and exit, and return to the top level screen. No response message is sent. Press the Respond context key to display the Information screen offering the various pre-set messages to send from the radio to the originator of the Callout and vice versa. To send one of the pre-set messages select it and press the Select context key. You can compose and send a free-form text message to the originator of the Callout. When your message is ready to send press the Confirm context key. You can continue to respond and send messages as described here until the Callout ends and the top level screen is displayed.

[customisable]

Details You can view the following Callout message details:

the Response required icon the Callout group time and date when the message was received the severity of the Callout Alert the Callout ID icons to show:

whether the Callout is to a group or an individual whether the Callout is incoming or outgoing whether or not the Callout is End-to-End Encrypted Callout Test alert If you receive a Callout Test Message either respond or cancel the alert:

to cancel the Callout Test alert press the Cancel context key. The Callout exits and the radio displays the top level screen. You can still view the details from Messages > Callouts. to indicate that you are ready to respond to Callout alerts press Respond (or the Left or Right navigation key). The following response options are displayed:

84 HBC3 handset-based console Press the Respond context key to display the Response screen. Press the Right or Left navigation key to view additional options. To send a Test OK message to the Callout originator select it and press the Select context key. The Callout Test exits and the top level screen is displayed. Respond User Response

(If customised) allows you to compose and send a free-form text message to the originator of the Callout. When the message has been sent the Callout Test exits and the top level screen is displayed. Details The Details screen is displayed showing:

the Callout Test icon an indication that the Callout Test has been sent to an individual the originator of the Callout Test message time and date when the message was received the severity of the Alert the Message ID icons to show :

whether the Callout is to a group or an individual whether the Callout is incoming or outgoing whether or not the Callout is encrypted Press the Back context key to display the previous screen. When a Callout ends When a Callout times out or is cleared by the Callout originator the Callout ends, your radio displays the top level screen and the functionality which had been suspended is restored. Protected Callout Mode When it receives a Callout alert your radio goes into Protected Callout Mode (and many features are disabled) for a set time period or until you respond to or acknowledge the Callout message. This mode is designed to stop you getting distracted and to focus your attention on an incident. During Protected Callout Mode you can only do the following:

Read the current alerting message Acknowledge the Callout alert Make an Alarm Call User Guide 85 Switch Transmit Inhibit on/off Make a Quick Call (if customised as a higher priority than Callout) No callsapart from group calls allowed by some Calloutsreceived while your radio is in Protected Callout Mode are connected but their details are saved. To view them after the Callout has ended select the Missed Event menu. If you receive a new Callout while your radio is already in Protected Callout Mode, the new Callout takes priority and is displayed immediately. The existing Callout is treated as a missed Callout: to view its details after the Callout has ended select Messages > Callout. The Missed Call and/or Missed Callout icons display after the new Callout has ended. Missed Callouts To view information about the missed Callout select Menu > Messages > Callout. Your radio ignores Callouts received when any of the following functions are active:

Ongoing Alarm Call (a highest priority call) Alarm Call Quick Call (when customised as a higher priority than Callout) Smart Call 1 (when customised as a higher priority than Callout) Smart Call 2 (when customised as a higher priority than Callout) Group Focus Privacy Mode When the higher priority function ends, the radio notifies you of the missed Callout by sounding an audible alert and displaying a Missed Callout icon. Callout display A typical Callout screen looks as follows:

Item Description 1 2 Message location (Inbox) Callout type, see Callout icons. 86 HBC3 handset-based console Item Description Callout group or Callout originator 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Time received Information icons Callout message header text (customisable) Backdrop image (customisable, radios with colour display only). Indicates severity of the Callout. Date received Explanatory text about the Callout 10 Left/Right Navigational keys available for more options Callout icons Icon Description Callout Alert message, response required. Missed Callout Callout Alert message, user response has been sent. Callout Alert message, response not required. Callout Availability message. An information message has been received by the radio. An information message has been sent from the radio. Standby Message has been sent from the radio. Callout Test message, user response is required. The identity of the sender is displayed instead of the Callout group. Callout Test message, user response has been sent. The receiving radio and the Callout originator both have End-to-End Encryption active. Either the Callout originator or the receiving radio has End-to-End Encryption switched off. The Callout is addressed to an individual. User Guide 87 Icon Description The Callout is addressed to a group. Left and Right navigation keys left and right arrow icons are displayed between the Context keys during Protected Callout The Mode when there are more options than are shown on the Context keys. EITHER:

Press the Left or Right navigational keys to display a menu of the additional options available OR press the Select/Send key to action the first item in the menu of options. The Key Shortcut icon is displayed between the context keys to indicate that this shortcut is available. Select/Send Group calls to Callout group While your radio is in Protected Callout Mode the only calls you can make are TETRA Alarm Calls, Quick Calls (if customised as a higher priority than Callout), and, if allowed, group calls to the Callout group. You can only make group calls if PTT use is permitted during the Callout. For some Callouts your radio can make and/or receive group calls to a specially configured Callout group when it is in Protected Callout Mode. This group may be the group the radio is attached to when the Callout is received, or a different group which the radio is configured to connect to on receipt of the Callout or when an acceptance message is sent. While the PTT is pressed and the radio is transmitting the text Talk is displayed in place of CALLOUT on the Radio Status Line at the top left of the screen and no backdrop is displayed. When the radio is receiving a group call the ISSI (or shortened ISSI) or identity of the transmitting party is displayed in place of CALLOUT on the Radio Status Line at the top left of the screen. When the Callout has exited, depending on the customisation, the radio either reattaches to the group it was attached to before receiving the Callout, or remains attached to the new group. Information Phase Some Callouts do not exit after the initial acknowledgement is sent, but enter an Information Phase when information may be Information can include a pre-set message, a free-form text message or a Callout group call. Your radio can also be customised to display a backdrop graphic to indicate it is in Information Phase. received from the originator of the Callout. sent to and When information is sent (for example Will Respond) it is displayed and the icon displays. information sent 88 HBC3 handset-based console Press the Exit context key to exit from the Callout or the Respond context key to use an option on the Information screen or press a Left or Right navigational key to display a menu of further options. For some Callouts, group calls can be made by the radio to the Callout group during the Information Phase if use of the PTT is permitted during the Callout. The options available during the Information Phase are Information, Accept, Reject, User Response and Details. Send a pre-set information message. If only one Information message is programmed in the radio you are notified by an informative message confirming that the pre-programmed Information message has been sent to the originator of the Callout. Alternatively you can select from a list of preconfigured messages. Select View Response to check the complete message text before sending it. Sends an acceptance message to the originator of the Callout. Send a rejection message. You are notified by an informative message confirming that the rejection message has been sent to the originator of the Callout, and your radio exits from the Callout and Protected Callout Mode and the top level screen is displayed. Information Accept Reject User Response Send a free-form text message. Details See the following Callout details:

the Response required icon the Callout group time and date when the message was received the severity of the Callout Alert the Callout ID icons to show:

whether the Callout is to a group or an individual whether the Callout is incoming or outgoing whether or not the Callout is End-to-End Encrypted User Guide 89 Features Privacy Screen User profiles Your radio can be customised for various advanced features and can have various soft keys assigned to frequently used features. Your radio can be customised to display a picture when the screen is inactive for a specified period of time. This helps protect the privacy of any displayed information. This Privacy Screen feature is particularly useful if you are wearing your radio at shoulder level. The normal display reappears as soon as any activity occurs which turns on the back light. User profiles are pre-set combinations of alerts and settings on your radio. They allow you to switch settings easily to match your circumstances or environment. An icon profile selected, appears on the status line or the Shortcut Bar. Up to ten pre-defined user profiles may be configured for your radio. Example user profiles could be Normal, Lone Worker and Covert. showing the number of the To change the user profile:

1. From the Home screen, press the Groups context key 3 times ( User Profiles). 2. Use the navigation keys or the Navi-keys to scroll through the user profiles. 3. Press the Select context key to activate the selected user profile. Menu selection 1. Select Menu > User Profiles. 2. Navigate to a profile and press Select. Example user profiles Typical profiles could include:

Covert Mode operation Covert Mode turns off all visual alerts. It deactivates the backlight and adjusts the microphone sensitivity to allow Whisper mode. It also reduces the level of the loudspeaker if an earpiece is not being used. If your radio has a vibrator alert enabled then this is deactivated. See Whisper mode on page22. 90 HBC3 handset-based console This user profile allows you to prevent any individual calls or group calls from any talkgroup other than the selected talkgroup from being connected to your radio. Any calls made to a radio which has Group Focus selected are not recorded as Missed Calls. Group Focus Do Not Disturb This user profile allows you to focus on an important task. It assumes you do not want to be distracted by a call or alert on your radio. The profile sets your radio so that no incoming calls are allowed except calls from the current talkgroup (Group Focus above). Covert Mode operation is active. Audible alerts are disabled. If this profile is selected you cannot select Transmit Inhibit (see Transmit Inhibit on page71 User Guide 91 WAP NOTE: WAP pages are not accessible when Wi-Fi is enabled on the radio. Your radio may be configured to browse WAP pages. The browser options are customised using Radio Manager. Starting the WAP browser To open activate the WAP browser:

select the WAP option from the Applications menu OR press a programmed soft key [customisable] OR open a WAPURL contained within a received SDSmessage (or your radio may be customised to open the WAP URLautomatically). Open a URL in a message on page65 Exit at any time by pressing Back or the Cancel/Home key (if customised). Press the Left navigation key to display the previous screen/page and the Right navigation key to display the next screen/page. If customised, your radio supports the entering of text to specify a URL and entering of data into a form, and so on. See Text entry on page59. Saving check box or radio button selections Sometimes you may need to select an option which has a check box or radio button. When setting an option that uses a check box or radio button, toggle the left context key to select the appropriate option (radio button or check box). To save the selection either scroll to the bottom of the screen and highlight the Save button or press the Left context key (either a tick icon or labelled Save depending on customisation). Using WAP Exiting the browser Navigation Entering text Browser menu Home Page Select to activate the WAP browser and display the browser's homepage contents. If customised, you can change the Home Page (Settings > Settings > Homepage). 92 HBC3 handset-based console Select to enter a URL to start browsing the internet for the site matching your URL. You do not have to enter the URL specific input words (http://), they are already entered in the URL box. Select after browsing has been suspended or when you have exited from the browser. The browser displays the last page viewed. Select to view all the available bookmarks, some of which may be collated into bookmark folders. If customised, you can create, edit and delete bookmarks and bookmark folders, and organise the bookmarks into different folders. If there are no saved bookmarks, the browser displays the bookmarks page and a warning message. Select to view and edit your browser options. You can set the URL of the home page, enable/disable downloading of image files, change the scrolling method and the network connection timeout. There are also options to change security settings. Browse Resume Browsing Bookmarks Settings Help Navigation menu Select when the browser is active to view any customisable help stored on your radio. Press Homepage > Menu from the WAP browser screen to access the Navigate options:

Returns to the Home page on the WAP browser. Displays the 'Go to URL' screen (if customised). Home Open Page Mark Page Forward/Back Reload Reloads the current page. Only visible if the radio is customised to allow the creation and/or editing of bookmarks. Creates a bookmark for future reference so that the web page may be downloaded quickly. Use these options to move to the next or previous page in the History (if more than one page is stored in History). User Guide 93 Selecting Settings from the Browser menu provides access to the Advanced settings. Settings Advanced Settings Homepage Downloads Scroll Mode Key Press Timeout Connection Timeout Resend Data Prompt Security settings Secure Prompt Select this option to set the Home page. You can enter a new Home page URL and set it as the current and default home page. You can disable or enable the downloading of images, background sounds and objects when downloading information from a website. Disable this option to download the text content of an item quickly (a box containing a cross is displayed where the image would have been). If the downloading of images is enabled the boxes may be shown with a temporary display of a paper clip while the image is downloaded. Scroll to the Save option and press Pick to save the setting. You can change the Scroll Mode to be Block or Smooth so that when scrolling through text, the display will either jump from one block of text to the next, or scroll smoothly. The scroll speed may also be set to Fast, Medium or Slow. This option allows you to set the Key Press Timeout to one of Fast, Medium, Slow or Off. This options allows you to set the timer that specifies how long the browser will wait before cancelling idle network requests. This option allows you to set (on/off) whether the browser confirms whether to resend data to the radio. This could be used for forms which are not stored locally in the browser cache and must be re-

requested from the server. Select this option to set (on/off) whether the radio displays a warning message when it is changing from a secure connection to a non-secure connection and vice versa. 94 HBC3 handset-based console Current Certificate CA certificates Send Referrer Authentication Certificate Info If this option is selected, information about the digital certificate associated with the server which delivered the current document is displayed. A certificate is a digital ID that is issued by a trusted third party known as a certificate authority (CA). The radio uses CA certificates to authenticate web sites which send information to the radio. To view information on a CA, select it and press View. You can choose which CAs are used by the radio by selecting on or off. If this option is used to set whether the browser sends the HTTP Referrer header as part of the HTTP requests. This option is used to set (on/off) whether the browser caches HTTP authentication credentials. If this option is selected, information about the root digital certificates installed in the browser is displayed. Select this option to clear any or all of History, Cache or Cookies. Restart Browser Select this option to restart your browser. Clear About Select this option to view information about the browser. History menu The History page displays a list of up to nine of the most recently viewed Browser pages. The currently viewed page is highlighted. To revisit a page listed in the History, select it and then press the Left context key. If more than nine pages have been viewed, the list of all pages in the History is stored and may be accessed by selecting the More option. Press the Left context key, or the star (*) or hash (#) key, to open the More page(s). User Guide 95 Select this option to exit History and resume browsing at the page which was selected when the History Menu was chosen. Exit history Show URL Delete Select this option to display the currently selected URL. Select this option to delete the history. Using bookmarks A bookmark consists an internet address, the book mark title, and access point (and a user name and password if required by the web page). Bookmarks can be organised into folders to make it easier for you to find your favourite bookmarks or those of similar topics. Any saved bookmarks and bookmark folders are listed and can be opened by either pressing the keypad key corresponding to the number of the bookmark or folder, or by selecting it and pressing Go. New bookmarks and folders If you have no saved bookmarks or folders, the screen displays the message 'No saved bookmarks'. You can create up to 100 bookmarks and up to 10 folders (a single folder can contain 100 bookmarks). Press Bookmarks > Menu to create your bookmarks. New Bookmark Select this option to create a new bookmark. Press the Edit key and enter the title of the bookmark, URL and select the folder. Select Save when done. If you want to create a new folder for this bookmark, select the Bookmark option and press Select. Select the New Folder option and enter the details of the new folder. New Folder Select this option to create a new folder. Enter the name of the folder and press Save. The folder appears on the Bookmark menu and as an selectable option when creating a new bookmark. Bookmark and folder options You can perform the following functions on a selected bookmark or folder:

Details - shows the details of the selected bookmark or folder. Delete - allows you to delete the current bookmark or folder. 96 HBC3 handset-based console New Bookmark - creates a new bookmark. New Folder - creates a new bookmark folder within the list of bookmarks and folders. Move - Move the bookmark or folder within the list of folders and bookmarks. Select the bookmark or folder, then enter the number corresponding to the position in the numbered list where you want the bookmark or folder. Delete All - deletes all bookmarks and/or folders that are displayed in the same list as the selected folder. Hotkeys - allows you to create Hotkeys, but if any soft keys have been customised on the radio which are not related to the WAP browser the Hotkeys function will not function. Additionally, the following options are available for bookmarks:

Move to folder -allows you to move the bookmark into a folder, and name the folder. Set as Homepage - allows you to set the page as your Home page in the browser. This page is displayed when you select the 'Go to Homepage' card. Call handling Outgoing While the browser is active it is possible to make a group call to the attached talkgroup by pressing the PTT. If a talkgroup has not been attached, the user may select a talkgroup (see section on Group Calls). During an outgoing call the browser remains active but you will only be able to view the current page and pages which have already been viewed. When a call is in progress and the browser page is displayed, pressing and holding the Right navigation key allows you to view the call information box. If the call information box is displayed while the call continues, the browser page may again be displayed by pressing and holding the Left navigation key, or simply pressing either of the Left and Right navigation keys. It is not possible to make an individual voice call while the browser is active. In order to do this, close the browser by pressing and holding the Cancel/Home key, if customised. When the call is set up and is ongoing it is possible to return to the browser either by selecting a card which allows this

(Resume Browsing) and pressing the Down navigation key or by using a soft key (if customised). When the browser has been re-activated and the call is ongoing it is possible to switch between displaying the call information box and the browser using the Left and Right navigation keys as described above. During an outgoing individual call the browser remains active but the user is only able to view the current page and pages that have already been viewed. If the user makes a Alarm Call while the browser is active, the browser will automatically be closed and the radio will display the top level screen in Call Mode. Incoming When an individual call is received while the browser is active, the call information box is visible on top of the browser and you can answer the call. If an Alarm Call is received the browser closes and User Guide 97 the radio displays the Home screen, allowing you to respond to the call. You can still make a group call attached to a talkgroup but not a telephone type call whilst the browser is open. SDS messages If an incoming SDS message is received while the browser is active and the message is marked for immediate display then the browser will close and the SDS message is displayed. If the received SDS message is not marked for immediate display the browser will remain active and a warning triangle appears and the LED will flash. It is not possible to send an SDS message while the browser is active. Mode change (TMO, DMO AND GMO) If the radio is switched to Direct Mode Operation (DMO) while the browser is active, the browser remains active and you may view any stored pages. A warning message is displayed because the browser is off line. If a keypad lock soft key has been customised so that the keypad lock may be selected by pressing and holding the soft key, the browser will close and the radio will display the top level screen. Keypad lock Transmit Inhibit If the radio is operating in Transmit Inhibit mode, you can still view any pages in the browser that have been stored locally but it is not possible to browse pages online. If an attempt is made to browse pages online, the browser active icon flashes and a warning message appears. 98 HBC3 handset-based console Location Services Your radio may be customised and enabled for location services, such as GPS or other regional Global Navigation Satellite Systems (GNSS), that allows the radio to determine your location

(longitude, latitude and altitude) and provides both timed- and distance-based reporting. The generic location services function on the radio is called 'GPS' and it provides support for multiple regional GNSS including BeiDou2. The behaviour of the GNSS function is highly customisable, both by customisation of the radio and over the air from a control room application. Your radio may also be customised to send position data automatically alongside TETRA Alarm Calls or Status messages. The destination to which any reports are sent may be changed over the air. If your radio accepts a change of destination command it sounds a customisable tone and sends you an SDS message to inform you. If customised, you can enable/disable the GNSS function, see Reporting options on the next page. GLONASS is only supported on SRG3900 radios with serial numbers whose 4th digit is C or above

(that is, beginning with 2PNC.) For the best performance, your radio needs an uninterrupted view of the sky. Position To locate your position 1. Select Menu > GPS > Position > Locate. While the position is being calculated the icon flashes. Position information When the position has been determined the following information is displayed:

Latitude and Longitude values. Fix indicates how accurate the reading is:

2D indicates that less than four satellites were used to determine the position 3D indicates that at least four satellites were used. The number in brackets indicates how many satellites were used. Age shows how long ago the position was first displayed; to refresh the reading press Locate again. GPS/BeiDou2 shows the number of satellites used in the selected system. Note that the name of the selected GNSS is customisable. User Guide 99 Direction To read the direction in which your radio is travelling 1. Select Menu >GPS > Direction. The Direction screen gives information about the current direction and speed of travel. If the radio is stationary no information is displayed. However if the radio becomes stationary after a period of movement the direction information is displayed for five seconds to give you time to view it. Direction is reported in degrees from North. Speed is reported in either km/h or miles/h depending on the customisation. Reporting options To control reporting from your radio 1. Press Menu > GPS > GPS Report. 2. Select one of the following options:

Never Send reporting is disabled regardless of any instructions sent over the air. The warning icon is displayed on the top line of the screen as a reminder that reporting has been explicitly disabled. Always Send reporting is enabled regardless of any instructions sent over the air. No Override your radio will respond to instructions sent over the air. Reports are sent if requested and is switched off if requested. GNSS selection The radio may be customised to support a number of satellite systems such as GPS and BeiDou2. To change your GNSS selection:

When the radio has rebooted, check your satellite connections using the GPSLocate function

(Menu >GPS > Position > Locate) to view the type and number of satellites available in the selected system. 100 HBC3 handset-based console Security Sometimes when you are working, you may need to secure your radio from unauthorised use. The easiest way to secure your radio is to lock the keypad when your radio is not in use. Your radio may be customised with other security features such as PIN entry and a remote user network log on (to authenticate network users). End-to-End Encryption If your radio shows the Secure Comms icon when it is idle, the selected talkgroup is customised for End-to-End Encryption (E2EE). In other words, calls you make by pressing PTT are end-to-

end encrypted. It is not possible to accidentally make a non end-to-end encrypted call. Every talkgroup or individual subscriber that can be exempt from End-to-End Encryption must be explicitly customised into the radio. End-to-End Encryption is designed to provide maximum security for voice and SDS communications, whether operating in Direct Mode or Trunked Mode, irrespective of the security level provided by the network. Depending on customisation, the radio may change the End-to-End Encryption status when the selected network is changed. It may also provide a selection of talkgroups on other networks. If a talkgroup is selected that does not belong to the current network, your radio will change network accordingly. A radio that supports End-to-End Encryption may nevertheless be required to make calls that are not end-to-end encrypted. For example, calls to certain talkgroups and individual subscribers may be customised to be exempt from End-to-End Encryption. All telephone calls are also not end-to-end encrypted. When dialling, a separate End-to-End encrypted. During voice calls only (not SDS calls) your radio may allow you to toggle End-to-End Encryption on/off with a soft key. Secure Comms icon is displayed in the dial box if the call or SDS will be When you are in a voice call, the Secure Comms icon indicates whether End-to-End Encryption is operational. When the radio participates in a call that is not end-to-end encrypted, a periodic non intrusive audible alert is generated (if customised). When you receive an SDS (text) message or picture messages, if you see the Secure Comms icon in the message details that the message was end-to-end encrypted. If the message Security Check Fail is displayed while making or receiving calls, it indicates that the radio has not been customised properly. In such cases, please contact technical support in your organisation. Updating E2EE keys End-to-End Encryption keys are automatically updated when the radio registers on the network when it powers on, and whenever the Key Management Centre (KMC) on the network broadcasts User Guide 101 them. If E2EE traffic keys become outdatedwhich can happen in poor network coverage conditions you can manually update them as described here. Manual key update is not supported on radios which rely on a Smartcard for E2EE. During a manual update any active ongoing non-emergency call or ambience listening calls are cleared.(Any active emergency calls are maintained.) Manual update requires good network conditions. To manually update E2EE keys Your radio must be in TMO mode to update E2EE keys. Either press a suitably customised soft key or use the following procedure:

1. Press Menu then select Security > Crypto Settings. 2. Scroll to New Key and press Send. When the key update is in progress the Key agreement status icon appears. Zeroising Radios that support End-to-End Encryption are loaded with sensitive cryptographic keys. To avoid a potential security compromise, you may be able to delete (zeroise) these cryptographic keys if permitted by your operational procedures. Please refer to your Security Officer for details on how to zeroise your radio as well as related operational procedures. 102 HBC3 handset-based console Asset management Handsets, consoles, radios and accessories are assets that need to be effectively managed throughout their life cycle. In some organisations it is a requirement to track assets and this can be done by labelling them. Asset management refers to the periodic maintenance of your radios. Maintenance includes software upgrades and reprogramming of the radio to ensure that it continues to meet your requirements. Labelling The simplest form of asset management is to attach labels to your radios. Self adhesive labels (those with an adhesive backing) are recommended as they are easy to apply and commercially available, such as 3M Thermal Transfer Polyester label material 7815. Do not use solvent based adhesives. Always check the adhesive used with the self-adhesives label. Do not engrave any part of the radio. Engraving the radio's casing may affect the compliance ratings and may invalidate the product warranty. Do not use paint, correction fluid or other forms of liquid or aerosol to write or mark the radio or an accessory. Chemicals may affect the radio's casing and invalidate the compliance ratings and product warranty. Customising your radio Your radio has a large number of parameters that can be customised using the programming software tool, Radio Manager 2. These parameters are grouped into a series of templates that can be easily modified to suit the end user's preferences. A complete set of parameters for your radio is called a customisation. Your radio is customised by directly connecting it to a computer running Radio Manager 2 software using a Sepura Data/Programming Cable. To program a single radio A data/programming cable, with either an RS232 (D-type) connector or a USB connector, is available from Sepura for customising a single radio. A data/programming cable, with either an RS232 (D-type) connector or a USB connector, is available from Sepura for customising a single radio. To program your radio To program the radio you need to connect it to the computer with a programming cable. If the radio is disconnected from the vehicle a power lead is also required. If the radio cannot be easily accessed, customisation can be performed through the console or an Applications Interface Unit (AIU). User Guide 103 Connect the radio (or console or AIU) to a computer running Radio Manager and start your customisation. Contact Sepura for more information on programming your radio. 104 HBC3 handset-based console Contact Details Sepura Limited 9000 Cambridge Research Park Beach Drive, Waterbeach Cambridge, CB25 9TL United Kingdom www.sepura.com www.linkedin.com/sepuraplc www.facebook.com/sepuraplc

@sepuraplc www.instagram.com/sepuraplc www.youtube.com/sepuraplc

User Guide SCC3 colour console Original Instructions: ENGLISH Document Number: PD-UG-0008 Issue 8.0 Copyright Sepura Limited 20022020 All rights reserved. No part of the information contained herein and the other referred documents may be copied, distributed or transmitted by any means to any other party without prior written permission of Sepura Limited. The distribution of this document may require a Non-Disclosure Agreement (NDA) between Sepura Limited and their agents or customers. This document, the referred documents and the described product are considered protected by copyright according to the applicable laws. Disclaimer Although every reasonable effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information contained herein and any other referred document, this should not be construed as a commitment on the part of Sepura Limited and the liability of Sepura Limited for any errors and omissions shall be limited to the correction of such errors and omissions. Sepura Limited welcomes any comment and feedback as a way to improve any delivered documentation. The information contained herein has been prepared for the use of appropriately trained personnel, and it is intended for the purpose of the agreement under which the information is submitted. Any party using or relying upon this information assumes full responsibility for such use and in no event shall Sepura Limited be liable to anyone for especial, collateral, incidental, or consequential damages in connection with or arising out of the use of this information. The information or statements given in these documents regarding the suitability, capacity or performance of the mentioned hardware or software products cannot be considered binding but shall be defined in the agreement made between Sepura Limited and the customer. Sepura Limited reserves the right to revise these documents and to make changes to its content at any time, without prior notification. Trademarks The Sepura logo and some product branding logos and names are registered trademarks of Sepura Limited. All other trademarks appearing in this document are the property of their respective owners. Software license agreement CAREFULLY READ THE LEGAL AGREEMENT CORRESPONDING TO THE LICENSE YOU PURCHASED, WHICH DESCRIBES THE GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR THE USE OF THE LICENSED SOFTWARE. 9000 Cambridge Research Park Contact Details Sepura Limited Beach Drive Waterbeach Cambridge CB25 9TL United Kingdom sepura.com General information This user guide describes the default operation and features of the SCC3 console. Your service provider or organisation may have customised your radio to optimise its performance to suit your individual needs. There may be differences between this guide and the way your product operates. Contact your service provider or organisation for information about the customisation of your radio. The SCC3 is attached to the SRG3900/SCG22 or MDT-500-2 mobile radio and either installed within a vehicle or desk mounted. It is typically used with a handset or with a fist microphone. Audio is supplied from a loudspeaker attached to the mobile radio, or the loudspeaker in your handset or through the earpiece in a headset. Some instructions within this guide assume that the console is operated using one of these audio attachments. The SCC3 emulates the user interface (UI) functionality of the attached handset. For example, with an HBC handset attached the SCC3 adapts to the UI of the HBC and does not display the Context key options. The instructions in this guide assume that an HBC3 handset is attached. You may need to refer to the HBC User Guide for instructions on using the console with the HBC. Before operating the SCC3 colour console, read the safety instructions contained in the Product Safety Guide (SPR-DOC-00170) supplied with the product. Safety Regulatory European regulations Sepura declares that its TETRA radio products are compliant with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the European Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU on the harmonisation of the laws of the Member States relating to the making available on the market of radio equipment and repealing Directive 1999/5/EC. These products are also compliant with directive 2011/65/EU having been designed and manufactured to the RoHS requirements. Simplified EU declaration of conformity Sepura declares that the radio equipment types SC21, SC20 and STP9000 series hand-portable radios and SRG3900/SCG22 mobile radio are in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:

www.sepura.com/support/compliance-documents. Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment disposal information This symbol on the product or its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of as household or commercial waste. Some countries have set up collection and recycling systems for waste electrical and electronic products. By ensuring that this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potentially negative consequences for the environment and human health, and help conserve natural resources. Please dispose of your waste product according to your national and local regulations. Contact your service provider or Sepura for information on how to return this product for waste disposal. User Guide i Disposing of waste batteries Sepura radios are supplied with a rechargeable battery. This symbol on the battery and its packaging indicates that it must not be disposed of with household or commercial waste. Please dispose of your waste batteries according to your national and local regulations. Contact your service provider or Sepura for advice on disposing batteries in your area of the world. ii SCC3 colour console Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Regulations Sepura TETRA radios generate, use and radiate RF energy. Radios that comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant of part 15 of the FCC rules are identified by an FCC certification ID label (located under the battery). Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment (rule part 15.21). This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. US and Canada Markets FCC radiation exposure statement This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled applications where users have been made aware of the potential risks for exposure and can exercise control over their exposure. This product is not authorised for general population, consumer or similar use. This transmitter must not be co-

located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. IC RSS warning The term IC: before the certification/registration number only signifies that the ISEDC technical specifications were met. IC radiation exposure statement This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled applications where users have been made aware of the potential risks for exposure and can exercise control over their exposure. This product is not authorised for general population, consumer or similar use. This transmitter must not be co-

located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. User Guide iii CONTENTS Safety Regulatory Your console at a glance Connection with the SRG3900/SCG22 mobile radio Console and Application Interface Unit Mobile radio audio control Controls & indicators Navi-knob Navigation Keys Soft keys Context keys Status icons LED indicators Emergency button Getting Started Power on Power off Locking and unlocking the keypad Home screen Shortcut Bar Notifications Menu SmartMenus Help Emergency operation Making an Alarm call Receiving an Alarm call Clearing an Alarm call Power on Alarm call Sound Adjusting the volume Muting audio Loudspeaker high/low audio mode Independent volume control feature Whisper mode Public/Private mode Audible tone alerts Personalising your radio Adjusting the backlight i i 1 2 2 2 4 4 4 5 5 6 9 10 11 11 11 11 12 13 13 14 15 16 17 17 18 18 19 20 20 20 21 21 22 23 23 24 24 iv SCC3 colour console Day/Night mode Adjusting text and icon size Setting the display language Menu style Time and Date Talkgroups and folders Special folders Talkgroup Selection Mode Typical folder arrangement Selecting a talkgroup Folder Selection Mode Contacts Searching and filtering contacts View contact details Creating contacts Editing contacts Delete all contacts Calls Text entry Cursor movement Character sets Chinese character sets Messages Message Inbox Opening messages View message details Reply to a message Saved messages SDS report request Picture messages Paging alerts Networks Authentication Change Network Call types Call History Group calls Individual calls Broadcast calls Quick Calls Smart Calls Modifying your call setup Changing the behaviour of the PTTduring TMO group calls 24 25 26 26 27 28 29 30 31 31 36 44 44 45 45 46 47 48 48 49 50 51 54 54 54 55 56 58 58 59 59 60 60 61 61 62 63 66 67 67 68 68 68 User Guide v Transmit Inhibit Adjusting the DMO power transmission level Fallback Mode Operating Modes DMO Mode DMO gateway operation Repeater Mode Callout alerts Responding to Callouts Callout display Group calls to Callout group Information Phase Features Privacy Screen User profiles WAP Using WAP Browser menu Navigation menu Settings History menu Using bookmarks Call handling Location Services Position Direction Reporting options GNSS selection Security End-to-End Encryption Zeroising Asset management Labelling Customising your radio Revert radio settings to customisation settings 69 70 70 71 71 73 76 80 80 84 86 86 88 88 88 90 90 90 91 92 93 94 95 97 97 98 98 98 99 99 100 101 101 101 102 vi SCC3 colour console Your console at a glance Item Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Alphanumeric keypad with backlight. Use the keypad to enter alphanumeric characters for text editing and dialling. Keys 09, # and * are programmable soft keys. Red (Cancel/Home) key. Press and hold (2 seconds) to power on your radio. From the Home screen, press and hold (4 seconds) to power off. Press and hold (2 seconds) to return to the Home screen from any other screen. Tri-colour LED (indicator). Indicates various operational states of the radio. Right context key. Press to activate the feature or option that appears directly above the key. Centre context key. Press to activate the feature or option that appears directly above the key. Left context key. Press to activate the feature or option that appears directly above the key. Emergency Button. Press and hold (2 seconds) to initiate an Alarm Call. VAC connector. Navi-knob. A continuously rotating knob used to adjust the volume of an independent loudspeaker or through an earpiece. Colour display with backlight. Navigation keys. Use to scroll through lists and move the cursor when writing text. Blue LED. (indicator). Indicates a missed event such as a call, Callout or message. Green (Select/Send) key. Press to initiate a half-duplex individual call or a full-duplex call. Press to select a menu item or action a function, or send a status or text (SDS) message. User Guide 1 Connection with the SRG3900/SCG22 mobile radio Your console works using the SRG3900/SCG22 mobile radio, with the optional provision of the Applications Interface Unit (AIU). Console and Application Interface Unit The SRG3900 mobile radio supports the connection of up to two consoles, either a Standard Console, Colour Console or a Handset-based Console (via an Interface and Handsfree box), or an Applications Interface Unit, which is similar to a console but does not have a keypad and display. With the optional expansion board fitted, the SCG22 can also support two consoles. Through the use of a console, the SRG3900/SCG22 mobile radio can support the connection of up to 6 of the following audio accessories:

up to two hands-free kits up to four standard handsets up to four standard fist microphones If two consoles are fitted, they display the same information. This makes it possible to move from one console to another without having to take any special action. If two users are using the same mobile radio, operational procedures are required to ensure that the actions of the two users do not conflict. On some configurations it is possible to have a hands-free kit attached to each console. If this is the case, only one of the remote microphones is live during a call. The remote microphone which is live is the one attached to the console which accepted or made the call or switched the call to hands-free. Mobile radio audio control The mobile radio supports the concept of a single controlling audio accessory for a call. The controlling audio accessory is the one in control of the call, and the only one on which the microphone becomes active. When a fist microphone or hands-free kit is used, the received audio is directed to the loudspeaker connected to the mobile unit. When a handset is used, the received audio is directed to the handset earpiece. The controlling audio accessory is normally the Remote Microphone used in conjunction with the loudspeaker, i.e. the hands-free kit or Public mode. To make a different accessory become the controlling accessory, press the PTT button on that accessory or take it off hook. If the new controlling accessory has an earpiece then normally this is used for received audio instead of the Loudspeaker (Private mode). When in Private mode you can switch to Public mode by pressing the hands free soft key (if configured). Taking a handset off hook, or using its PTT will return to Private mode. 2 SCC3 colour console While the controlling accessory is not the Remote Microphone, you may switch to another accessory by pressing the PTT button on that accessory. Taking that accessory off-hook does not change the controlling accessory. This allows a second user to listen to received audio on another accessory. If the controlling accessory is placed on-hook this clears the call unless customised differently. Other accessories can be put back on-hook without clearing the call in progress. All earpiece audio is left on all the time in order that multiple users may listen to the received audio. The audio presentation for duplex (telephone) calls depends on the capability of the controlling accessory. With a duplex controlling accessory, duplex calls have a duplex presentation. With a half-

duplex accessory, half-duplex (Group) calls are controlled using the PTT button. User Guide 3 Controls & indicators Your radio has a number of controls and indicators. Navi-knob The Navi-knob is a continuous rotating knob that in its normal mode is used to adjust the volume. The Navi-knob can also be used to perform various other functions. To do this Do this Rotate Navi-knob Adjust loud speaker volume (or enable/disable Whisper Mode

[customisable]) Move cursor and select characters (in text entry mode) Rotate Navi-knob in Text Entry Mode or Editing Mode Scroll through available talkgroups Scroll through available Status Messages Scroll through available User Profiles From the Home screen, press Groups + rotate the Navi-knob From the Home screen, press Groups 2 times + rotate the Navi-

knob From the Home screen, press Groups 3 times + rotate the Navi-

knob Navigation Keys Your mobile radio console has four navigation keys (left/right/up/down). Key Action Up/Down Use to move the scroll bar up and down to see more information. Scroll a list of options. To independently adjust the volume of accessories. See Independent volume control feature on page21 Down Open the top level menu from the Home screen. Up Repeated presses moves upwards through the options and menu levels until the top level menu is reached. Left/Right Moves between options on the top level menu. Moves through the text characters for selection when writing. 4 SCC3 colour console Soft keys Some keys on your radio may be customised to provide one-touch access to regularly used features. These programmable keys are referred to as soft keys. To activate the soft key function:

assigned to a programmable soft key, press and release assigned to other keys (such as the keypad, Cancel/Home and Select/Send keys), press and hold for one second The following keys can be customised as soft keys:

the Select/Send key the Cancel/Home key the left and right navigation keys all radio keypad keys (19, *, 0, #,) the Emergency Button (if not assigned to Emergency operation) NOTE: During full-duplex PSTN/PBX calls, take care when trying to activate soft keys (designated as 09,* and # keys) because they also generate DTMF tones. There are many functions that can be assigned to a Soft key. Some functions are activated immediately, such as the keypad lock/unlock or loudspeaker on/off. There are some special functions that use a navigate to screen function. This means that on activation, a screen displays and you need to take some additional action, such as activating a SmartMenu where you have to select an option. Context keys Your mobile radio console has a left, centre and right context key which you use to select options displayed adjacent to them. On the Home screen the function assigned to each context key is defined during customisation. You can change the soft key function assigned to a context key on the Home screen (customisable), see Set context key shortcut on the next page. Context labels appear at the bottom of the screen, directly above each context key. These labels show the action of the key when it is pressed; either activating a feature or performing a function such as clearing a call (Clear) or selecting an option (Select). The labels and actions of the context keys in the Home screen are:

Context key Label Action Left Menu Press to enter the main menu. User Guide 5 Context key Label Centre Groups Action Press to change the talkgroup. See Selecting a talkgroup on page31 Status Profiles Press 2 times to send a status message. See Messages on page60. Press 3 times to select a user profile. See User profiles on page88 Right Shortcut Press to open the Shortcut Bar to quickly access regularly used features or clear a notification. See Notifications on page13 and Shortcut Bar on page13 Set context key shortcut The shortcuts available for selection as shortcuts are set during the customisation of your radio. NOTE: You can only use the left and right context keys and soft keys on the top level screen (Home Screen). To set a context key Home Screen shortcut 1. Open the Home screen. 2. Press and hold the context key until the Context Key Selection box appears. 3. Navigate to the shortcut in the list and press Select. The key is reconfigured and the new shortcut label appears in the Home screen. Status icons Icons appear on the status line (at the top of the display) when the radio is engaged in certain activities or when certain functions are active. Icon Description Security and Emergency Emergency Appears when emergency operation mode is active on your radio and an Alarm call is in progress. Air Interface Encryption disabled Calls and Callouts will not be encrypted. 6 SCC3 colour console Icon Description E2E Encryption enabled The Secure Communications icon indicates that the selected talkgroup is customised for End-to-End Encryption. In other words, calls you make by pressing the PTT button are End-to-End Encrypted. E2E Encryption disabled Indicates that the call is not encrypted. Key agreement Indicates that a cryptographic key agreement is in progress between the radio and the Key Management Centre (KMC) on the network. (See End-to-End Encryption on page99.). Trunked Mode Operation (TMO) Outgoing TMOcall in progress You are in a call that you initiated. Incoming TMO call in progress You are in a call that was initiated by another person or your dispatcher on the TMO network. Missed incoming TMO call You have missed an incoming TMO call. The blue LEDflashes. A notification alerting you to the missed call appears in the Shortcut Bar. Scanning enabled You radio is scanning (listening) to all available talkgroups within your scan list for activity. Broadcast Call A high-priority group call (point-to-multi-point) initiated by your Dispatcher to all network radio users. You cannot reply to the caller. Incoming DMO call You are in a DMO call that was initiated by another radio user. Outgoing DMO call in progress You are in a call to another radio user. Missed incoming DMO Call The blue LEDflashes to notify you that you have missed an incoming DMO call. A notification alerting you to the missed call appears in the Shortcut Bar. DMOGateway detected Appears when the radio has detected a DMO gateway. The icon disappears when the radio moves out of range of the gateway. Direct Mode Operation (DMO) User Guide 7 General icons Icon Description DMO Gateway off DMO Repeater detected Appears when a DMO repeater is detected and the radio can communicate with any other radios in the selected DMO talkgroup which are also in range of the repeater. Repeater ignored Repeater mode off DMO transmission power. The radio has been set to a higher transmission power than the normal transmission power level. DMO transmission power. The radio has been set to a lower transmission power than the normal transmission power level. Migrated Your radio is registered on a Visited Network. Signal Strength Shows the current signal strength. More bars indicate a stronger signal. Good radio coverage Indicates good radio coverage. No service Indicates poor signal or no radio coverage. Keypad locked Transmit Inhibit Indicates that you have activated transmit inhibit and the radio is unable to transmit (overridden when Emergency mode is activated). Privacy mode active during a call Appears for the duration of a call when Privacy mode has been activated to prevent any other calls interrupting an important individual call. Pre-emptive Call If pre-emptive priority calls have been customised on the radio. The icon is displayed if you or another user has initiated a pre-

emptive call on the network. Covert operation mode enabled The radio turns off any visual and sound alerts, and displays this icon when covert operation mode is enabled. 8 SCC3 colour console Icon Description Group Focus Appears when Group Focus is enabled, preventing any calls from other talkgroups (other than the selected talkgroup) connecting to the radio. User Profile Appears when a user profile is activated. Your radio may be programmed for a number of user profiles. The number next to the icon indicates the chosen user profile. Communication Type Mismatch This icon appears when there is a mismatch in communications and is activated when:

the radio is out of range of a gateway when another radio within range of the gateway is in a group call, and you cannot participate in the call. and that you cannot take part in the call. a radio out of range of the gateway is attempting to respond to a group call, and the speech if not being routed using the gateway to TMO users. a radio within range of a DMORepeater cannot make a call and attempts to set up a call in DMO instead, the icon appears on all radios within the talkgroup to indicate that there are members of the talkgroup who cannot take part in the call. GPS tracking enabled Indicates that the GNSS (Global Navigation Satellite System) function has been enabled. GPS tracking not available LED indicators Blue LED The blue LED indicates either a missed event, such as a missed call or unread message, or your Bluetooth status (if enabled). Notifications alerting you to the missed calls, Callouts or unread messages appear in the Shortcut Bar. See Notifications on page13. LED Indication Description Flashing on for 1 second, off for one second, on for another second, then off for seven seconds Missed event One flash every 10s Bluetooth function is enabled Continuous rapid flashing Radio is in Bluetooth discoverable

(visible) mode User Guide 9 Tri-colour LED The tri-colour LED indicates the operational state of the radio. LED Colour Description Solid green Solid red Radio is powering on or in a call and receiving Radio is in a call and transmitting Intermittent flashing red Attempting to connect to the network or incoming telephone SDS/Status message Flashing orange Incoming telephone call or SDS/Status message Intermittent four flashes orange Transmit Inhibit mode or Fallback mode are active Emergency button The red button on your radio is typically programmed to activate an Alarm Call. See Emergency operation on page17. Press and hold (2 seconds) the Emergency button to initiate an Alarm Call. If the radio is powered off, press and hold (3 seconds) to power on and initiate an Alarm Call. It may take several seconds for the radio to complete its power on process before initiating the Alarm call. 10 SCC3 colour console Getting Started Power on To power on, press and hold (2 seconds) the Cancel/Home key. Your radio attaches to the last selected talkgroup when it is powered off (if it is 'in service'). This is customisable. Depending on your radio's customisation any of the following may display:

a company logo a splash screen a welcome screen a PIN entry screen Power off NOTE: A message may appear if your software licence has or is about to expire. If your radio supports Radio User Assignment (RUA), which authenticates your radio on the network, you may be prompted to log on to your network. See Authentication on page68. To power off, from the Home screen press and hold (4 seconds) the Cancel/Home key. Scroll to the Shutdown option, then press the Select key to power off your radio. Before powering down, alerts and messages may be sent. If your radio is configured to provide an option to delete Callouts, navigate to Shutdown or Delete Callouts then press the Select key. Locking and unlocking the keypad To prevent accidental activity during operation, you can lock the keypad. This will also prevent access to the radio's functions if the radio is stolen. When the keypad is locked, the appears in the status line. Key icon The keypad can be locked manually or set to lock automatically after a period of inactivity. NOTE: If customised, your radio's keypad can be locked when an accessory is attached. User Guide 11 Receiving calls with locked keypad If you receive a telephone call when the keypad is locked your radio can be customised so that the Select/Send key can still be pressed to answer it. If the call is accepted the whole keypad is unlocked. Your radio can also be customised so that you can press the Cancel/Home key to reject the call and in this case the keypad remains locked. Navi-knob with locked keypad Your radio may be customised so that the Navi-knob is locked when the keypad is locked. In this case you cannot alter the volume by rotating the Navi-knob. Your radio can also be customised so that the Navi-knob remains unlocked and in this case it can be used for volume control only while the keypad is locked. To lock/unlock the keypad:

Press the * (star) key (or a designated soft key), then press the OK context key to lock/unlock the keypad. To quickly lock and unlock the keypad, press and hold (2 seconds) the * (star) key. If you press any other key while the keypad is locked no action is taken. The Navi-knob remains unlocked when the keypad lock is enabled. A message is displayed to remind you that the keypad is locked. Alternatively, you can:

1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > Keypad Lock. 2. Press Lock to lock the keypad. Setting the radio to automatically lock the keypad You can set the radio to automatically lock the keypad after a period of inactivity. 1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > Timed Keypad Lock. 2. Press Toggle to enable/disable auto keypad lock. Home screen The top level screen, known as the home screen, appears when the radio powers on and when it is idle. To quickly get back to the home Screen, press and hold (2 seconds) the Cancel/Home key. The status line, at the top of the screen, displays various icons to indicate the state of operation or when certain functions such as keypad lock have been activated. It can also be configured to display the Network Name when the radio is idle. 12 SCC3 colour console The context key labels at the bottom of the screen indicate what the context key directly below the label is configured to do. These labels change according to where you are in the menu hierarchy.

1 2

1 2 3 Description Status line showing the radio coverage signal strength and operational status icons. Information area containing information that only appears on the Home screen. This is customised by your service provider or organisation. It may show date and time, your selected talkgroup, folder and network name (Mobile Network Code Alias). 3 Context key options (available in the Home screen). Shortcut Bar You can easily access commonly used radio features such as your Inbox, and turn features on and off using the Shortcut Bar. The Shortcut Bar can contain up to 5 radio features and some of these can be paired with notifications to alert you to a missed call or a new message in your Inbox. To open the Shortcut Bar, in the Home screen press the Shortcut context key or the Up navigation key. Description Use the navigation keys to scroll through the notifications and features. Notifications always appear to the left of features. Press the Right navigation key to continue scrolling right to view more shortcuts (if available). To open a notification or feature, highlight it and press the Select context key. Press the Back context key to close the Shortcut Bar without opening a feature. The Shortcut Bar cannot be closed if there are notifications. Notifications Like a Smartphone, your radio can display notifications to indicate a missed call or new message. They also appear when certain functions are enabled such as mute and transmit inhibit. Your radio can display up to 5 notifications, and up to 5 shortcuts for commonly used radio features. User Guide 13 Some features can be paired with notifications, such as your Inbox so when a message is received a notification appears in the Shortcut Bar to alert you to the unread message. When paired with a feature, the feature icon appears with a notification badge . Notifications paired with features appear to the left of all other feature icons. The following notifications can be paired with a feature:

Icon Notification Paired Feature Unread message Missed call Missed Callout Inbox Call History Callout To close a notification:

From the Home screen, press the Shortcut context key or the Up navigation key to open the Shortcut Bar, highlight the notification then press the Select context key. Use the feature in the usual way, for example, read an unread message or respond to a missed call. The notification automatically closes and disappears from the Shortcut Bar. Menu Your radio is customised by your service provider or organisation with a number of features that are accessed from the main menu. To open the main menu, in the Home screen press Menu. To open a sub-menu or menu option, scroll to the option (highlight it) and press Select. To return to a higher level menu, press Back. To return to the Home screen at any time within the menu hierarchy, press and hold (2 seconds) the Cancel/Home key. Menu options The following icons are used to identify the sub-menus that provide access to further options. Icon Menu option Phone Add, edit and delete your personal contacts within your personal folder. Search (or filter) your contacts to locate the contact you want and initiate a call. Review your call history. Messages Read, create, save and send text (SDS) messages. View picture messages

(if customised). Select and send a status message. Clear your mailbox of unwanted messages. 14 SCC3 colour console Icon Menu option Groups Search your talkgroup folders and select a talkgroup. Enable scanning of your selected talkgroups. Set up your speech call settings. GPS Manage your GPS location and position settings. View your current location, direction and speed. Applications Your radio may be customised with a number of applications. Your service provider or organisation may have installed specific applications (Short Data Applications) to help you in your role. Access WAP sites. Networks Manage your network connections and DMO options. Change your operating mode (TMO/DMO/Repeater). Enable/disable Transmit Inhibit mode when working in RF sensitive areas. Options Personalise your radio settings such as backlight, text size and language. Reset your radio to the last customisation, with options to keep personal data settings such as contacts in the phonebook. User Profiles Select customised profiles designed specifically for the way you work. Help View help, such as a list of customised soft keys on your radio. SmartMenus SmartMenus are designed to provide quick access to regularly used radio features, usually with a common theme. Your service provider or organisation may customise your radio with a number of SmartMenus, for example you may have a SmartMenu containing all your Quick Status messages, another for user profiles and another for selecting operational modes such as toggling on/off covert mode, Transmit Inhibit, loudspeaker mute and so on. SmartMenus are assigned to a soft key, either a Side key or one of the keys on the keypad. To open a SmartMenu, press the Side key or press and hold (1 second) the assigned key on the keypad. User Guide 15 Use the navigation keys to scroll the list of options on the SmartMenu. Options are labelled with a number, shown to the right of the option. To select the option, press the key that corresponds to the number of the option, for example to select option 3, press the 3 key. Note that using this method only options numbered 1 to 12 can be selected using the keys on the keypad (press 0 for option 10, the Star (*) key for option 11 and the Hash (#) key for option 12). For options numbered 13 onwards, scroll to the option (highlight it), and press Select. Help To access help Use one of the following:

The Help menu displays a free text area which is usually customised to indicate radio soft key assignments. It may also be used to record any required help text. Press the Up navigation key (or Shortcut) to open the Shortcut Bar, then select Help. Press a dedicated soft key (default is normally key 0 zero). Press Menu > Help. 16 SCC3 colour console Emergency operation Emergency operation is available in TMO if the radio is in service. If your radio is operating in DMO when you make the emergency call, the radio switches to TMO before making the emergency call. If the radio cannot make the call in TMO, the radio automatically switches back to DMO to make the call. If your radio is customised for Gateway and Repeater mode, it will make an Alarm call in TMO. The red button on the top of your console can be programmed to initiate an Alarm call at any time when your radio is in operation. This button is known as the Emergency button. Your radio may be customised to perform one or more of the following:

Initiate an Alarm call set up to one or more pre-defined users (typically to your dispatcher and other members of your talkgroup) and/or;

Send an Emergency Status message to an individual, the dispatcher or a talkgroup and/or;

Send a position report (GPS dependent). If you are working in RF sensitive areas and have enabled Transmit Inhibit, prohibiting radio transmission, initiating an Alarm call will override the Transmit Inhibit feature and the Alarm call will be transmitted. Your service provider or organisation can provide information on how your radio is customised for Alarm calls and how to operate your radio in emergency situations. If you are working in a sensitive environment your radio may be customised for Silent Alarm calls where audible and display alerts are disabled, or your radio may be customised for Live Microphone that allows you to call for assistance hands-free without pressing the PTT button. Silent Alarm Call If you are working in sensitive environments where the audible and display alerts associated with an Alarm call are inappropriate, your radio can be customised to make a Silent Alarm call (without acoustic or screen alerts). When a Silent Alarm call is made, the radio displays the Home screen with the talkgroup associated with call. During the call you may navigate away from the Home screen. Live Microphone feature Your radio may be customised with the Live Microphone feature. This feature allows you to broadcast a call for assistance hands-free for a specified period of time and without having to press the PTT button. The radio automatically cycles between transmit and receive communication during a programmed period of time (seconds). Live Microphone is cancelled when the time expires or by pressing the PTT button. Making an Alarm call You can still make an Alarm call if the keypad is locked. User Guide 17 To make an Alarm call During an Alarm call:

1. Press and hold (2 seconds) the Emergency button; a confirmation beep sounds. 2. Release the button and speak into the microphone. the microphone is live for a programmed period (seconds) allowing you to speak hands-free without pressing the PTT button (customisable) the LED illuminates solid red your radio sounds audible tones a large emergency symbol appears on the screen your identity and talkgroup appears on the display of those receiving the Alarm call Receiving an Alarm call An Alarm call overrides any existing calls on the talkgroup. You know you are receiving an Alarm call when:

your radio sounds an audible tone the LED flashes red the emergency symbol appears on the screen your radio status changes to Emergency Clearing an Alarm call You can only clear an Alarm call that you have initiated. To cancel the Alarm call, press the Clear context key. To cancel the Alarm call, press the Call Clear key, the Clear context key or the Cancel/Home key. Alternatively, your radio may be customised to use the Emergency button to cancel the Alarm call. Depending on which network is being used, if the TETRA Alarm call is a group call, thenalthough both of the TETRA Alarm call exit functions will clear the TETRA Alarm call on the call originators radioit will not remove the alarm from the system. Radios alerted to the emergency may, depending upon the infrastructure configuration, remain in the TETRA Alarm call condition until the dispatcher clears the call from the system. When the Alarm call is cancelled, your radio returns to the talkgroup that was selected before the call was initiated. 18 SCC3 colour console Power on Alarm call If your radio supports Radio User Assignment (RUA), which authenticates your radio on the network, you may be prompted to log on to your network before the Alarm call is initiated. Contact your service provider for information. See Authentication on page68. Standard Operation If your radio is powered off, press and hold (3 seconds) the Emergency button to power on and initiate an Alarm call. Any customised Welcome screen is not displayed during power on. It may take several seconds for the radio to complete its power on process before initiating the Alarm call. Customised Operation (PIN entry bypass) If your radio is powered off, press and hold (3 seconds) the Emergency button to power on and initiate an Alarm call. Any customised Welcome screen is not displayed during power on. It may take several seconds for the radio to complete its power on process before initiating the Alarm call. If the radio is powered on and is at the PIN entry screen, pressing the Emergency button for 3 seconds will also initiate the Alarm call, without the need to enter your PIN. User Guide 19 Sound Adjusting the volume Muting audio You can adjust the volume of the speaker and increase the sensitivity of the microphone (see Whisper mode on page22) so that you can speak more quietly. Your radio also uses sound to alert you to the various operational states. Rotate the Navi-knob to adjust the volume. A vertical volume meter displays to indicate the current volume level. The radio sounds an audible tone at the new volume level. Soft keys may be customised to mute the audio output of loudspeakers and earpieces connected to the radio or consoles. In an installation with two consoles connected, audio devices can be muted on the local and remote console. Individual soft keys may be customised specifically to:

Mute the primary loudspeaker(s) connected to the radio Mute the secondary loudspeaker(s) connected to console(s) Mute all connected loudspeakers and earpieces, including Bluetooth devices Pressing the same soft key again will cancel the mute and restore audio to the previous volume levels. An icon is displayed on the status line to indicate the current audio mute mode:

Icon Notification Primary Loudspeaker 1 (connected to the radio) muted Primary Loudspeaker 2 (connected to the radio) muted Primary Loudspeakers 1 and 2 muted Secondary Loudspeaker 1 (connected to the local console) muted Secondary Loudspeaker 2 (connected to the remote console) muted Secondary Loudspeaker 1 and 2 muted 20 SCC3 colour console Loudspeaker high/low audio mode A soft key may be customised to toggle the audio output between the radios speaker (high audio mode) and earpiece (low audio mode) as required. An icon is displayed on the status line to indicate the current mode:

Icon Notification High audio mode Low audio mode When the radio is in the loudspeaker high/low audio mode:

In normal operation, audio is routed to the primary loudspeaker in high audio mode and to the earpiece in low audio mode. If an earpiece accessory is connected, audio is routed to the accessory in both modes. During incoming or outgoing emergency calls, audio is always routed to the radio's speaker. A full duplex call is always routed to the radio's earpiece. Independent volume control feature When you switch to Whisper mode on the next page the sensitivity for all attached microphones is adjusted regardless of which speaker(s) volume is selected for adjustment. To adjust the volume:

1. The volume level displays the volume for the default accessory. The default accessory, when the radio is in a call, is the controlling accessory and when not in a call is usually the loudspeaker attached to the SRG3900/SCG22 mobile radio. 2. Use the Up and Down navigation keys to scroll through all attached accessories. An icon displays in the volume bar, next to the volume level to indicate which accessory is selected, for example a handset icon displays when a headset (or similar) is being adjusted, and likewise a loudspeaker icon indicates that you are adjusting the loudspeaker. Icon Device Handset-base Console (HBC) #1 attached to Vehicle Accessory Connector (VAC) Handset-base Console (HBC) #2 attached to VAC Handset Loudspeaker attached to VAC Speaker Microphone Loudspeaker attached to VAC Loudspeaker attached to radio All accessories mode (volume of all speakers adjusted together) User Guide 21 For attached consoles the icon shows the number of the console for which the volume level is being adjusted. If more than one console is connected, you can only adjust the volume level for one console at a time. The icon number indicates which console is being adjusted. In all accessories mode the volume level of all connected accessories is controlled simultaneously. The blue bar shows the volume range of the attached accessories, and is moved up and down within the volume bar as the volume level is adjusted. Whisper mode Whisper mode allows you to talk more quietly than normal but still be heard and understood by the person you are calling. It can be useful to switch to Whisper mode when providing confidential information. If you select a User Profile which already increases the sensitivity of the microphone, depending on your radio's customisation Whisper mode may not increase the sensitivity further. To enable Whisper mode Depending on customisation, to enable Whisper mode, you can:

press a programmed soft key rotate the Navi-knob to decrease the volume to below its lowest level The radio sounds a low-high level alert when Whisper mode is enabled. To disable Whisper mode:

Depending on customisation, to disable Whisper mode, you can:

22 SCC3 colour console press a programmed soft key increase the volume until the volume level meter displays at least the minimum level increase the volume to its loudest level then attempt to increase the volume further The radio sounds a low-high level alert when Whisper mode is disabled. Public/Private mode When Public mode is enabled, audio output is via primary loudspeaker connected to the radio or an accessory secondary loudspeaker. When Private mode is enabled, audio output uses the connected accessory earpieces and mutes any loudspeakers. This provides the facility of completely discreet audio reception during calls. To enable Private mode Depending on customisation, to enable Private mode, you can:

press a programmed soft key take an accessory off-hook during a call The radio sounds a low-high level alert when Private mode is enabled. To disable Private mode:

Depending on customisation, to disable Private mode, you can:

press a programmed soft key place the accessory back on-hook release the PTT button on the accessory Audible tone alerts Certain events on your radio initiate audible tone alerts. These alerts are attenuated when you select a user profile which uses covert mode (see User profiles on page88). 1. To toggle audible alerts 2. Select Menu > Options > Alerts > Audio Alerts. 3. Press Toggle (or the Select/Send key) to toggle alerts on/off. If your radio is powered off with Audio Alerts disabled, they remain disabled when the radio is next powered on. User Guide 23 Personalising your radio You can personalise your display settings (such as text size, backlight, inverting the screen and change languages) and create a personal phone book containing your own contacts. When a call or message is received, and when you press any key, the backlight lights up the display and keypad. The length of time the backlight illuminates is set during customisation. You can toggle the backlight on/off by using a soft key or from a SmartMenus on page15 (if customised). 1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > Display Settings > Backlight. 1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > Display Settings > Day/Night Mode. 3. Rotate the Navi-knob to adjust the intensity of the backlight and the keypad illumination on a Adjusting the backlight To adjust the backlight:

Alternatively:

2. Press the Toggle context key. To adjust brightness:

2. Select Backlight Level. scale of 17 (max.). Day/Night mode When a call or message is received, and when you press any key, the backlight lights up the display and keypad. A bright display can be a potential distraction, particularly when driving at night or in poor lighting conditions. Day/Night mode lets you adjust the intensity of the backlight and keypad illumination to suit your working conditions. Night mode reduces the glare from the display, making it ideally suited for night time use. When the preferences for day and night mode have been set, switching between the modes automatically adjusts the backlight and display settings. A soft key may be customised to switch between Day/Night mode. 24 SCC3 colour console To change Day/Night mode settings 1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > Display Settings > Day/Night Mode. 2. Scroll to each option (highlight it) to make your adjustments:

Day Modeto toggle between Day Mode and Night Mode press the Toggle context key. Backlight Enabledto toggle the backlight on/off press the Toggle context key. When a tick appears in the box, the backlight is on, and when the box is empty, the backlight is off. Backlight Levelto adjust the intensity of the backlight and the key pad illumination on a scale of 1 to 7 . Adjusting text and icon size Your radio uses the default size for the text and icons set during customisation, however it also supports a number of different size modes that control how text and icons are displayed, which can make them easier to see from a distance. NOTE: When selecting larger modes, some prompts or icons may not appear on the radio display. Your radio supports the following modes:

Normal Mode allows the maximum amount of information available to be displayed in a compact character size. Large Mode displays screen information in a large character size. Very Large Mode displays the talkgroup number or talkgroup name, as customised, in an extra large size on the Home screen with all other screens in Large mode. Custom displays the Home screen, menu and WAP browser in predefined text sizes set during customisation. Only the Home screen supports Very Large mode, with other screens set to either Normal or Large mode. NOTE: Depending on the customisation of the Home screen, if the date is shown on the Home screen it may be truncated in Very Large Mode. If the date format YYYY.MM.DD is used, then the day does not display. To change text mode:

1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > Display Settings > Text Size. 2. Use the Up and Down Navigation keys to highlight the mode and then press the Select context key. The radio displays the Home screen, with the text and icons appearing in the chosen mode. User Guide 25 Default text mode Your radio may be customised with a pre-configured default text mode set. When the radio is powered on or restarted, the display reverts to the default text mode size. NOTE: If the radio has been configured to change to large mode when fitted to a car kit, the display will not revert to the default text mode. Setting the display language Your radio operates in the language chosen during customisation and can support two display languages. The display uses the default language if the radio is only customised for a single language, or the currently selected language if two languages are programmed. Your radio may be customised with a soft key or provide an option on a SmartMenu to change the display language. See SmartMenus on page15. To change the language:

1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > Language. 2. Scroll to the language option, and then press the Select context key. The Home screen appears and the display shows the selected language. Menu style You can display the menu in Grid, List or Compatibility style. 1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > Display Settings > Menu Style. 2. Select one option:

Gridset Grid menu style Listset List menu style Cardset Card (Compatibility) menu style Grid style 26 SCC3 colour console highlight items using the four navigation keys to open an item press Select to return to the top level screen press Cancel or Cancel/Home key. List style highlight items using the Down and Up navigation keys. to open an item press Select to return to the top level screen press Cancel or the Cancel/Home key. Compatibility style (card) highlight items using the Left and Right navigation keys to open an item press Select to return to the top level screen press Cancel or Cancel/Home key. Time and Date Your radio can be customised to display the current time and date on the Home screen. The time is shown in 24 hour format. To view and edit the time and date 1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > Time and Date. 2. Press Edit or press the Select/Send key. 3. Enter the digits required (see Text entry on page58). 4. Press OK or the Select/Send key to save your changes; press Cancel or the Cancel/Home key to abandon your changes. User Guide 27 Talkgroups and folders Talkgroups are pre-programmed onto your radio. Each talkgroup typically contains users who have a similar role or who are within a distinct location or who provide a service that you would use. They are organised into folders to help you quickly select one that is applicable to your environment or situation. A folder can contain both DMO and TMO talkgroups, but only those talkgroups applicable to the current operating mode, either DMO or TMO, appear when a folder is opened. In TMO, only those talkgroups available on the current network are displayed. The folders available depend on the customisation of your radio; various special folders are also programmed into your radio (see Special folders on the facing page). NOTE: If you want to change from a DMO talkgroup to a TMO one, you need to change the operating mode first (see Operating Modes on page71). A top level folder can have a number of sub-folders, similar to a folder structure on a computer, and a folder can contain both folders and talkgroups. If a folder contains sub-folders and talkgroups, two tabs appearone for sub-folders and the other for navigation keys to switch between the tabs. talkgroups. You can use the Left or Right Your radio may be customised for Talkgroup Selection Mode or Folder Selection Mode. How you select a talkgroup depends on which mode your radio is customised to use. When you select a talkgroup, the radio attaches to that talkgroup. Your radio can only participate in calls with talkgroups it is attached to via the network. When ongoing calls are detected on any talkgroup your radio is scanning you can join in by pressing the PTT. Your radio may be customised so that folders can have a subscriber class attribute. The radio will then use cells with a matching subscriber class if a talkgroup is selected from the folder. When the radio is attached to a talkgroup, the talkgroup and folder appear on the Home screen (see Home screen on page12). If a talkgroup and folder are not shown:

the radio may not have attached to the last used talkgroup at power on, or it was attached to a DGNA talkgroup which has been deassigned, or it may be attached to hidden background talkgroups, or a folder has not been selected (Folder Selection Mode only), or a change of network may have occurred and the last used talkgroup may not be usable on the current network. When your radio is powered on, if possible it re-selects either the default talkgroup or connects to your last selected talkgroup. 28 SCC3 colour console Special folders In addition to the standard folders created to contain your talkgroups, your radio can be customised with Special folders. Special folders can only contain talkgroups (they cannot contain folders). Some Special folders are continuously scanned, and when ongoing calls are detected you can join in by pressing the PTT. The following special folders may be programmed into your radio during customisation:

Favouritesfrequently used talkgroups that can be added to the folder during customisation or added by the user. Allcontains every talkgroup programmed into your radio including those in special folders. Only available on radios customised for Talkgroup Selection mode. DGNAcontains up to 50 dynamically assigned groups. The contents are automatically maintained by the radio and are not customisable in Talkgroup Selection Mode. You can select a DGNA talkgroup. In Folder Selection Mode, the scan state (scanning enabled or disabled) of a talkgroup can be changed and the folder can be emptied using the Folder Restore option. UDSLuser-defined scan list(s), see User Defined Scan Lists on page34. A list of talkgroups which you can modify yourself. If you select a UDSL instead of a specific talkgroup your radio scans all the talkgroups in that UDSL. Until a UDSL is selected its talkgroups are not scanned for activity. For more information see User Defined Scan Lists on page34. Only available on radios customised for Talkgroup Selection mode. Always attachedtalkgroups which the radio scans continuously for activity. A talkgroup in this folder can be selected as the requested talkgroup in Talkgroup Selection Mode. Backgroundtalkgroups which the radio scans continuously for activity. You cannot select a background talkgroup in this folder as your requested talkgroup. User Guide 29 Talkgroup Selection Mode When the radio is customised for Talkgroup Selection Mode, the selected talkgroup becomes the requested talkgroup to which you make calls. You can insert frequently used talkgroups in the Favourites folder, making it quicker and easier to change your talkgroup. Additionally your radio may be customised for Quick Groups that allow you to change to a frequently used talkgroup using a soft key. You can create your own user defined scan lists that are saved into the UDSL special folder. The UDSL folder greys out (disables) talkgroups that are invalid for the current network. The scan list allows you to set scanning priorities on the talkgroups, so the radio can prioritise calls between the scanned talkgroups. See User Defined Scan Lists on page34. 30 SCC3 colour console Typical folder arrangement The following illustration shows how the folders can be used to organise talkgroups:

Selecting a talkgroup You can use one of the following methods to select a talkgroup:

From the Home screen, press Groups. From the Menu navigate to the Groups menu. Use a soft key to return to your Quick Group. User Guide 31 NOTE: Talkgroups in the Smart Call Folder-1 or Smart Call Folder-2 folders can only be accessed when the appropriate Smart Call mode has been selected from the Speech Call Settings screen or by using a soft key. (See Smart Calls on page54.) Standard talkgroup selection 1. From the Home Screen, press the Groups key. The current selected folder and talkgroup appear in the talkgroup selection box. 2. If you want to change to another talkgroup within the same folder, simply enter the number of the talkgroup, or select the All Folder which contains all the talkgroups and enter the number of the talkgroup. 3. Use the Left and Right navigation keys to move between folders at the same level. Use the Up and Down navigation keys to move between the folder levels (sub-folders). 4. Rotate the Navi-knob to scroll through the talkgroups within the currently selected folder. The directional arrows under the talkgroup name indicate the rotational direction of the Navi-

knob. 5. Press the Select context key to attach to the talkgroup. Customised talkgroup selection When the radio is customised to use the Left and Right navigation keys for talkgroup selection:

1. From the Home Screen, press the Left or Right navigation keys. The current selected folder and previous/next talkgroup folders appear in the talkgroup selection box. If customised you can scroll through the talkgroups continuously. 32 SCC3 colour console 2. Use the Navi-knob to move between the folder levels (sub-folders). 3. Press the Select context key to attach to the talkgroup. Opening a folder 1. Select Menu > Groups > Folders. 2. Highlight a folder and press Open. To navigate back up the folders list, press Back. Searching for folders and talkgroups You can search for talkgroups or folders by filtering on a text string. Items which do not match the string are temporarily filtered out of the list. You can use either:

Search cardto filter the current talkgroup/folder folder. Search allto filter across all talkgroups and folders 1. To search inside a specific folder, open that folder. 2. Press Options then select Search card or Search all. 3. Enter characters you wish to filter against (see Text entry on page58). The list of matching names is dynamically filtered as characters are entered. Only matching talkgroups or folders remain in the list. 4. To cancel the filter operation select the Stop search option. Inserting a talkgroup into a folder If a folder is editable you can use the Insert option to insert a talkgroup into it. Deleting a talkgroup from a folder If a folder is editable you can use the Delete option to remove a talkgroup from it. The talkgroup can still be selected from the All folder if customised, or by entering the talkgroup number directly in the Talkgroup Selection box. Create a favourite talkgroup folder To quickly access frequently used talkgroups, you can add them to the Favourites folder. User Guide 33 1. Select Menu > Groups > Folders > Favourites. 2. Press Options, then select Open. 3. Navigate to the New Group option then press Options. 4. Press Insert. 5. Select the talkgroup you want to add (from any folder). 6. Press Select to insert the talkgroup into the Favourites folder. If the New Group option is not available, you do not have 'edit' permissions on the Favourites folder. The Favourites folder must be set to 'Edit' at customisation. Quick Groups You can quickly change to a different talkgroup by pressing a customised Quick Group soft key specified for that talkgroup. To select the Quick Group talkgroup Press the customised Quick Group soft key. Alternatively, view the Quick Group using the menu then press Select. To view your Quick Groups You can view the talkgroups and folders associated with your assigned Quick Groups. 1. Select Menu > Groups > Quick Groups. 2. Use the Up and Down navigation keys to highlight a Quick Group then press Select. To change the talkgroup associated with a Quick Group Your radio can be customised to allow you to change the talkgroup associated with a Quick Group. These changes may be overwritten when your radio is reprogrammed. Select and view a Quick Group (described in To view your Quick Groups above) then:

Select Options > Change > Current. Your current talkgroup is now associated with the selected Quick Group. User Defined Scan Lists A User Defined Scan List (UDSL) is a list of talkgroups which are either fixed, or user-definable. Any talkgroups in the UDSL that are invalid for the current network are disabled and are shown greyed out in the talkgroup list. Until a UDSL is selected the talkgroups it contains are not scanned and your radio cannot receive calls from them. Your radio can have a maximum of 20 UDSLs, and up to 10 talkgroups can reside within each UDSL. If you select a UDSL (in the same way as you select a talkgroup):

34 SCC3 colour console the talkgroups it contains are scanned, allowing your radio to receive calls from any of the talkgroups in the UDSL the UDSL icon is displayed in the right hand corner of the radio display calls are made to the talkgroup designated as the 'selected talkgroup'. If there is no selected talkgroup in the UDSL, calls are made to the talkgroup with the highest priority. Each talkgroup in a UDSL can have up to three different levels of user-definable group scan priorities which are used by your radio when deciding which call to follow when a call on one talkgroup is active and a call on another talkgroup is received. The scan priority of each talkgroup in a UDSL is shown at the right hand side of the screen as

(Low). You can designate a selected talkgroup in each UDSL. You can add and remove talkgroups from a UDSL.

(Normal) or

(High), View and edit scan list 1. Select Menu > Groups > Scan Lists. 2. Use the Up and Down navigation keys to select one of the UDSLs and press Open. 3. Press Edit. 1. Use the Up and Down navigation keys to select one of the talkgroups in the UDSL. 2. The talkgroup selection box is activated. Select a talkgroup as described in Selecting a Change default (selected) talkgroup 2. Select Edit > Options > Select. 3. Select Edit > Options > Save. Add a talkgroup 1. Press Options > Add. talkgroup on page31 then press Select. 3. Select Edit > Options > Save. Remove a talkgroup Select the talkgroup you wish to remove then:

1. Select Edit > Options > Delete. 2. Select Edit > Options > Save. User Guide 35 Changing group scanning priority 1. Select Edit > Options > Change Priority. 2. Select scan priority

(High),

(Normal) or

(Low) then press Select. 3. Select Edit > Options > Save. Scanning ON/OFF Scanning of talkgroups can be enabled and disabled. If scanning is disabled, the radio will ignore incoming calls on these talkgroups. Your current talkgroup is always scanned. Background talkgroups are always scanned and will continue to be scanned when scanning is disabled. 1. Select Menu > Groups > Scanning ON/OFF. 2. Press Toggle (or the Select/Send key) to enable/disable scanning. Folder Selection Mode If you radio is customised for Folder Selection Mode, you will need to select a folder, which is typically configured with zero or one selected TMO talkgroup and/or one selected DMO talkgroup, which the radio uses to make calls. When a folder is selected and a talkgroup within that folder is selected as the requested talkgroup, they appear on the Home screen. If a folder is not selected when the radio powers on, the message

'No Folder' appears on the Home screen. When a folder is selected that does not have a selected talkgroup, the message 'No Selected Group' appears. Depending on the customisation of your radio, when you press the Groups key from the Home screen, one of the following is activated:

Folder list. The current selected folder opens. You can change the talkgroup within the selected folder or use the Back key to display the Folder list (a list of selectable and non-

selectable programmed into your radio) and choose a new folder. The selected folder within the Folder list and the selected talkgroup within a folder are indicated by the icon. Talkgroup Selection box. The selected talkgroup (appears in bold typeface) and the selected folder are displayed within a selection box. Only those talkgroups that are selectable within the selected folder appear in the selection box and you can scroll through the talkgroups using the Navi-knob. An icon appears to the left of a TMO talkgroup, indicating the scanning priority and whether or not the talkgroup is scan-enabled. You can select another folder by scrolling through the folders at the same level as the current folder or those at a higher level or sub-folders within the hierarchy. NOTE: Only those talkgroups and folders that are selectable appear in the Talkgroup Selection box. Non-selectable folders and talkgroups, such as the Always Attached and the Background folders, do not appear for selection. The exception is the DGNA folder where a talkgroup from the folder can be selected, but the selected folder remains unchanged. 36 SCC3 colour console All the TMO talkgroups within the selected folder that are scan-enabled1 and valid for the current network contribute to the scan list that the radio uses to prioritise calls. If a talkgroup is editable2 you can change its scan state (to enable or disable scanning), change its scanning priority (see Scanning talkgroups on page40) and select or deselect it. A talkgroup can be copied from a folder to another editable folder3, for example you can copy talkgroups from Special folders such as the Always Attached folder into a generic folder and copy frequently used talkgroups to the Favourites folder, making it quicker and easier to change your talkgroup. Your radio may be customised for Quick Folders, which allow you to quickly change to a frequently used folder using a soft key. Opening the current folder Use one of the following methods to open the current folder:

From the Home screen, press Groups and depending on the customisation of your radio, either the current selected folder opens displaying all talkgroups within the folder, or the Talkgroup Selection box opens displaying the selected talkgroup and folder. From the Menu select Groups > Folders to open the current selected folder. Selecting a folder Use one of the following methods to select the current folder:

From the Home screen, press Menu then select Groups > Folders to display the current selected folder containing the selected talkgroup. From the Home screen, press Groups. Depending on the customisation of your radio, either the current selected folder opens displaying all talkgroups within the folder, or the Talkgroup Selection box opens displaying the selected talkgroup and folder. Additionally, you can select a folder by pressing a soft key to select a Quick Folder or select a folder by entering its Folder ID (see Selecting a folder using the folder ID on the next page) if customised. You cannot select the DGNA, Always Attached, Background or Smart Call folder as your selected folder. A talkgroup within the folder must be selected before you can make calls. See Selecting a talkgroup on the next page. To select a folder using the folder list:

1. From the Home screen, press Menu, then select Groups > Folders to open the current folder. 2. Press Back to navigate back 'up' the folders list. 1In Radio Manager folder properties, the talkgroup option In Scan List is selected. 2In Radio Manager folder properties, the talkgroup option Editable is selected. 3In Radio Manager folder properties, the Subject Content option is set to Edit. User Guide 37 3. Scroll to the folder (highlight it) and press Options, then scroll to the Select option and press Select. Only talkgroups which are valid for the current network are listed in the folder. To select a folder and talkgroup using the Talkgroup Selection box:

1. From the Home screen, press Groups. The current selected folder and talkgroup are displayed in the Talkgroup Selection box. Note that the selected talkgroup appears in bold typeface and an icon indicating the scanning priority and whether or not the talkgroup is scan-

enabled (no icon appears for DMO talkgroups). If you want to change to another talkgroup within the same folder, simply enter the number of the talkgroup. 2. Use the Left and Right navigation keys to move between folders at the same level. Use the Up and Down navigation keys to move between the folder levels (sub-folders). 3. Rotate the Navi-knob to scroll through the talkgroups within the currently selected folder. The directional arrows under the talkgroup name indicate the rotational direction of the Navi-

knob. 4. Press Select to select the folder and attach to the talkgroup. Selecting a folder using the folder ID Every folder has a unique identification number (ID) and you can use this IDto quickly select the folder. Press the assigned soft key to open the Folder ID box. Enter the number of the folder (the name of the folder appears) and press Select. The folder is now your selected folder and the selected talkgroup within the folder is your requested talkgroup. If the folder name does not appear when you entered the folder ID, the folder ID is incorrect. Selecting a talkgroup The selected talkgroup within each folder only becomes your requested talkgroup when the folder is selected. Depending on the customisation of your radio, you will use one of the following methods to change the talkgroup. You can only select a talkgroup that is editable. 38 SCC3 colour console To select a talkgroup from the folder:

1. From the Home screen, press Groups to open the current folder. The selected talkgroup within the folder is indicated by the icon. 2. Scroll to the talkgroup you want as your requested talkgroup and press Select. Selection is indicated by the icon. To select a talkgroup using the Talkgroup Selection box:

1. From the Home screen, press Groups. The selected talkgroup and folder appear in the Talkgroup Selection box. The current talkgroup appears in bold typeface. 2. Rotate the Navi-knob to scroll through the talkgroups within the currently selected folder. The directional arrows under the talkgroup name indicate the rotational direction of the Navi-knob. 3. Press Select to attach to the talkgroup. The talkgroup appears in bold typeface. If you have selected a TMO talkgroup, an icon appears to the left of the talkgroup name indicating the scanning priority and whether or not the talkgroup is scan-enabled (no icon appears for DMO talkgroups). Copy a talkgroup to another folder Sometimes you may want to copy a talkgroup to another folder, for example you may want to copy your frequently used talkgroups into the Favourites folder. You can copy talkgroups from any folder but only place them into a folder that is editable. You cannot copy a talkgroup from the Background or DGNA folder, or background/always scanned talkgroups within any folder. If all editable folders contain the maximum number of talkgroups, the Copy option is disabled because all of the destination folders are full. A talkgroup cannot be copied into a folder that already contains that talkgroup. When a talkgroup is copied, it does not retain its properties (scan state, scan priority and selection). For example, if you copied a talkgroup that has scanning enabled, a scanning priority of High and it is the selected talkgroup, when it is copied into the destination folder the scan state is disabled (not scanned), the scanning priority remains the same and it is not the selected talkgroup. User Guide 39 NOTE: You can copy a talkgroup from the Always Attached folder for the purpose of making it your selected talkgroup. Any changes to the talkgroup's properties, such as the scanning priority and scan state, will be overridden by the properties set in the Always Attached folder. To copy a talkgroup:

1. From the Home screen, press Menu then select Groups > Folders to open the current folder. If you want to open another folder press Back to navigate 'up' the folder list, select the folder and then press Open. 2. Select (highlight) the talkgroup you want to copy. 3. Press Options, scroll to the Copy option and press Select. 4. A list of available folders appears. Scroll to the folder you want to insert the talkgroup in to, and press Select. A green tick is displayed if the talkgroup has successfully been copied to the folder. Delete a talkgroup You can only delete a talkgroup from a folder if the folder is editable. 1. Select the talkgroup (highlight it) and press Options. 2. Scroll to the Delete option and press Select. 3. Press OK to delete the talkgroup from the folder. Scanning talkgroups The talkgroups that are scanned and the priority scanning order within a folder are set during customisation. If the talkgroup is editable, you can change the scan priority and the scan state

(enable or disable scanning). There are three scan priorities which are used by the radio when deciding which call to follow when in a call and another call is received. NOTE: You cannot edit the properties (scan state and scan priority) of the talkgroups in the Always Attached, Background or Smart Call folders. The scan priority appears on the left of the talkgroup as a series of bars (more bars indicate higher priority). If the scan state is enabled the icon appears in the right-hand corner of the scan priority icon. Symbol Priority Low priority scanned Low priority not scanned 40 SCC3 colour console Symbol Priority Medium priority scanned Medium priority not scanned High priority scanned High priority not scanned Background talkgroup not scanned Background talkgroup scanned To scan a talkgroup:

1. From the Home screen, press Menu then select Groups > Folders to open the current folder. If you want to open another folder, press Back to navigate 'up' the folder list, select the folder and press Open. 2. Select the talkgroup you want to scan and press Options, then select the Scanned option iconappears in the right-hand corner of the scan priority and press Select. The scanning icon. To stop scanning a talkgroup, select the talkgroup and press Options, scroll to the Not Scanned option and press Select. To change the priority of a talkgroup:

1. From the Home screen, press Menu then select Groups > Folders to open the current folder. If you want to open another folder, press Back to navigate 'up' the folder list, select the folder and press Open. 2. Select the talkgroup and press Options. Scroll to the Set Priority option and press Select. 3. Scroll to the priority setting (High, Medium or low) and press Select. The scan priority icon to the left of the talkgroup changes to the new priority. Restore folders The selected folder or all folders can be restored to their original settings. Only editable generic folders, the Favourites and DGNA folders can be restored. When you restore a folder or all the folders, the following occurs:

any talkgroups added to a folder will be removed, any deleted talkgroups will be restored, talkgroup properties (scan state and scan priority) are restored, and the selected talkgroup for each mode (TMO and DMO) is reset. You cannot restore the Always Attached, Background or Smart Call folders. User Guide 41 To restore a folder:

1. Select the folder and press Options. Defs. and press Select. To restore all folders:

2. Scroll to the Restore Defaults option and press Select and then select the Restore Folder When all the folders are restored, the DGNA folder is emptied of talkgroups, and the radio will reboot on completion of restoring the folders. 1. From the folder list press Options, then scroll to the Restore Defaults option and press 2. Scroll to the Restore All Defaults option and press Select. Press Select to confirm the Select. request to reset all folders. Viewing attached groups You can quickly view all the talkgroups that the radio is currently attached to (scanning). Only those talkgroups in the generic, Background, DGNA, Always Attached and Smart Call folders are displayed. 1. From the Home screen, press Menu then select Groups > Folders to open the current folder. Press Back to navigate back 'up' the folder list. 2. With the folder selected (highlighted) press Options, then select the Attached Groups option and press Select. Use the Up and Down navigation keys to scroll through the list of attached talkgroups. Quick Folders You can quickly change to a different folder by pressing a customised Quick Folder soft key. Your radio may be customised for up to 5 Quick Folders (Folders 1-5) for each operating mode (TMO and DMO). Each Quick Folder is assigned to a soft key on the keypad. You can choose which frequently used folders to assign to your Quick Folders (if customised). You can view the folders that are assigned as Quick Folders, however no talkgroup information is displayed (you will need to open the folder to view the talkgroup information). To assign a folder as a Quick Folder:

1. From the Home screen, press Menu then select Groups > Folders to open the current folder, then press Back to navigate back 'up' the folders list. 2. Select the folder you want to assign to a Quick Folder. Press Options, scroll to the Set Quick Folder option and press Select. 3. Scroll to the Quick Folder (Folders 1 to 5) you want to assign this folder to and press Select. 42 SCC3 colour console To view your Quick Folders:

1. Select Menu > Groups > Quick Folders. Select the Folder (1 to 5 depending on customisation) and press Select to view the folder assigned as this Quick Folder. Scanning ON/OFF Scanning of talkgroups (those that are always scanned or are background talkgroups) in the current selected folder and the Background folder can be enabled and disabled. If scanning is disabled, the radio will ignore incoming calls on these talkgroups. Your current talkgroup is always scanned. 1. Select Menu > Groups > Scanning ON/OFF. 2. Press Toggle (or the Select/Send key) to enable/disable scanning. User Guide 43 Contacts Details of regularly used contacts are stored in a phone book. The phone book has a series of folders labelled Menu, Search, All and Personal. Your radio may have additional folders containing contacts programmed into your radio during customisation. The Personal folder contains contacts you create (personal contacts). This folder only appears when you create your first personal contact. The All folder contains both personal contacts and contacts programmed into your radio. Each contact can have up to six associated numbers. A maximum of 6000 numbers can be held in the phone book. The icon next to each contact indicates the dial mode, a radio telephone, of the first number associated with it. or to a Contacts are arranged in a series of up to 64 folders including the following:

All contains all contacts in the Phone book Menu contains options to create and delete contacts in your Personal folder Search allows you to search the entire Phone book for contacts and numbers. Initially lists the names of all the folders in the phone book and the number of contacts in each folder. Personal contains contacts you create. This is the only folder you can edit. NOTE: The Personal folder is hidden until you create your first personal contact. NOTE: If customised you can also press the >Shortcut context key in the Home screen to open the Shortcut Bar, then select the >Phone book. To open the Phone book, from the Home screen, press the Menu context key, then select Phone >

Contacts. Searching and filtering contacts You can search the entire phone book for contact names and numbers, or filter the contacts within a folder by entering a search string into the Search Bar at the top of any folder (except Menu):

When the search is complete:

the Search folder lists folders containing at least one entry containing the search string, and the number of entries in those folders. You can open any of the listed folders. all other folders are filtered to show their matching entries above a dotted line. All non-

matching entries are listed below the dotted line. Spaces in a search string split it into separate strings. Search attempts to match each string in sequence. 44 SCC3 colour console To search for contacts and numbers within the phone book:

1. Select Menu > Phone > Contacts. Navigate to the Search folder. 2. Press the Up navigation key to open the Search Bar. 3. Enter a search string (see Text entry on page58) and press the Search context key. 4. When the search is complete, any folder containing a possible match to your search (and the number of possible matches within that folder) appear in the Search folder. To open a folder, select it and then press the Open context key. 5. To clear the search string, press the Delete context key to delete each character in the search string, then press the Cancel context key, then the OK context key. To filter contacts within a folder:

1. Open the folder. 2. Press the Up navigation key to open the Search Bar. 3. Enter a search string (see Text entry on page58), then press the Filter context key. 4. Any contact in the folder that is a possible match to your search criteria appears at the top of the contact list. To view the contact's details, select the contact and press the Open context key. 5. To clear the search string, press the Delete context key to delete each character in the search string, then press the Cancel context key, then the OK context key. View contact details 1. Select Menu > Phone > Contacts. 2. Navigate to the contact you want to view details of then press the >>Open key. The contact numbers associated with the selected name are displayed. The icon next to each number indicates its dial mode (for example, to a radio or to a telephone). To return to the original folder, press Cancel or the Cancel/Home key. Creating contacts Contacts you create are added to your Personal folder. To create a contact:

1. Select Menu > Phone > Contacts. 2. Navigate to the Menu card and select Create Contact. 3. Enter the contact name (see Text entry on page58) then press the Save context key. 4. Select a dial mode for this contact, either TETRA Network (default) or telephone/mobile User Guide 45 network. To change the dial mode, press the Up navigation key to select the dial mode line then use the Left or Right navigation keys to switch dial modes. Press the Down navigation key to continue entering the number. If the message Wrong number type appears, change the dial mode or check that the length of the number is between 5 and 8 numbers. 5. Enter the number (see Text entry on page58) then press the Save context key. 6. To add more phone numbers for the contact select Add Next Number and repeat the previous step. To add further contact numbers to a saved contact, open the contact and select Add New Number at the end of its numbers list. 7. To return to the Personal folder press the Cancel context key or press the Cancel/Home key. Editing contacts You can edit (and delete) contacts in the Personal folder of the Phone book. To edit personal contacts:

1. Select Menu > Phone > Contacts and then select the Personal folder. 2. Navigate to the contact you want to edit, then press Open. 1. Select the number and then press Options. Select Edit and press Select. 2. Make changes: to add additional digits press the number keys; to delete digits press the Left To edit the name:

1. Select the name and then press Edit. 2. Make changes as required, then press Save. To edit a number:

navigation key. 3. After making changes press Save. To delete a contact:

1. Select the contact and press Open. 2. Press Options. 3. Select Edit > Delete contact, then press Select. 46 SCC3 colour console Delete all contacts You can delete all contacts in your Personal folder. You can also delete individual contacts or numbers associated with them, see Editing contacts on the previous page. To delete all contacts 1. Select Menu > Phone > Contacts. 2. Navigate to the Menu card then select Delete User Contacts. User Guide 47 Calls Call types Voice call types Group Individual PBX PSTN Broadcast Transmit Only The various types of voice and data calls that are supported by your radio, and the acoustic and visual alerts that accompany a call, depend on your radio's customisation. Sepura radios support the following voice- and data call types:

Voice call type Description A call between you and a group of other radio users in your attached talkgroup. A group call is always a half-duplex call. Users can join and leave the call at any time. Group calls are initiated by pressing the PTT button. See Talkgroups and folders on page28. A call to another user or dispatcher in the TETRA network, or to an external telephone subscriber via the Gateway. Full-duplex and half-duplex calls are supported. Individual calls to outside the TETRA network can be made between a terminal or a dispatcher and a telephone subscriber in a network to which the TETRA network has a gateway interface. These calls are always full-duplex. A full-duplex call is one in which both parties can speak at the same time. The Select/Send and Cancel\Home keys are used to initiate and end calls. In a half-duplex call only one person can speak at a time and needs to press the PTT button. A call to a user on a private branch exchange (PBX). This call needs to be set up by your service provider and allows you to call a person by dialling their extension number (preceded by a programmed digit used to dial the exchange). A call to a user on a the public switched telephone network

(PSTN). A special type of group call, which is received by all terminals in the system (system-wide broadcast call) or by a specific group. The originator of a Broadcast call is usually a dispatcher. The receiving members cannot talk. A customised type of group call, where a call you make on a transmit-only talk group can only be received by an authorised dispatcher. Other users in the group cannot listen to the call. 48 SCC3 colour console Voice call type Description A special individual call configured on a soft key to request help or information from a pre-configured individual or talkgroup destination in a non-emergency situation. Quick calls can also send status and position reports. They can have a call priority that is different from the calls normally set up using the PTT or the Select/Send key. A special individual call made in Smart Call mode which allows you to make group or broadcast calls to specific talkgroups without the need to notify the network about the talkgroup change. Smart Call mode is initiated from a configured soft key. Smart call priority can have a call priority value from 0 (undefined) to 15 (pre-emptive priority 4, emergency) in TMO and to a value from 0 (undefined) to 3 (Emergency pre-emptive priority call) in DMO. The Alarm Call has the highest call priority in TETRA. Usually initiated by pressing the Emergency Button. Alerts all other radio users on the talkgroup of the emergency situation. Data call type Description Individual full-duplex Circuit Mode Data Circuit Mode data calls have a very short transit delay and so are suitable real-time services A Status message may have 65536 possible status values. Of these, value 0 is defined to mean Emergency, values 132767 are reserved, and values 3276865535 are available for network or user-specific definition. A user-defined message that can be sent by individuals and received by individuals and talkgroups. TETRA Packet Data extends TETRA to act as an IP subnet. This enables application programmers to build their applications in a well-standardised environment. Quick Call Smart Call Alarm Call Data call types Status Message SDS Message Packet Data Call History The Call History records up to 20 recent individual calls. It can be customised to display Incoming Calls or Outgoing Calls or both sets of call types in a list. The following icons are used to distinguish different types of call events:

TETRA and PBX/PSTN Icon Description Received TMO call User Guide 49 The call history is deleted if you do not switch off your radio correctly (using the Cancel/Home key). Icon Description Sent TMO call Missed call. Call was not answered or cleared. TETRA Alarm Call Received TETRA DMO Call Sent TETRA DMO Call To display the call history Select Menu > Phone > Call History. To display the call information Select a call in the call history list then press Open. To make a call from call history See Individual calls on the facing page. Group calls Group (point-to-multipoint) calls are calls where you talk to other users within a nominated group of radio users (a talkgroup). In a group call only one person can talk at any one time (known as half-

duplex mode). During group calls the microphone at the top of your radio is active and all received audio is routed to the loudspeaker. Making a group call 1. Press and hold the PTT button and speak into the top microphone. The LEDchanges to solid red to indicate that your radio is transmitting, and an audible tone is heard and your radio status text changes to 'Talk'. 2. When you have finished talking, release the PTT button and listen to audio received, through the loudspeaker. The LED changes to solid green whilst the group call is active and your radio status text changes to Group Call. 50 SCC3 colour console 3. You can also clear the group call by pressing:

Clear Call soft key (if customised) Cancel/Home key Receiving a group call When a group call is received, your radio status changes to Group Call. The name of the talkgroup, talkgroup folder and the callers ID are displayed. Individual calls Individual calls (point-to-point) are private calls between you and one other person. You can make individual calls in two modes:

individual calls (half-duplex mode)where only one person can talk at a time using the PTT button. individual phone calls (full-duplex mode)where both parties can talk simultaneously. Use the Select/Send and Cancel/Home keys to initiate and end the call. When an individual call is received, your radio sounds an audible alert and displays the identity of the caller (if the contact is stored in your phone book) or the ISSI of the caller. Privacy mode You can press a customised Privacy Mode soft key before dialling or during a call to prevent interruptions from other calls during important or sensitive call. When you have Privacy Mode enabled, calls made to your radio are marked as missed calls (see Call History on page49). Making individual calls (half-duplex mode) Calling a contact:

1. Select Menu > Phone > Contacts to open the contacts menu. 2. Navigate to a contacts folder (such as the All folder) and select your contact. Press the Open context key, then choose the phone number. 3. Press the PTT button to initiate the call (or press Options, select Dial then press Select. When the call is connected (the tri-colour LED illuminates green and a confirmation tone sounds). 4. To speak, press the PTT button; release the PTT button to listen. 5. To end the call, press the Clear context key or the Cancel/Home key. If your radio has been customised with a single dial mode for TETRA, PBX and PSTN numbers, the dial mode icon cannot be changed. User Guide 51 Calling by dialling:

1. From the Home Screen, dial the number of the person you are calling. 2. Press the PTT button to initiate the call (or press the Call context key). 3. To speak press the PTT button; release the PTT button to listen to the other radio users. 4. To end the call, press the Clear context or the Cancel/Home key. Calling a contact directly:

When the radio is customised with this feature, a call can be made to a contact without having to select a specific number, by pressing the PTT button. 1. Navigate to a contacts folder (such as the All folder) and select your contact as normal. 2. Press the PTT button to initiate the call:

The radio uses the first valid TETRA ID for the contact to make the call. If no TETRA ID exists for the contact, an error message will be displayed. 3. To speak press the PTT button; release the PTT button to listen to the other radio users. 4. To end the call, press the Clear context or the Cancel/Home key. Receiving individual calls (half-duplex) 1. Press the PTT button to answer the call or the Clear context key to reject the call. Making individual phone calls (full-duplex mode) Calling a contact:

1. Select Menu > Phone > Contacts to open the contacts menu. 2. Navigate to a contacts folder (such as the All folder) and select your contact. Press the Open context key, then choose the phone number. 3. To initiate the phone call press the Dial context key. 4. To end the call, press the Clear context key or the Cancel/Home key. If your radio has been customised with a single dial mode for TETRA, PBX and PSTN numbers, the dial mode icon cannot be changed. Calling by dialling:

1. From Home Screen, dial the number of the person you are calling. 2. Press Send or press the Select/Send key to initiate the call. 3. To end the call, press Clear. If your radio has been customised with a single dial mode for TETRA, PBX and PSTN numbers, the dial mode icon cannot be changed. 52 SCC3 colour console Calling a contact directly:

When the radio is customised with this feature, a call can be made to a contact without having to select a specific number, by pressing the Select/Send key. 1. Navigate to a contacts folder (such as the All folder) and select your contact as normal. 2. Press the Select/Send key to initiate the call:

The radio uses the first valid TETRA ID for the contact to make the call. If the TETRA call is not successful, the radio uses the first valid PSTN ID to make the call. If no TETRA ID exists for the contact, an error message will be displayed. 3. To end the call, press the Clear context or the Cancel/Home key. Hands-free mode If you are using a full-duplex audio accessory, simply press the Select/Send key and continue fully hands free. Receiving a phone call When an incoming phone call is received, your radio sounds an audible alert and displays the identity of the caller (if the contact or number is stored in your phone book). 1. Press the Accept context key or the Select/Send key to answer the call. Press the Reject context key or the Cancel/Home key to reject the call. 2. To end the call, press the Clear context key or the Cancel/Home key. Your radio can be customised to answer calls automatically after a set time period, exactly as if the Accept context key or the Select/Send key had been pressed. If the time period is set to zero the call may be answered before any alerts are audible. Answering phone calls in half-duplex mode You can answer an incoming full-duplex (phone) call as a half-duplex call. This is useful, for example, where a full-duplex call could pick up too much background noise for clear communications. 1. Press the PTT button to answer the call in half-duplex mode. 2. Continue as for Group calls and individual half-duplex calls:

To speak press and hold the PTT button and speak into the microphone. To listen release the PTT button and listen to audio received through the speaker. 3. To end the call, press the Clear context key or the Cancel/Home key. User Guide 53 Broadcast calls Sometimes it may be necessary for your Dispatcher to make a high-priority broadcast (also known as a Site Wide Call) to all network users. These calls take priority over any lower priority on-going calls, and you cannot respond to them: pressing the PTT key has no effect during a broadcast call. During a broadcast call the display changes to Broadcast Call and the displayed. Broadcast Call icon is A Quick Call allows you to request help or information in a non-emergency situation. Quick Calls To initiate a Quick Call 1. Press a pre-configured soft key. 2. Press the PTT to transmit. Depending on the configuration this causes all or some of the following to happen:

if your radio is in Smart Call Mode it reverts to Group or Individual Mode (see Smart Calls below). your radio sets up a voice call to a programmed recipient which can be individual or talkgroup your radio sends up to two Status messages your radio sends a position report Quick Calls cannot be made from a radio in Gateway Mode. Switch your radio to TMO or DMO before making a Quick Call. Quick Calls cannot be made from a radio which is making or receiving an emergency call or if your radio is in Transmit Inhibit mode. See Emergency operation on page17 and Transmit Inhibit on page69. Smart Calls A Smart Call is a high priority group or broadcast call to a specific talkgroup. This can be useful, for example, where you need to make an announcement to everyone in the vicinity of an incident, not just those in your selected talkgroup. The radio supports two separate Smart Call Modes (A and B) associated special folders Smart Call 1 and Smart Call 2 respectively. Each Smart Call Folder can be pre-configured with up to 75 talkgroups. You initiate a Smart Call by switching to Smart Call mode, then you press the PTT to transmit to a chosen talkgroup in the Smart Call Folder. 54 SCC3 colour console Broadcast calls cannot be made from a radio which is in DMO. Attempting to make a Smart Call in DMO initiates a group call to the attached talkgroup. It is not possible to make a Smart Call from a SRG3900/SCG22 radio operating in Gateway Mode and the Speech Call Settings option is not displayed. Make a Smart Call 1. Open the Smart Call menu either of the following:

Press a preconfigured soft key. Use the Speech Call Settings menu (see Speech call settings below. 2. Select mode Smart Call A or Smart Call B. Your radio goes into Smart Call Mode. The tri-colour LED flashes amber and the active Smart Call folder is displayed. 3. Select the required talkgroup in the current Smart Group Folder by . 4. Use the PTT (or press the Select context key or the Select/Send key) to transmit to the chosen talkgroup. To leave Smart Call Mode 1. Open the Smart Call menu either of the following:

Press a preconfigured soft key. Use the Speech Call Settings menu (see Speech call settings below. 2. Select Group or Individual:

Groupreturns you to your previous talkgroup Individualallow you to make an individual call by dialling Speech call settings The Speech Call Settings option is not available if your radio is operating in Gateway Mode. The Speech Call Settings option is not available if your radio is in Transmit Inhibit on page69. 1. Select Menu > Groups > Speech Call Settings. 2. Select one of the options. Modifying your call setup Under certain circumstances, the type of a call which is being initiated by your radio may be modified by the network or by the recipient of the call. For example, you might make a group call, but the actual call being established might be converted to an individual call to a dispatcher. User Guide 55 This feature is typically used by network administrators to provide centralised control over certain services (e.g. customising all the radios so that Alarm Calls are all the same type and destination, allowing the network to decide what type of call is made and the destination whenever an Alarm Call is initiated). When your call is modified you are alerted with specific visual and acoustic alert indications, to make you aware that a new type of call is being connected. The call continues as per any normal call of the new type, and the icons and information elements displayed inform you about the type of the ongoing call. Once the call is established, the characteristics of the new call are the same as those of any call of that type. For example, if the new call is half-duplex, you need to press PTT before starting to speak, releasing the PTT allows other parties to take the speech item, and the top microphone and half-

duplex loudspeakers are used. Changing the behaviour of the PTTduring TMO group calls Your radio may be customised to allow you to talk back on your TMO selected group even if you are currently receiving a group call from another talkgroup being scanned by your radio. When enabled, pressing the PTT when in a received group call will start a new call on the radio's selected talkgroup, allowing you to participate in that call whilst monitoring your current scanlist activity. There are two options:

To selected groupwhen the PTT is pressed in a received group call to a scanned group

(not the selected talkgroup), the radio leaves the existing call and starts a new call to the scanned talkgroup. To received groupwhen the PTT is pressed during a received group call, the radio transmits in the current call. If the PTT behaviour to set to the to selected group option, and the radio is in a group call from a scanned talkgroup that is not the currently selected talkgroup, an icon Information Box. When the radio leaves the scanned group, to start a call to the selected talkgroup, the icon is not displayed. appears in the Call The behaviour of the PTT button can be set for all group calls using the PTT Behaviour option available from the Options menu. Alternatively, you can override the default setting during a group call by pressing the PTT context key (which toggles the two options) and select the PTT behaviour that allows you to respond to the call. Your radio provides a notification message to show the change of PTT behaviour (either to selected group or to received group). When the call is terminated, the behaviour of the PTT button reverts to that selected using the menu option. If your radio is operating in Gateway mode, the radio can only respond to group calls in the selected talkgroup (to selected group). 56 SCC3 colour console To set the PTT behaviour using the menu:

1. Select Menu > Options > Settings > PTT Behaviour. 2. Select the PTT behaviour (To received group or To selected group), then press the Select context key. To change the PTTbehaviour during a group call:

1. When the group call is in progress, press the PTT context key. Select the PTT behaviour and press the Select context key. Alternatively, you can change the PTT behaviour during a group call by pressing the Options context key, then selecting the PTT Behaviour option. Press the Select context key to change the behaviour of the PTT, for example if your default behaviour is set to the to selected group option, the option to change to the received group appears for selection. User Guide 57 Text entry Writing and editing text on your radio is similar to most Smartphones. Text edit mode is automatically activated when you select certain functions, such as creating a message or adding a contact to your phone book. To enter characters:

Press a key repeatedly to highlight a character in its Character Selection Box at the bottom of the screen, then press the Select context key (or wait for the character to be auto-inserted). To delete a character:

To delete the character to the left of the cursor press the Delete context key. To enter special characters:

To insert punctuation (full stop, comma, or semi-colon) press zero (0) repeatedly until the symbol is highlighted in the Character Selection Box, then press the Select context key (or wait for the character to be auto-inserted). To insert a space press 1 (on the keypad). To insert symbols press the hash(#) key repeatedly until the symbol is highlighted in the Character Selection Box, then press the Select context key (or wait for the character to be auto-inserted). To change the character set:

Press the Star (*) key during text entry. Cursor movement When you enter text the cursor advances automatically. You can also move the cursor character by character or to the start or end of a sentence using the navigation keys. Cursor Movement Move one character at a time Move to the start of a sentence Move to the end of a sentence Description Press the Right or Left navigation key. Press the Up navigation key. Press the Down navigation key. Add a space Press the 1 key. 58 SCC3 colour console Character sets You can use character sets to change the style of the text, and to enter numbers and special characters. The character set can be changed as often as required when entering text. The following character sets are supported:

Character set Description Auto-capitalisation (Abc) The first letter is entered in upper-case, with all following characters in lower-case. New sentences start with a capital letter and end with a full stop (.), question mark (?) or exclamation mark (!) followed by one or more spaces. Upper case (ABC) All characters are entered in upper-case. Lower case (abc) All characters are entered in lower-case. Numeric (123) All characters are numbers. Special characters(!.@) You can select special characters such as full stops (.), semi-

colon (;) and commas (,) by pressing the 0 key. Further special characters #@!$%&()*+- are available on the # key. Chinese characters Simplified and Zhiyan. See Chinese character sets below. The selected character set is indicated on the status line at the top of the display. Chinese character sets Simplified Chinese You can build up Simplified Chinese characters by pressing the appropriate keys on the keypad to input strokes. As strokes are entered they display in the top left of the character selection box and the set of possible matching characters is displayed above the Context keys. You can also use pinyin to enter a phonetic version of a Simplified Chinese character (e.g. Lu) which is displayed in the top left of the character selection boxin the same place as the strokes described aboveand the set of possible matching characters is displayed above the Context keys. When the right and/or left arrow icons are displayed in the character selection box, use the Left and Right navigation keys to select from the characters displayed. To see further characters press the Down navigation key, and press the Up navigation key to return to characters already viewed. The characters are displayed in sets of seven. To enter the highlighted characterpress Insert or press the Select/Send key. Zhiyan Chinese Zhiyan Chinese characters are composed and entered in a similar way to Simplified Chinese characters, however when the keys are pressed to input the strokes that build up the character you must then press the Select/Send key to display the set of possible matching characters. User Guide 59 Messages Message Inbox Your radio supports messages. All message types are available from the Messages menu. status messages, text (SDS) messages and picture Incoming messages are displayed in the Inbox with the most recently received messages at the top. Unread messages appear in Bold. The Inbox can store up to 50 messages. When the Inbox is full, unsaved older messages are automatically deleted when new messages are received. If you want to keep a message, you must save it. If your radio is configured to show messages in tabs, the most recent message appears on the last numbered tab, for example if there are 5 messages in your Inbox a new message will appear on tab number 6. If you want to read older messages use the navigation keys to scroll through the message tabs. Unread message appear on black labelled tabs. To keep the Inbox to a manageable size it is recommended that messages are deleted or saved after reading them. See Saved messages on page63. When a new message arrives the New Message icon appears to show there is a new message in the Inbox. the radio vibrates the tri-colour LED flashes amber the blue LED flashes periodically (missed event) the display flashes periodically (missed event) if specified in the message, the text of the message (SDS message) or image (Picture message) is displayed on the screen as soon as it is received To open the Inbox:

Choose one of the following methods:

Press a customised soft key Open the Shortcut Bar (in the Home screen press the Shortcut context key or the Up navigation key) then navigate to the Inbox shortcut and press the Select context key. Message icons Various icons are used to identify the type of message received:

60 SCC3 colour console Icon Description Status message SDS message (unread) SDS message Broken message: there was a problem receiving the message. Its contents are lost or damaged. Saved Messages is nearly full to capacity [customisable]

SDS message with Paging Alert (unread) SDS message with Paging Alert Picture message (unread) Picture message Inbox operations You can perform a number of functions from the Inbox. With a message selected, press the Options context key to perform one of the following functions:

Open the message View the message details (See View message details below.) Reply to the message (not picture messages) Forward the message to a contact (not picture messages) Save the message (See Saved messages on page63.) Delete the message Opening messages To open a message:

1. Open your Inbox (see To open the Inbox: on the previous page). 2. Scroll to the message and then press the Open context key. View message details You can view the details of received messages. User Guide 61 To view message details:

1. Open your Inbox (see To open the Inbox: on page60). 2. Select a message then use Options > Details. 3. To exit the Details screen press Cancel. Item Description Message location (Inbox) Size. Note: this is a relative measure of the message size (not number of characters). You can use Size to decide which message(s) to delete if Saved Messages becomes full (see Message Inbox on page60) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Sender Time received Dial mode Date received Reply to a message To reply to a message:

1. From an open message, select Reply. 2. From Inbox, select a message then select Options > Reply. 3. Create your response (see Text entry on page58.) 4. When you have finished, press Send. 5. Select a recipient:

a. Send to Defaultsend to message sender b. Send to Groupsend to your current talkgroup 62 SCC3 colour console c. Phonebooksend to a contact in your phonebook d. Dialsend to a number you dial 6. Press Send. Open a URL in a message Open the message then select Options > Open URL. A text message may contain a URL which you can open in the WAP Browser. If your radio has been customised to do so, URLs in text messages can open automatically in the WAP Browser when they are received. Saved messages You can save up to 50 messages in your Saved messages folder. When the remaining space is insufficient to save a particular message, an error is displayed which indicates the amount of space required to store the current message. Delete one or more messages to clear some space for new ones to be saved. Saved Messages can be lost if the radio is not correctly switched off when powering down (see Power off on page11). To save a message:

1. Open the message (or select it in the Inbox). 2. Select Options > Save. A message indicating that the message has been stored is displayed. To view saved messages:

Select Menu > Messages > Saved Messages. Use the navigation keys to scroll through the list of messages. 1. View Saved Messages (see To view saved messages: above). To delete the selected saved message select Delete Message To delete all saved messages select Delete All To delete saved messages:

2. Select Options > Delete. 3. Select a delete option:

Create a text message 1. Select Menu > Messages > Create Message. An empty message box appears. 2. Enter your message text (see Text entry on page58). User Guide 63 To return to the top level menu screen, either wait for the inactivity timer to expire, or press and hold the Cancel/Home key, or press and hold the clear soft key. You can set an option to confirm that the message has been delivered, see SDS report request on page66. 1. View Saved Messages and select the saved message. 2. Select Options > Edit. 3. Edit the message as required. (See Text entry on page58.) 3. EITHER:

send the message immediately save the updated message To send the message immediately See Sending messages below. To save the message Select Options > Save. To edit a saved text message 4. EITHER:

send the message immediately save the updated message To send the message immediately See Sending messages below. To save the updated message Select Options > Save. Sending messages You can send text (SDS) and status messages to:

the currently selected talkgroup a Phonebook entry a destination you key in the default destination customised in your radio (for example, the message sender) For setting default destination see Set default destination on page 70. 64 SCC3 colour console 1. Choose one of the following methods:

Select a saved text message Select a status message from the Send Status List Create a text message 2. Select Send or Options > Send. 3. Select a destination (see below):

Send to default destination 1. Select Send to Group. The current talkgroup is shown. Send to current talkgroup 2. Select Send. Send to a Phonebook entry Select Send to Default then select Send. The message is sent and the radio returns to the message screen. 1. Select Phonebook. Your Phonebook opens. 2. Select your contact and press Open. 3. Select the phone number. (Contacts can have multiple phone numbers). 4. Press Send to send the message. While you are selecting the address for a message you cannot make outgoing calls to Phonebook. 2. Key in an individual address (ISSI, Individual Short Subscriber Identity) in the dial box. Send to a dialled destination 1. Select Dial. 3. Press Send to send the message. Send a status message To send a status message, choose one of the following methods:

Press Shortcut to open the Shortcut Bar, then select Quick Status (if customised). Shortcut Bar From the Home screen 1. In the Home screen, double-press the Groups key. 2. Press the Left and Right navigation keys to scroll through the status messages. 3. To send the message, press Send, then select Send to default (or choose another destination such as your talkgroup, contact in your phone book or dial the number). User Guide 65 Soft key (Quick Status message) Press a soft key. Messages sent from soft keys are called Quick Status messages. During a Group Call with the call dialogue screen displayed, you cannot send Quick Status messages using the Select/Send key or the Cancel/Home key. Instead, first press the Down navigation key to clear the call dialogue screen, or exit the call. Menu Send. 3. Select a destination. 1. Select Menu > Messages > Send Status. 2. Use the Up and Down navigation keys to highlight the status and then select Options >

Edit status messages before sending You can edit the text label of a status message prior to sending it. When the message is edited, it is sent as a text message, rather than as a status message code. With the status message selected, press Options and then select Edit . Enter your text before sending the message. The Edit option is only available when you open a status message from the menu. SDS report request You can request a Delivery Report and/or a Read Report when you send an SDS (text) message. These cause a pop-up box to open when sent messages are successfully delivered and read respectively. 1. Select Menu > Messages > SDS Report Status. 2. Navigate to a report type and press Toggle to toggle the report on (ticked) and off. Set default destination You can enter and update the default destination address that your radio offers when you send a status or SDS message. This can be either a talkgroup or an individual. 1. Select Menu > Messages > Status Destination. 2. Select Options (or press the Select/Send key) then select Edit. 3. Select Dial or Phonebook:

select Phonebook to open the Phonebook and choose a contact (Contacts on page44) select Dial to enter the required number directly from the radio keypad. 66 SCC3 colour console 4. Press Save or the Select/Send key to save the number (or press Cancel or the Cancel/Home key to cancel it and return to the previous number). Picture messages Picture messages Your radio can receive picture messages which may have accompanying text. You may also be alerted by an alarm (if specified in the message) and vibration and LED alerts (if customised). (You cannot reply to or forward a picture messages.) You can press any key to stop the audible alarm. Open picture message 1. Select a picture message then click Open. 2. To view the image full screen, use Options > View Image. The image and any text associated with it are displayed. If the image data has been corrupted the Broken Picture icon is displayed. Paging alerts The Paging Alerts feature allows the radio to act as a pager when it is in normal operating mode or when you select a user profile which results in the radio appearing to be switched off. (See User profiles on page88.) The Paging Alerts feature is triggered by receipt of a Status message which is automatically displayed. If there is also an associated SDS message to explain the reason for the Paging Alert this is automatically displayed on the radio. If a call is in progress the Paging Alert interrupts it. The SDS message is marked with an icon to indicate that it is associated with a Paging Alert. When the Paging Alert is triggered you hear a discordant two tone alarm and the tri-colour LED flashes amber to indicate that a Status message has been received. To stop the two tone alert press any key. Your radio can be customised so that a Paging Alert automatically makes it fully operational on receipt of the Status message which triggered the Paging Alert. User Guide 67 Networks Authentication Remote User Assignment (aliasing) If your radio supports Remote User Assignment (RUA) using TETRA Interoperability Profile (TIP) defined procedures and transactions, your presence on the network requires authentication. RUA allows you to be authenticated onto the network by entering a user identity and optionally a PIN

(maximum 7 digit). Once accepted by the system, you can be addressed by your user identity, if aliasing is supported by the system. At the start of a shift, you can take a pool radio and, after you log in, other radio users on the network can identify you by you user name. TETRA services including individual voice and data (Status and SDS) communication can be set up using your user name (provided your user name and your corresponding user ISSI are in the Phonebook). If you power on your radio using the Emergency button you must log on to the network before an Alarm call can be initiated. Network log on/off may be initiated by your dispatcher. To log on/off:

A screen appears:

Your radio may be customised to request PIN entry log on to the network when powered on. Alternatively select Menu > Networks > Log ON/OFF. Log Onenter you user ID and password then press Confirm. Log Offpress Confirm. Detailsindicates the current log on state of the radio. and displays the user's network identity. Change Network If your radio is customised to use other networks, you can manually select a network from a list of configured networks, or allow your radio to automatically use a suitable network when you move into its coverage area. If your radio is customises for End to End Encryption, the radio may change the End-to-End Encryption status when the selected network is changed. It may also provide a selection of talkgroups on other networks. If a talkgroup is selected that does not belong to the current network, your radio will change network accordingly. After switching to a different network, make sure that your selected talkgroup is valid for that network. For details of talkgroup selection see Talkgroups and folders on page28. 68 SCC3 colour console Your radio can be configured to display the Network Name continuously on the Radio Status Line

(RSL), subject to space, when it is idle. If your radio registers on a Visited Network network the Radio Status Line (RSL). Migrated icon is displayed in the To manually change network 1. Select Menu > Networks > Change Network. 2. Navigate to the required network then press Select or the Select/Send key. When you manually select a network it remains selected regardless of whether your radio is able to obtain service on that network. To automatically change network 1. Select Menu > Networks > Change Network. 2. Navigate to Automatic then press Select or the Select/Send key. The Network Name of the automatically selected network is displayed below the Automatic option in the list when the radio is able to obtain service. Transmit Inhibit Sometimes you may be working in areas that are sensitive to Radio Frequency (RF) signals such as healthcare facilities. To continue operating your radio in these areas, you can set your radio to Transmit Inhibit mode to prevent any RF transmission. When Transmit Inhibit is activated or deactivated, a status message can be sent confirming the operational state of your radio. You cannot activate Transmit Inhibit when you are in a call. Alarm Calls initiated in Transmit Inhibit mode are still transmitted. You cannot select Transmit Inhibit if user profile Do Not Disturb is selected. See User profiles on page88. Your radio automatically leaves Transmit Inhibit mode when you power it off; when powered on again Transmit Inhibit is not activated. To activate or deactivate Transmit Inhibit mode 1. Select Menu > Networks > Transmit Inhibit. 2. Select Toggle to toggle Transmit Inhibit on/off. When Transmit Inhibit mode is activated:

The Transmit Inhibit icon appears in the Shortcut Bar as a notification or the status line on the Home screen The Tri-colour LED flashes orange four times approximately every 2 seconds. There may be a soft key programmed to toggle Transmit Inhibit on/off. For a list of programmed soft keys refer to the radio's Help (Menu > Help). User Guide 69 Adjusting the DMO power transmission level When you are operating in DMO, Repeater or Gateway modes, you can change the transmission power level that your radio operates at on the network. The radio operates at a normal transmission level which is predefined. If you change the power level to a setting that is higher than the normal operating transmission level, the icon appears on the status line. Likewise if you change the power level to a lower transmission level, the icon on the status line. appears To change the transmission power level:

1. Select Menu > Networks > DMO Options then select either the DMO Tx Power option if you are working in DMO on the network or the Rep/GW Tx Power option if you are working in Repeater or Gateway modes. 2. Select the power level option, and press the key. Fallback Mode If a base station is customised to operate in fallback mode, when network communication is lost any radios using the base station will continue to operate, but with a reduced service. This is known as Fallback Mode. The base station broadcasts the loss of communication to all radios which are using it. In Fallback Mode your radio can only communicate with other radios that are registered on the same site: no inter-site communication is available. When your radio enters Fallback Mode:

the radio status bar indicates Fallback Mode and the warning triangle is displayed momentarily the Fallback Mode text box pops up in the centre of the screen for a few seconds showing a customisable text message the RSSI antenna icon flashes continuously the tri-colour LED flashes amber intermittently (indicating limited service mode) the radio generates a warning tone When your radio leaves Fallback Mode:

the radio status bar returns to normal (Ready or similar) the RSSI antenna icon stops flashing the tri-colour LED stops flashing a text box pops up indicating normal operation. the radio generates a warning tone. 70 SCC3 colour console Operating Modes Your radio supports the following operating modes:

In Trunked Mode Operation (TMO Mode) your radio operates on the network infrastructure supplied by your service provider. In Direct Mode Operation (DMO Mode) your radio can transmit directly to another radio

(antenna to antenna). In DMO mode radio coverage depends on the position of the caller and the receiving radio. When you switch to DMO your radio leaves the network and tunes to the selected DMO talkgroup. See also DMO Mode below. In Gateway mode your radio acts as a DMO gateway (or gateway) which allows users working in DMO to communicate with users operating on a Trunked Mode (TMO) Network. This extends the coverage of the network, allowing users in DMO mode to communicate with those operating in TMO. See also DMO gateway operation on page73. In Repeater mode your radio enables two or more radios operating in DMO mode to communicate over an extended range, automatically relaying voice and messages by operating as a repeater. See also Repeater Mode on page76. To change operating mode from the Home screen Press the Menu context key, then select Networks > Operating Mode. Scroll to the mode

(highlight it) and press Select. Alternatively, a soft key may be programmed as a shortcut to this function or a shortcut may be added to the Shortcut Bar. Open the Shortcut Bar (in the Home screen press the Shortcut context key), scroll to the Operating Modes shortcut and then press the Select context key. You can then select the operating mode. DMO Mode In Direct Mode Operation (DMO), radios communicate directly with other TETRA radios without using a network. The radios must all switch to DMO and select the same talkgroup, and that talkgroup must use the same channel (frequency). Communications to other users on the network are impossible unless they also switch to DMO and select the same talkgroup. This means that in DMO, communications to the dispatcher is impossible unless they also switch to DMO and select the same talkgroup, or if they communicate through a DMO gateway (see DMO gateway operation). Group calls DMO supports group calls (see Group calls on page50) which are made and received in the same way as radios operating in TMO. In DMO TETRA Alarm Calls are either sent to the currently selected DMO talkgroup or (if customised) may switch to TMO to make the call. If TMO is unavailable Alarm Calls are made using DMO. See Emergency operation on page17. User Guide 71 Individual calls Your radio can be customised to allow you to make individual calls to other radios working in DMO which are attached to the same talkgroup. In this case individual calls are initiated by pressing the PTT key. Your radio can also be customised to allow you to select a channel only talkgroup. If you select a channel only talkgroup your radio cannot make or receive group calls: it can only make or receive individual calls. You can enable Presence Checking so that your radio checks whether the receiving radio is available to receive when you attempt an Individual call. See DMO options on the facing page. Using a DMO gateway A DMO gateway (or gateway) is a device which allows users working in Direct Mode to communicate with users in Trunked Mode effectively extending the working range of a radio. When your radio is in DMO Mode and it is in range of a DMO gateway the if customised, an audible alert is generated. You can now make and receive group calls to TMO radios (and to the dispatcher) via the gateway. See DMO gateway operation on the facing page. gateway icon appears and, If your radio is outside the range of a gateway, you may still be able to hear the speech of another user who is in range of a gateway and who is involved in a group call via the gateway. In this case the Communication Mismatch icon is displayed to indicate that you cannot take part fully in the call. If you attempt to respond to the overheard speech, any radios within gateway range which can hear you also display a Communication Mismatch icon to tell them that the speech is not being routed via the gateway to TMO users. Using a DMO repeater You can extend DMO Mode range by using a DMO repeater (repeater). If your radio detects a DMO Repeater icon is displayed and your radio can communicate with any other repeater the radios in the selected DMO talkgroup which are also within the range of the repeater. See Repeater Mode on page76. 72 SCC3 colour console If a radio is within range of a repeater but for some reason a call cannot be set up through it your radio attempts to set up the call in DMO Mode and the displayed to all members of the talkgroup to indicate that there may be members of the talkgroup who cannot take part in the call. Communication Mismatch icon is DMO options You can select the following DMO options:

GW DMO Ind Address Set the default individual address to which a TMO Individual call is routed by a radio operating in DMO gateway mode. Press Select then Options. Editenter a new address as described in Text entry on page58. The dial mode may be changed by pressing the Up and Down Navigation keys. When the number and dial mode are as required press Save. Phonebookenter a new address from the phonebook. Navigate to the required phonebook contact then press Details see all numbers associated with the chosen contact. Select a number and press Save. Use Defaultreverts changes to the default value. Presence Check Specify whether Presence Checking is performed before DMO Individual calls are made. When Presence Checking is On your radio checks whether the intended receiving radio is available and in radio contact before it attempts to set up the call. GW/Rep Filter Specify whether your radio uses or ignores any gateway and/or repeater it detects. In the Gateway/Repeater Filter screen select one of the following options:

No GW/Repdo not use any gateways and repeaters detected by your radio Use RepeaterUse repeaters detected Use GatewayUse gateways detected Use GW/RepUse a gateway or a repeater detected by your radio. When option Use GW/Rep is selected, your radio selects the first gateway or repeater that it detects. If the radio selects a gateway, a stops sending a presence signal it will no longer be detected by your radio. gateway icon is displayed on the status line. If the gateway DMO gateway operation A DMO gateway (or gateway) is a device which allows users working in Direct Mode Operation

(DMO) to communicate with users operating on a Trunked Mode Operation (TMO) network (see User Guide 73 DMO Mode on page71). The gateway re-transmits information received on the DMO Interface onto the TMO interface, hence extending the working range of the DMO radios. Therefore if your radio is in DMO and is within range of a gateway you can make and receive Group calls to and from TMO radios, including your dispatcher. When you switch to Gateway mode, your radio connects your currently (or last selected) selected DMO and TMO talkgroups. Gateway connecting DMO radios to TMO network When in Gateway mode, with the exception of Emergency operation on page17 and Smart Calls on page54, no calls (voice or data) can be made or received on the radio being used as a gateway. The radio is acting only as a relay between Direct mode and Trunked mode. If you activate the Emergency Button when the radio is operating in Gateway mode, any calls that are currently active through the gateway cease. The radio reverts to Trunked Mode Operation and initiates an Alarm Call to the attached Trunked mode talkgroup. When the Alarm Call ends the radio remains in Trunked mode. If you are going to leave a gateway unattended for long periods of time, or as a permanent installation in a remote location, we recommend that you configure it as required (select and attach the required Trunked mode talkgroup and the required Direct mode talkgroup) and then power the radio off. This will save the configuration; each time the radio is powered on again, it will re-start with the saved configuration. This will ensure that the radio is always running with the correct gateway configuration even if it turns on unexpectedly after circumstances such as power failures. Switching to Gateway mode When you switch to Gateway mode, your radio connects your currently (or last selected) selected DMO and TMO talkgroups. If your radio has been reprogrammed, you may need to switch to DMO mode (see Operating Modes on page71) and select a DMO talkgroup before Gateway mode can be enabled. 74 SCC3 colour console To switch to Gateway mode Press a customised soft key. Alternatively follow these steps:

1. Press Menu then select Networks > Operating Mode. 2. Scroll to Gateway Mode and press Select. 3. A large tick graphic is displayed and the gateway icon is displayed on the status line. After various checks the top level screen message Ready: Gateway appears. (If this does not happen see the Tip above.) If you do not see message Ready: Gateway, select a DMO talkgroup to connect to (described in Selecting a talkgroup on page31). The radio remembers the last Direct mode talkgroup selected for use in Gateway mode, and uses it automatically the next time the radio is switched into Gateway mode. When the radio is configured as a Gateway, the top level screen shows the TMO and DMO talkgroups selected:

Description 1 2 TMO talkgroup DMO talkgroup Gateway states When in Gateway mode the radio makes no differentiation if the DMO talkgroup is a Channel Only talkgroup. Please see DMO Mode on page71 for more information on DMO Channel Only talkgroups. A gateway can enter several states of operation, depending upon the status of calls through the gateway, whether it has detected other gateways present or other users of the direct mode channel. These states are reported as top level screen messages including the following:

Message Monitoring Gateways Busy DMO Channel Other gateway found Description Displayed when the radio is first switched to Gateway mode, or when the DMO frequency is changed by requesting a new talkgroup or a previously Occupied or Reserved channel is detected as free. This screen is displayed if the DMO frequency is detected as being Occupied or Reserved. Another gateway offering the same or an overlapping DMO service has been detected. Ready: Gateway In Call: Gateway The gateway is ready and has no calls in progress. A call is in progress through the gateway. User Guide 75 Changing talkgroups in Gateway mode When a talkgroup is changed in Gateway mode, only the DMO talkgroup changes; the TMO talkgroup remains unchanged unless the radio has been configured with fixed pairs of DMO and TMO talkgroups. (The radio can be programmed with up to 100 pre-set pairs of TMO and DMO talkgroups.) In this case, if the selected DMO talkgroup is paired with a TMO talkgroup then the radio also automatically selects the paired TMO talkgroup. Changing TMO talkgroup 1. Select Trunked mode operation:

a. Press Menu then select Networks > Operating Mode. b. Scroll to Trunked Mode and press Select. c. Select the TMO talkgroup to connect to (see Selecting a talkgroup on page31). 2. Select Gateway mode operation:

a. Press Menu then select Networks > Operating Mode. b. Scroll to Gateway Mode and press Select. Changing DMO talkgroup Select the DMO talkgroup to connect to (see Selecting a talkgroup on page31 Repeater Mode A radio acting as a repeater provides a service to other radio users. It extends the range and enhances the reliability of Direct Mode communication compared with basic direct communication between radios. You can use a repeater to enable communication between radios which are out of range of each other. The following diagram shows radios A, B and C and a repeater which are on the same DMO talkgroup. A, B and C are in range of the repeater. Because of its location, the repeater can pass communications between A, B and C even though they are out of range of each other. 76 SCC3 colour console You can also use a repeater to enable communication between two radios which cannot communicate directly, perhaps because their users are do not have line of sight with each other. The following diagram shows radios A and B and a repeater which are on the same DMO talkgroup. A and B are in range of the repeater. Because of its location, the repeater can pass communications between A and B even though they cannot communicate directly. What repeaters cannot do In Repeater Mode the radio cannot:

User Guide 77 make individual calls take part in another group call send status or SDS messages use the Quick Status feature edit text use the phonebook view the library of pre-defined Status messages Participating in repeated calls A radio in Repeater Mode may (depending on its customisation) operate either as a Standard Repeater or as a Repeater with Call Participation. Standard Repeater If your radio is configured to operate as a Standard Repeater you cannot take part in calls which are being relayed through it. Repeater with call participation If your radio is configured to operate in Repeater Mode with Call Participation you can take part in the calls which are being relayed through it if the call participants are on the same DMO talkgroup as you. To stop participating in a call, press the Clear context key; you radio continues to act as a Repeater. You cannot switch to Repeater Mode if the radio is in Transmit Inhibit on page69 or if the radio has initiated an alarm call (see Emergency operation on page17) which has not been cleared. If you select Transmit Inhibit Mode while your radio is operating in Repeater Mode, the radio leaves Repeater Mode and it stops functioning as a Repeater. If you are going to leave a repeater unattended for long periods of time, or as a permanent installation in a remote location, we recommend that you configure it as required (select and attach the required Direct Mode talkgroup) and then power the radio off. This will save the configuration;

each time the radio is powered on again, it will re-start with the saved configuration. This will ensure that the radio is always running with the correct repeater configuration even if it turns on unexpectedly after circumstances such as power failures. Switching to Repeater Mode To switch to Repeater Mode see Operating Modes on page71. Before you can use the radio as a repeater you must select a Direct Mode talkgroup. Changing talkgroups in Repeater Mode You can change talkgroups while your radio is operating in Repeater Mode in the usual way (see Talkgroups and folders on page28.) 78 SCC3 colour console If you change to a different DMO talkgroup it may (depending on the customisation) terminate any calls active through the repeater. Using the Emergency Button in Repeater Mode If you use the Emergency Button when your radio is operating in Repeater Mode, any calls that are currently active through the repeater will cease. When the Alarm Call is subsequently cleared, the radio may not necessarily remain in Repeater Mode. Repeater states A radio acting as a repeater can enter several states of operation, depending upon the status of calls through the repeater and whether it has detected other users of the direct mode channel. These states are reported as the following top level screen messages:

Message Description Ready: Repeater The repeater is ready and has no calls in progress Busy DMO Channel The repeater has detected that the DMO channel is being used. In this case repeater operation is suspended. In Call: Repeater A call is in progress through the repeater. Talk Repeater Participating in a call and transmitting User Guide 79 Callout alerts Your radio can receive Callout Alerts sent over the network to inform you of incidents. When a Callout Alert arrives the radio sounds an audible alarm and a Callout message is displayed on the screen. To silence this alarm press any key. A voice call may also be initiated. Your radio may also be customised to alert you of Callouts in other ways (such as vibrator alert and/or a flashing LED alerts). When it receives a Callout Alert your radio goes into Protected Callout Mode (in which many features are disabled) for a set time period or until you respond to or acknowledge the Callout message. This mode is designed to stop you getting distracted and to focus your attention on an incident. To view Callout messages Press Menu then select Phone > Callout. Alternatively, press the Up navigation key (or Shortcut) to open the Shortcut Bar, then select Callout. If Callout messages have been received they are listed with Callout icons. To see the options for a Callout Highlight a Callout and press Options OR press the Select/Send key to activate the first option in the Options menu. (The Select/Send Key Shortcut icon between the Context keys indicates that this shortcut is available.) Open view the Callout message plus more information associated with the message dialogue Accept indicate you are accepting the Callout Reject indicate you are rejecting the Callout User Response compose a free-form text message to send to the Callout originator

[customisable]

Delete delete one or more Callouts Details view the details of the Callout message Status send or update your current Availability status. The Callout screen indicates that an Availability Status message has been sent. [customisable]

Responding to Callouts When you respond to a Callout your radio may automatically send a message (if programmed in the radio) or you can select a message from a list or select User Response (if customised) to compose and send a free-form text message. 80 SCC3 colour console Callouts requiring a response Some Callouts require a response. The following responses are possible:

Accept Reject Standby Press Accept to indicate that you intend to act on the Callout (or select Accept from the pop-up menu displayed from the Left or Right navigation key. If only one acceptance message is programmed in your radio an informative message is displayed to show that it has been sent to the originator of the Callout. If multiple messages have been programmed, select one of them and press Select to send it. Alternatively (if customised) you can compose and send a free-form text message. Depending how the Callout has been configured it may either exit once the acceptance message has been sent or it enter an Information Phase during which information may be sent to and received from the originator of the Callout. This could include a pre-set message, a free-form text message or a Callout group call. Press Reject to indicate you do not intend to act on the Callout (or select Reject from the pop-up menu displayed from the Left or Right navigation key. Your radio exits from the Callout and Protected Callout Mode and the top level screen is displayed. Select Standby to acknowledge receipt of the Callout and to indicate that you are standing by for further information before accepting or rejecting. During standby the Callout goes into its Information Phase during which information may be sent to and received from the originator of the Callout. During standby you can also accept or reject the Callout andif use of the PTT is permittedmake group calls to the Callout group. During Standby you can view the following Callout message details :

the Response required icon the Callout group time and date when the message was received the severity of the Callout Alert the Callout ID icons to show:

whether the Callout is to a group or an individual whether the Callout is incoming or outgoing whether or not the Callout is End-to-End Encrypted User Response Allows you to compose and send a free-form text message to the originator of the Callout.

[customisable]

User Guide 81 Exit Respond User Response Callouts not requiring a response Some Callouts do not require a response. You can respond to or ignore then as follows:

Press the Exit context key to exit the Callout and exit, and return to the top level screen. No response message is sent. Press the Respond context key to display the Information screen offering the various pre-set messages to send from the radio to the originator of the Callout and vice versa. To send one of the pre-set messages select it and press the Select context key. You can compose and send a free-form text message to the originator of the Callout. When your message is ready to send press the Confirm context key. You can continue to respond and send messages as described here until the Callout ends and the top level screen is displayed.

[customisable]

Details You can view the following Callout message details:

the Response required icon the Callout group time and date when the message was received the severity of the Callout Alert the Callout ID icons to show:

whether the Callout is to a group or an individual whether the Callout is incoming or outgoing whether or not the Callout is End-to-End Encrypted Callout Test alert If you receive a Callout Test Message either respond or cancel the alert:

to cancel the Callout Test alert press the Cancel context key. The Callout exits and the radio displays the top level screen. You can still view the details from Messages > Callouts. to indicate that you are ready to respond to Callout alerts press Respond (or the Left or Right navigation key). The following response options are displayed:

82 SCC3 colour console Press the Respond context key to display the Response screen. Press the Right or Left navigation key to view additional options. To send a Test OK message to the Callout originator select it and press the Select context key. The Callout Test exits and the top level screen is displayed. Respond User Response

(If customised) allows you to compose and send a free-form text message to the originator of the Callout. When the message has been sent the Callout Test exits and the top level screen is displayed. Details The Details screen is displayed showing:

the Callout Test icon an indication that the Callout Test has been sent to an individual the originator of the Callout Test message time and date when the message was received the severity of the Alert the Message ID icons to show :

whether the Callout is to a group or an individual whether the Callout is incoming or outgoing whether or not the Callout is encrypted Press the Back context key to display the previous screen. When a Callout ends When a Callout times out or is cleared by the Callout originator the Callout ends, your radio displays the top level screen and the functionality which had been suspended is restored. Protected Callout Mode When it receives a Callout alert your radio goes into Protected Callout Mode (and many features are disabled) for a set time period or until you respond to or acknowledge the Callout message. This mode is designed to stop you getting distracted and to focus your attention on an incident. During Protected Callout Mode you can only do the following:

Read the current alerting message Acknowledge the Callout alert Make an Alarm Call User Guide 83 Switch Transmit Inhibit on/off Make a Quick Call (if customised as a higher priority than Callout) No callsapart from group calls allowed by some Calloutsreceived while your radio is in Protected Callout Mode are connected but their details are saved. To view them after the Callout has ended select the Missed Event menu. If you receive a new Callout while your radio is already in Protected Callout Mode, the new Callout takes priority and is displayed immediately. The existing Callout is treated as a missed Callout: to view its details after the Callout has ended select Messages > Callout. The Missed Call and/or Missed Callout icons display after the new Callout has ended. Missed Callouts To view information about the missed Callout select Menu > Messages > Callout. Your radio ignores Callouts received when any of the following functions are active:

Ongoing Alarm Call (a highest priority call) Alarm Call Quick Call (when customised as a higher priority than Callout) Smart Call 1 (when customised as a higher priority than Callout) Smart Call 2 (when customised as a higher priority than Callout) Group Focus Privacy Mode When the higher priority function ends, the radio notifies you of the missed Callout by sounding an audible alert and displaying a Missed Callout icon. Callout display A typical Callout screen looks as follows:

Item Description 1 2 Message location (Inbox) Callout type, see Callout icons. 84 SCC3 colour console Item Description Callout group or Callout originator 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Time received Information icons Callout message header text (customisable) Backdrop image (customisable, radios with colour display only). Indicates severity of the Callout. Date received Explanatory text about the Callout 10 Left/Right Navigational keys available for more options Callout icons Icon Description Callout Alert message, response required. Missed Callout Callout Alert message, user response has been sent. Callout Alert message, response not required. Callout Availability message. An information message has been received by the radio. An information message has been sent from the radio. Standby Message has been sent from the radio. Callout Test message, user response is required. The identity of the sender is displayed instead of the Callout group. Callout Test message, user response has been sent. The receiving radio and the Callout originator both have End-to-End Encryption active. Either the Callout originator or the receiving radio has End-to-End Encryption switched off. The Callout is addressed to an individual. User Guide 85 Icon Description The Callout is addressed to a group. Left and Right navigation keys left and right arrow icons are displayed between the Context keys during Protected Callout The Mode when there are more options than are shown on the Context keys. EITHER:

Press the Left or Right navigational keys to display a menu of the additional options available OR press the Select/Send key to action the first item in the menu of options. The Key Shortcut icon is displayed between the context keys to indicate that this shortcut is available. Select/Send Group calls to Callout group While your radio is in Protected Callout Mode the only calls you can make are TETRA Alarm Calls, Quick Calls (if customised as a higher priority than Callout), and, if allowed, group calls to the Callout group. You can only make group calls if PTT use is permitted during the Callout. For some Callouts your radio can make and/or receive group calls to a specially configured Callout group when it is in Protected Callout Mode. This group may be the group the radio is attached to when the Callout is received, or a different group which the radio is configured to connect to on receipt of the Callout or when an acceptance message is sent. While the PTT is pressed and the radio is transmitting the text Talk is displayed in place of CALLOUT on the Radio Status Line at the top left of the screen and no backdrop is displayed. When the radio is receiving a group call the ISSI (or shortened ISSI) or identity of the transmitting party is displayed in place of CALLOUT on the Radio Status Line at the top left of the screen. When the Callout has exited, depending on the customisation, the radio either reattaches to the group it was attached to before receiving the Callout, or remains attached to the new group. Information Phase Some Callouts do not exit after the initial acknowledgement is sent, but enter an Information Phase when information may be Information can include a pre-set message, a free-form text message or a Callout group call. Your radio can also be customised to display a backdrop graphic to indicate it is in Information Phase. received from the originator of the Callout. sent to and When information is sent (for example Will Respond) it is displayed and the icon displays. information sent 86 SCC3 colour console Press the Exit context key to exit from the Callout or the Respond context key to use an option on the Information screen or press a Left or Right navigational key to display a menu of further options. For some Callouts, group calls can be made by the radio to the Callout group during the Information Phase if use of the PTT is permitted during the Callout. The options available during the Information Phase are Information, Accept, Reject, User Response and Details. Send a pre-set information message. If only one Information message is programmed in the radio you are notified by an informative message confirming that the pre-programmed Information message has been sent to the originator of the Callout. Alternatively you can select from a list of preconfigured messages. Select View Response to check the complete message text before sending it. Sends an acceptance message to the originator of the Callout. Send a rejection message. You are notified by an informative message confirming that the rejection message has been sent to the originator of the Callout, and your radio exits from the Callout and Protected Callout Mode and the top level screen is displayed. Information Accept Reject User Response Send a free-form text message. Details See the following Callout details:

the Response required icon the Callout group time and date when the message was received the severity of the Callout Alert the Callout ID icons to show:

whether the Callout is to a group or an individual whether the Callout is incoming or outgoing whether or not the Callout is End-to-End Encrypted User Guide 87 Features Privacy Screen User profiles Your radio can be customised for various advanced features and can have various soft keys assigned to frequently used features. Your radio can be customised to display a picture when the screen is inactive for a specified period of time. This helps protect the privacy of any displayed information. This Privacy Screen feature is particularly useful if you are wearing your radio at shoulder level. The normal display reappears as soon as any activity occurs which turns on the back light. User profiles are pre-set combinations of alerts and settings on your radio. They allow you to switch settings easily to match your circumstances or environment. An icon profile selected, appears on the status line or the Shortcut Bar. Up to ten pre-defined user profiles may be configured for your radio. Example user profiles could be Normal, Lone Worker and Covert. showing the number of the To change the user profile:

1. From the Home screen, press the Groups context key 3 times ( User Profiles). 2. Use the navigation keys or the Navi-knob to scroll through the user profiles. 3. Press the Select context key to activate the selected user profile. Menu selection 1. Select Menu > User Profiles. 2. Navigate to a profile and press Select. Example user profiles Typical profiles could include:

Covert Mode operation Covert Mode turns off all visual alerts. It deactivates the backlight and adjusts the microphone sensitivity to allow Whisper mode. It also reduces the level of the loudspeaker if an earpiece is not being used. If your radio has a vibrator alert enabled then this is deactivated. See Whisper mode on page22. 88 SCC3 colour console This user profile allows you to prevent any individual calls or group calls from any talkgroup other than the selected talkgroup from being connected to your radio. Any calls made to a radio which has Group Focus selected are not recorded as Missed Calls. Group Focus Do Not Disturb This user profile allows you to focus on an important task. It assumes you do not want to be distracted by a call or alert on your radio. The profile sets your radio so that no incoming calls are allowed except calls from the current talkgroup (Group Focus above). Covert Mode operation is active. Audible alerts are disabled. If this profile is selected you cannot select Transmit Inhibit (see Transmit Inhibit on page69 User Guide 89 WAP NOTE: WAP pages are not accessible when Wi-Fi is enabled on the radio. Your radio may be configured to browse WAP pages. The browser options are customised using Radio Manager. Starting the WAP browser To open activate the WAP browser:

select the WAP option from the Applications menu OR press a programmed soft key [customisable] OR open a WAPURL contained within a received SDSmessage (or your radio may be customised to open the WAP URLautomatically). Open a URL in a message on page63 Exit at any time by pressing Back or the Cancel/Home key (if customised). Press the Left navigation key to display the previous screen/page and the Right navigation key to display the next screen/page. If customised, your radio supports the entering of text to specify a URL and entering of data into a form, and so on. See Text entry on page58. Saving check box or radio button selections Sometimes you may need to select an option which has a check box or radio button. When setting an option that uses a check box or radio button, toggle the left context key to select the appropriate option (radio button or check box). To save the selection either scroll to the bottom of the screen and highlight the Save button or press the Left context key (either a tick icon or labelled Save depending on customisation). Using WAP Exiting the browser Navigation Entering text Browser menu Home Page Select to activate the WAP browser and display the browser's homepage contents. If customised, you can change the Home Page (Settings > Settings > Homepage). 90 SCC3 colour console Select to enter a URL to start browsing the internet for the site matching your URL. You do not have to enter the URL specific input words (http://), they are already entered in the URL box. Select after browsing has been suspended or when you have exited from the browser. The browser displays the last page viewed. Select to view all the available bookmarks, some of which may be collated into bookmark folders. If customised, you can create, edit and delete bookmarks and bookmark folders, and organise the bookmarks into different folders. If there are no saved bookmarks, the browser displays the bookmarks page and a warning message. Select to view and edit your browser options. You can set the URL of the home page, enable/disable downloading of image files, change the scrolling method and the network connection timeout. There are also options to change security settings. Browse Resume Browsing Bookmarks Settings Help Navigation menu Select when the browser is active to view any customisable help stored on your radio. Press Homepage > Menu from the WAP browser screen to access the Navigate options:

Returns to the Home page on the WAP browser. Displays the 'Go to URL' screen (if customised). Home Open Page Mark Page Forward/Back Reload Reloads the current page. Only visible if the radio is customised to allow the creation and/or editing of bookmarks. Creates a bookmark for future reference so that the web page may be downloaded quickly. Use these options to move to the next or previous page in the History (if more than one page is stored in History). User Guide 91 Selecting Settings from the Browser menu provides access to the Advanced settings. Settings Advanced Settings Homepage Downloads Scroll Mode Key Press Timeout Connection Timeout Resend Data Prompt Security settings Secure Prompt Select this option to set the Home page. You can enter a new Home page URL and set it as the current and default home page. You can disable or enable the downloading of images, background sounds and objects when downloading information from a website. Disable this option to download the text content of an item quickly (a box containing a cross is displayed where the image would have been). If the downloading of images is enabled the boxes may be shown with a temporary display of a paper clip while the image is downloaded. Scroll to the Save option and press Pick to save the setting. You can change the Scroll Mode to be Block or Smooth so that when scrolling through text, the display will either jump from one block of text to the next, or scroll smoothly. The scroll speed may also be set to Fast, Medium or Slow. This option allows you to set the Key Press Timeout to one of Fast, Medium, Slow or Off. This options allows you to set the timer that specifies how long the browser will wait before cancelling idle network requests. This option allows you to set (on/off) whether the browser confirms whether to resend data to the radio. This could be used for forms which are not stored locally in the browser cache and must be re-

requested from the server. Select this option to set (on/off) whether the radio displays a warning message when it is changing from a secure connection to a non-secure connection and vice versa. 92 SCC3 colour console Current Certificate CA certificates Send Referrer Authentication Certificate Info If this option is selected, information about the digital certificate associated with the server which delivered the current document is displayed. A certificate is a digital ID that is issued by a trusted third party known as a certificate authority (CA). The radio uses CA certificates to authenticate web sites which send information to the radio. To view information on a CA, select it and press View. You can choose which CAs are used by the radio by selecting on or off. If this option is used to set whether the browser sends the HTTP Referrer header as part of the HTTP requests. This option is used to set (on/off) whether the browser caches HTTP authentication credentials. If this option is selected, information about the root digital certificates installed in the browser is displayed. Select this option to clear any or all of History, Cache or Cookies. Restart Browser Select this option to restart your browser. Clear About Select this option to view information about the browser. History menu The History page displays a list of up to nine of the most recently viewed Browser pages. The currently viewed page is highlighted. To revisit a page listed in the History, select it and then press the Left context key. If more than nine pages have been viewed, the list of all pages in the History is stored and may be accessed by selecting the More option. Press the Left context key, or the star (*) or hash (#) key, to open the More page(s). User Guide 93 Select this option to exit History and resume browsing at the page which was selected when the History Menu was chosen. Exit history Show URL Delete Select this option to display the currently selected URL. Select this option to delete the history. Using bookmarks A bookmark consists an internet address, the book mark title, and access point (and a user name and password if required by the web page). Bookmarks can be organised into folders to make it easier for you to find your favourite bookmarks or those of similar topics. Any saved bookmarks and bookmark folders are listed and can be opened by either pressing the keypad key corresponding to the number of the bookmark or folder, or by selecting it and pressing Go. New bookmarks and folders If you have no saved bookmarks or folders, the screen displays the message 'No saved bookmarks'. You can create up to 100 bookmarks and up to 10 folders (a single folder can contain 100 bookmarks). Press Bookmarks > Menu to create your bookmarks. New Bookmark Select this option to create a new bookmark. Press the Edit key and enter the title of the bookmark, URL and select the folder. Select Save when done. If you want to create a new folder for this bookmark, select the Bookmark option and press Select. Select the New Folder option and enter the details of the new folder. New Folder Select this option to create a new folder. Enter the name of the folder and press Save. The folder appears on the Bookmark menu and as an selectable option when creating a new bookmark. Bookmark and folder options You can perform the following functions on a selected bookmark or folder:

Details - shows the details of the selected bookmark or folder. Delete - allows you to delete the current bookmark or folder. 94 SCC3 colour console New Bookmark - creates a new bookmark. New Folder - creates a new bookmark folder within the list of bookmarks and folders. Move - Move the bookmark or folder within the list of folders and bookmarks. Select the bookmark or folder, then enter the number corresponding to the position in the numbered list where you want the bookmark or folder. Delete All - deletes all bookmarks and/or folders that are displayed in the same list as the selected folder. Hotkeys - allows you to create Hotkeys, but if any soft keys have been customised on the radio which are not related to the WAP browser the Hotkeys function will not function. Additionally, the following options are available for bookmarks:

Move to folder -allows you to move the bookmark into a folder, and name the folder. Set as Homepage - allows you to set the page as your Home page in the browser. This page is displayed when you select the 'Go to Homepage' card. Call handling Outgoing While the browser is active it is possible to make a group call to the attached talkgroup by pressing the PTT. If a talkgroup has not been attached, the user may select a talkgroup (see section on Group Calls). During an outgoing call the browser remains active but you will only be able to view the current page and pages which have already been viewed. When a call is in progress and the browser page is displayed, pressing and holding the Right navigation key allows you to view the call information box. If the call information box is displayed while the call continues, the browser page may again be displayed by pressing and holding the Left navigation key, or simply pressing either of the Left and Right navigation keys. It is not possible to make an individual voice call while the browser is active. In order to do this, close the browser by pressing and holding the Cancel/Home key, if customised. When the call is set up and is ongoing it is possible to return to the browser either by selecting a card which allows this

(Resume Browsing) and pressing the Down navigation key or by using a soft key (if customised). When the browser has been re-activated and the call is ongoing it is possible to switch between displaying the call information box and the browser using the Left and Right navigation keys as described above. During an outgoing individual call the browser remains active but the user is only able to view the current page and pages that have already been viewed. If the user makes a Alarm Call while the browser is active, the browser will automatically be closed and the radio will display the top level screen in Call Mode. Incoming When an individual call is received while the browser is active, the call information box is visible on top of the browser and you can answer the call. If an Alarm Call is received the browser closes and User Guide 95 the radio displays the Home screen, allowing you to respond to the call. You can still make a group call attached to a talkgroup but not a telephone type call whilst the browser is open. SDS messages If an incoming SDS message is received while the browser is active and the message is marked for immediate display then the browser will close and the SDS message is displayed. If the received SDS message is not marked for immediate display the browser will remain active and a warning triangle appears and the LED will flash. It is not possible to send an SDS message while the browser is active. Mode change (TMO, DMO AND GMO) If the radio is switched to Direct Mode Operation (DMO) while the browser is active, the browser remains active and you may view any stored pages. A warning message is displayed because the browser is off line. If a keypad lock soft key has been customised so that the keypad lock may be selected by pressing and holding the soft key, the browser will close and the radio will display the top level screen. Keypad lock Transmit Inhibit If the radio is operating in Transmit Inhibit mode, you can still view any pages in the browser that have been stored locally but it is not possible to browse pages online. If an attempt is made to browse pages online, the browser active icon flashes and a warning message appears. 96 SCC3 colour console Location Services Your radio may be customised and enabled for location services, such as GPS or other regional Global Navigation Satellite Systems (GNSS), that allows the radio to determine your location

(longitude, latitude and altitude) and provides both timed- and distance-based reporting. The generic location services function on the radio is called 'GPS' and it provides support for multiple regional GNSS including BeiDou2. The behaviour of the GNSS function is highly customisable, both by customisation of the radio and over the air from a control room application. Your radio may also be customised to send position data automatically alongside TETRA Alarm Calls or Status messages. The destination to which any reports are sent may be changed over the air. If your radio accepts a change of destination command it sounds a customisable tone and sends you an SDS message to inform you. If customised, you can enable/disable the GNSS function, see Reporting options on the next page. GLONASS is only supported on SRG3900 radios with serial numbers whose 4th digit is C or above

(that is, beginning with 2PNC.) For the best performance, your radio needs an uninterrupted view of the sky. Position To locate your position 1. Select Menu > GPS > Position > Locate. While the position is being calculated the icon flashes. Position information When the position has been determined the following information is displayed:

Latitude and Longitude values. Fix indicates how accurate the reading is:

2D indicates that less than four satellites were used to determine the position 3D indicates that at least four satellites were used. The number in brackets indicates how many satellites were used. Age shows how long ago the position was first displayed; to refresh the reading press Locate again. GPS/BeiDou2 shows the number of satellites used in the selected system. Note that the name of the selected GNSS is customisable. User Guide 97 Direction To read the direction in which your radio is travelling 1. Select Menu >GPS > Direction. The Direction screen gives information about the current direction and speed of travel. If the radio is stationary no information is displayed. However if the radio becomes stationary after a period of movement the direction information is displayed for five seconds to give you time to view it. Direction is reported in degrees from North. Speed is reported in either km/h or miles/h depending on the customisation. Reporting options To control reporting from your radio 1. Press Menu > GPS > GPS Report. 2. Select one of the following options:

Never Send reporting is disabled regardless of any instructions sent over the air. The warning icon is displayed on the top line of the screen as a reminder that reporting has been explicitly disabled. Always Send reporting is enabled regardless of any instructions sent over the air. No Override your radio will respond to instructions sent over the air. Reports are sent if requested and is switched off if requested. GNSS selection The radio may be customised to support a number of satellite systems such as GPS and BeiDou2. To change your GNSS selection:

When the radio has rebooted, check your satellite connections using the GPSLocate function

(Menu >GPS > Position > Locate) to view the type and number of satellites available in the selected system. 98 SCC3 colour console Security Sometimes when you are working, you may need to secure your radio from unauthorised use. The easiest way to secure your radio is to lock the keypad when your radio is not in use. Your radio may be customised with other security features such as PIN entry and a remote user network log on (to authenticate network users). End-to-End Encryption If your radio shows the Secure Comms icon when it is idle, the selected talkgroup is customised for End-to-End Encryption (E2EE). In other words, calls you make by pressing PTT are end-to-

end encrypted. It is not possible to accidentally make a non end-to-end encrypted call. Every talkgroup or individual subscriber that can be exempt from End-to-End Encryption must be explicitly customised into the radio. End-to-End Encryption is designed to provide maximum security for voice and SDS communications, whether operating in Direct Mode or Trunked Mode, irrespective of the security level provided by the network. Depending on customisation, the radio may change the End-to-End Encryption status when the selected network is changed. It may also provide a selection of talkgroups on other networks. If a talkgroup is selected that does not belong to the current network, your radio will change network accordingly. A radio that supports End-to-End Encryption may nevertheless be required to make calls that are not end-to-end encrypted. For example, calls to certain talkgroups and individual subscribers may be customised to be exempt from End-to-End Encryption. All telephone calls are also not end-to-end encrypted. When dialling, a separate End-to-End encrypted. During voice calls only (not SDS calls) your radio may allow you to toggle End-to-End Encryption on/off with a soft key. Secure Comms icon is displayed in the dial box if the call or SDS will be When you are in a voice call, the Secure Comms icon indicates whether End-to-End Encryption is operational. When the radio participates in a call that is not end-to-end encrypted, a periodic non intrusive audible alert is generated (if customised). When you receive an SDS (text) message or picture messages, if you see the Secure Comms icon in the message details that the message was end-to-end encrypted. If the message Security Check Fail is displayed while making or receiving calls, it indicates that the radio has not been customised properly. In such cases, please contact technical support in your organisation. Updating E2EE keys End-to-End Encryption keys are automatically updated when the radio registers on the network when it powers on, and whenever the Key Management Centre (KMC) on the network broadcasts User Guide 99 them. If E2EE traffic keys become outdatedwhich can happen in poor network coverage conditions you can manually update them as described here. Manual key update is not supported on radios which rely on a Smartcard for E2EE. During a manual update any active ongoing non-emergency call or ambience listening calls are cleared.(Any active emergency calls are maintained.) Manual update requires good network conditions. To manually update E2EE keys Your radio must be in TMO mode to update E2EE keys. Either press a suitably customised soft key or use the following procedure:

1. Press Menu then select Security > Crypto Settings. 2. Scroll to New Key and press Send. When the key update is in progress the Key agreement status icon appears. Zeroising Radios that support End-to-End Encryption are loaded with sensitive cryptographic keys. To avoid a potential security compromise, you may be able to delete (zeroise) these cryptographic keys if permitted by your operational procedures. Please refer to your Security Officer for details on how to zeroise your radio as well as related operational procedures. 100 SCC3 colour console Asset management Handsets, consoles, radios and accessories are assets that need to be effectively managed throughout their life cycle. In some organisations it is a requirement to track assets and this can be done by labelling them. Asset management refers to the periodic maintenance of your radios. Maintenance includes software upgrades and reprogramming of the radio to ensure that it continues to meet your requirements. Labelling The simplest form of asset management is to attach labels to your radios. Self adhesive labels (those with an adhesive backing) are recommended as they are easy to apply and commercially available, such as 3M Thermal Transfer Polyester label material 7815. Do not use solvent based adhesives. Always check the adhesive used with the self-adhesives label. Do not engrave any part of the radio. Engraving the radio's casing may affect the compliance ratings and may invalidate the product warranty. Do not use paint, correction fluid or other forms of liquid or aerosol to write or mark the radio or an accessory. Chemicals may affect the radio's casing and invalidate the compliance ratings and product warranty. Customising your radio Your radio has a large number of parameters that can be customised using the programming software tool, Radio Manager 2. These parameters are grouped into a series of templates that can be easily modified to suit the end user's preferences. A complete set of parameters for your radio is called a customisation. Your radio is customised by directly connecting it to a computer running Radio Manager 2 software using a Sepura Data/Programming Cable. To program a single radio A data/programming cable, with either an RS232 (D-type) connector or a USB connector, is available from Sepura for customising a single radio. A data/programming cable, with either an RS232 (D-type) connector or a USB connector, is available from Sepura for customising a single radio. To program your radio To program the radio you need to connect it to the computer with a programming cable. If the radio is disconnected from the vehicle a power lead is also required. If the radio cannot be easily accessed, customisation can be performed through the console or an Applications Interface Unit (AIU). User Guide 101 Connect the radio (or console or AIU) to a computer running Radio Manager and start your customisation. Contact Sepura for more information on programming your radio. Revert radio settings to customisation settings Users have the ability to add personal data to the radio, such as adding contacts to the phonebook, changing the talkgroups and sending and receiving SDS/Status messages. Such changes may be undesirable on fleet radios that have been specifically customised for fleet userswhere radios are not personal processions. Using the Revert All Changes option, the radio settings can be reset back to the last customisation settings. There is also a Revert Non-Personal Changes option that allows users to reset the radio settings back to the last customisation, but keep their personal changes to the phonebook, talkgroups and messages. To revert the radio settings:

1. Select Menu>Options>Settings, then select the Revert User Changes option. 2. Select the option you require. Press the Select key. 3. Confirm the request to revert the radio settings to the last customisation. Press the Select key. On completion of the revert process, the radio will reboot. 102 SCC3 colour console Contact Details Sepura Limited 9000 Cambridge Research Park Beach Drive, Waterbeach Cambridge, CB25 9TL United Kingdom www.sepura.com www.linkedin.com/sepuraplc www.facebook.com/sepuraplc

@sepuraplc www.instagram.com/sepuraplc www.youtube.com/sepuraplc

1 EN 11 DEDE 1 FR 1 ES 1 IT 1 pT 1 NL Product safety and compliance guide ........................................... 1-4 tetra hand-portables, gateways and intrinsically safe radios Produktsicherheit und compliance guide...................................... 5-9 tetra-handfunkgerte, gateway und eigensichere funkgerte Guide de scurit et de conformit des produits ........................ 9-13 radios portables, par passerelle et intrinsquement sres tetra Gua de seguridad y cumplimiento del producto ...................... 13-17 radios intrnsecamente seguras, pasarelas y radios porttiles tetra Guida per la sicurezza e la conformit ai prodotti .................... 17-21 radio tetra a sicurezza intrinseca, gateway e portatili palmari Guia de segurana e conformidade do produto ........................ 21-25 rdios de mo portteis, gateways e rdios intrinsicamente seguros tetra Handleiding voor productveiligheid en naleving ....................... 25-29 tetra hand portables, gateways en intrinsiek veilige radios stP8x .......................................................................................... 31-36 FCC conformance (sC2028)..............................................................37 a Hytera company PROOF Original Instructions: eNGLISH Document Number: SPr-DOC-00170 Issue 14 Copyright Sepura Limited. 20022020 all rights reserved. this document is intended for the use of Sepura Limiteds customers and/or other parties only for the purposes of the agreement or arrangement under which this document is submitted, and no part of it may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or means without the prior written permission of Sepura Limited. Disclaimer Sepuras policy is to continually improve its products. the statements made in this document were correct at publication, but are subject to change without notice. PROOF 1EN safety tHIs GUIDE CONtAINs IMPORtANt sAFEtY INFORMAtION. PLEAsE READ tHIs GUIDE BEFORE UsING tHE PRODUCt. Attention!

Sepura products are designed for use by mobile workforces, often working alone, and are intended for use in occupational and controlled conditions. It is the responsibility of the person operating the product to ensure that it is operated safely at all times, and that local laws and regulations governing the usage of radio Frequency (rF) wireless devices are observed. Obey all signs and instructions relating to the usage to rF wireless devices. It is recommended that you obtain training on how to safely operate this product. Your personal safety could be affected if you do not understand how to operate this product correctly. this product must not be operated in environments that exceed those listed in the product technical data sheet. Exposure to RF energy Sepura designs and manufactures products to meet strict guidelines and international standards relating to radio Frequency (rF) energy and the potential health risks associated with using rF wireless devices. If you have any concerns relating to long term health risks associated with using rF wireless devices, you should obtain advice from your employer. Sar (Specific absorption rate) is a measurement of how much electromagnetic radiation is absorbed by the human body whilst using a mobile wireless device. In europe, the recommendations made by the International Commission on Non-Ionising radiation Protection (ICNIrP) have been adopted. all Sepura hand-held products comply with these occupational limits. training should be provided by your employer on the correct usage of this product to ensure the occupational/controlled exposure limits are met. RF energy interference with electronic equipment Some personal medical devices, such as hearing aids and pacemakers, can be affected by rF energy. Obtain advice from your employer or the manufacturer of your medical device before using rF wireless devices. Some electronic devices are sensitive to rF energy. always obey signs restricting the use of rF wireless devices. Sepura radios can operate in traNSMIt INHIBIt mode, which restricts transmission, when working within health care facilities or other areas that are sensitive to rF energy. safely operating your radio always check the compliance ratings of your radio before operating it within potentially hazardous environments. Only intrinsically safe (ateX/IeCex) radios can be operated within hazardous environments such as gas fumes, flammable chemicals or blasting areas. Your radio should be used in its normal operating position when hand-held, worn on the body or secured within a cradle. When body-worn, your radio must be secured using a Sepura approved attachment. ensure the antenna is at least 2.5 cm (1 in.) away from the body when transmitting. always ensure that your radio is in good operational condition and operating correctly before entering any environment that has a potential risk to personal safety. NeVer fit or remove the antenna, battery, Smart/microSD card or an accessory (including accessory covers on your radio) when operating in a potentially hazardous environment. Protection against hearing loss NeVer place your radio next to your ear, like a mobile phone, when making a Ptt call. Your radio has a powerful loudspeaker that could potentially damage your hearing if held next to your ear. always check the volume level before making and receiving calls. 1 PROOF 1EN always use Sepura approved audio accessories with your radio. the use of non-approved audio accessories may potentially cause loss of hearing. safety when driving a vehicle always obey local laws and regulations governing the operation of rF wireless devices when driving a vehicle. Do not operate your radio if it creates a distraction from driving safely and observing road conditions. always POWer OFF or set your radio to traNSMIt INHIBIt mode at refuelling stations. always observe and obey warning signs relating to the use of rF wireless devices in the vicinity of refuelling stations. Operational conditions Do not exceed the operational conditions for your radio and battery. Prolonged exposure to extreme temperatures (over 55 C or 131 F), for example behind glass in direct sunlight, may cause damage to the product casing and the battery. Care should be taken to avoid mechanical impact. Important safety notes about the antenna NeVer touch the antenna when your radio is transmitting, this may cause a minor burn to the skin and may affect the operational range of the antenna. DO NOt handle, hold or swing your radio by its antenna, this may damage your radio and the antenna. NeVer use your radio if the antenna shows signs of damage. NeVer use your radio without an antenna attached, unless your radio is being used with an external antenna (such as an rSM antenna). transmitting without an antenna may damage your radio. Only use Sepura approved antennas designed for use with this product. Batteries Only use Sepura approved batteries with this product. Sepura tetra radios have been tested and certified using Sepura approved batteries. the use of non-approved batteries may damage the product, will result in the non-compliance with regulatory requirements, compromise the product safety ratings, reduce the length of operating time and will invalidate the product warranty. take care when handling and charging batteries. accidental short-circuiting of the battery electrical circuit (battery radios) by metal objects may cause bodily injury such as a burn. NeVer use a battery that shows signs of damage (not minor scratches) or has been dropped or received a sharp blow. Damage to the battery may not always be obvious. Accessories Only use Sepura approved accessories with this product. Sepura products have been tested to meet strict guidelines for personal safety and operational conditions. the use of non-approved accessories may damage the product, will result in the non-compliance with regulatory requirements, compromise the product safety ratings, and will invalidate the product warranty. always read the instructions supplied with the accessory for additional safety instructions. Connector covers on your radio must be fitted when an accessory is not in use. a cover need not be fitted to the Facilities connector when your radio is operating in Connector Protector mode (this feature may not be available on your radio). safe installation into vehicles electronic control mechanisms within a vehicle can be affected by the use of rF energy such as aBS and transmission controls. always refer to the vehicle manufacturers instructions and technical information relating to electronic modules and their wiring harnesses before installing an rF wireless device into a vehicle. Do not install the product within the air bag deployment area. In the event of the air bag inflating, your radio could be propelled at great force potentially causing serious injury. 2 PROOF servicing and Repairs Do not attempt to dismantle this product. Servicing and repairs to this product must be performed by trained service technicians at Sepura approved service centres. Unauthorised modifications could cause the product to become non-operational and will invalidate the product safety ratings and product warranty. It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the radio is maintained in good working condition. Regulatory Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Regulations approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment (rule part 15.21). this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Sepura tetra radios generate, use and radiate rF energy. radios that comply with the limits for a Class a digital device, pursuant of part 15 of the FCC rules are identified by an FCC certification ID label (located under the battery). Changes or modifications not expressly Us and Canada Markets FCC radiation exposure statement this radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled applications where users have been made aware of the potential risks for exposure and can exercise control over their exposure. this product is not authorised for general population, consumer or similar use. this transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. IC Rss warning the term IC: before the certification/registration number only signifies that the ISeDC technical specifications were met. IC radiation exposure statement this radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled applications where users have been made aware of the potential risks for exposure and can exercise control over their exposure. this product is not authorised for general population, consumer or similar use. this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Sepura declares that its tetra radio products are compliant with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the european radio equipment Directive 2014/53/eU on the harmonisation of the laws of the Member States relating to the making European Regulations available on the market of radio equipment and repealing Directive 1999/5/eC. these products are also compliant with directive 2011/65/eU having been designed and manufactured to the roHS requirements. simplified EU declaration of conformity Sepura declares that the radio equipment types SC21, SC20 and StP9000 series hand-portable radios and SrG3900 and SCG22 mobile radios are in compliance with Directive 2014/53/eU. the full text of the eU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:

www.sepura.com/support/compliance-documents. 1EN 3 PROOF 1EN Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment disposal information this symbol on the product or its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of as household or commercial waste. Some countries have set up collection and recycling systems for waste electrical and electronic products. By ensuring that this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potentially negative consequences for the environment and human health, and help conserve natural resources. Please dispose of your waste product according to your national and local regulations. Contact your service provider or Sepura for information about disposing of this product in your region of the world. Disposing of waste batteries Sepura tetra hand-portable radios are supplied with a rechargeable battery. this symbol on the battery and its packaging indicates that it must not be disposed of with household or commercial waste. Please dispose of your waste batteries according to your national and local regulations. Contact your service provider or Sepura for information about recycling batteries in your region of the world. Your radio operates in the following frequency bands at the maximum transmitted radio-frequency (RF) power:

this radio equipment can operate over a larger frequency range than the country regulations allow, and therefore restrictions for use of this product apply. Further information is available at www.efis.dk/, and https://www.efis.dk/views2/national_frequency_table.jsp, and with the relevant countrys regulatory authority through those links. the equipment must be operated within the required licence requirements provided by the countrys regulatory body. tEtRA nominal Output power (W) Bluetooth frequency band

(MHz) Bluetooth max. nominal power (dBm)

(EIRP) Wi-Fi max. nominal power

(dBm) (EIRP) Radio type tEtRA frequency band

(MHz) StP9x38 380-430 407-473 StP9x40 380-430 SC2020 403-470 SC2024 380-430 SC2120 403-470 SC2124 380-430 StP8Xx38 StP8Xx40 407-473 SrG3900 tW 380-430 SrG3900 UW 407-473 SCG2229 tU 380-470 1.8 @ 7.4VDC, 1.5a 2402-2480 4 1.8 @ 7.4VDC, 1.5a 2402-2480 4 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2402-2480 10 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2402-2480 10 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2402-2480 9 2402-2480 9 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2402-2480 4 1 @ 7.6VDC, 1a 2402-2480 4 1 @ 7.6VDC, 1a N/a N/a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a N/a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a N/a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a 2402-2480 7*

Wi-Fi frequency band

(MHz) GPs Frequency band

(MHz) N/a 1559-1610 N/a 1559-1610 N/a N/a 1559-1610 2402-2480 17 1559-1610 2402-2480 17 1559-1610 2402-2480 17 1559-1610 2402-2480 17 N/a 1559-1610 N/a N/a 1559-1610 N/a N/a 1559-1610 N/a 1559-1610 N/a N/a 1559-1610 2402-2480 15*

*as the SCG2229 is provided with an antenna connector, Bluetooth and Wi-Fi nominal powers are conducted values, not eIrP. 4 PROOF 1DE sicherheit DIEsEs HANDBUCH ENtHLt WICHtIGE sICHERHEItsINFORMAtIONEN BIttE LEsEN sIE DIEsEs HANDBUCH VOR INBEtRIEBNAHME DEs GERts. Achtung!

Sepura-Produkte wurden fr den Gebrauch durch arbeitskrfte im auendienst entwickelt, die hufig allein arbeiten und sind fr den beruflichen und kontrollierten Gebrauch vorgesehen. es liegt in der alleinigen Verantwortung des Benutzers, sicherzustellen, dass das Gert stets sicher verwendet wird und dass lokale Gesetze und Vorschriften zum Gebrauch von Gerten zur drahtlosen Kommunikation ber Funkfrequenzen eingehalten werden. Befolgen Sie alle Zeichen und Hinweise zum Gebrauch von drahtlosen Funkgerten. es wird empfohlen, dass Sie zunchst an einer Schulung zum sicheren Gebrauch dieses Gerts teilnehmen. Ihre persnliche Sicherheit kann beeintrchtigt werden, wenn Sie nicht wissen, wie Sie dieses Gert ordnungsgem benutzen. Dieses Gert darf nicht in Umgebungen verwendet werden, deren Bedingungen nicht der Beschreibung im technischen Datenblatt entsprechen. Belastung durch HF-Energie (hochfrequente Energie) Sepura entwirft und produziert Gerte, die strengen richtlinien und internationalen Standards zur HF-

energie und den mglichen Gesundheitsrisiken, die der Gebrauch drahtloser Funkgerte verursachen kann, entsprechen. Sollten Sie Bedenken wegen der langfristigen Gesundheitsrisiken durch drahtlose Funkgerte haben, erkundigen Sie sich bitte bei Ihrem arbeitgeber. Der Sar-Wert (spezifische absorptionsrate) gibt an, wie viel elektromagnetische Strahlung vom menschlichen Krper beim Gebrauch eines drahtlosen mobilen Gerts absorbiert wird. In europa wurden die empfehlungen der International Commission on Non-Ionising radiation Protection (ICNIrP) bernommen. alle Handheld-Gerte von Sepura entsprechen diesen arbeitsschutz-Grenzwerten. Ihr arbeitgeber sollte Schulungen anbieten, in denen der korrekte Gebrauch dieses Gerts erklrt wird, um sicher zu stellen, dass die Grenzwerte fr den beruflichen/kontrollierten Gebrauch eingehalten werden. Interferenzen zwischen HF-Energie und elektronischen Gerten. einige medizintechnische Gerte fr den persnlichen Gebrauch wie z. B. Hrgerte oder Herzschrittmacher knnen durch HF-energie gestrt werden. Holen Sie hierzu vor Gebrauch eines drahtlosen Funkgerts Informationen bei Ihrem arbeitgeber oder dem Hersteller des medizintechnischen Gerts ein. Manche elektronische Gerte reagieren empfindlich auf HF-energie. Beachten Sie stets Hinweise, die den Gebrauch drahtloser Funkgerte einschrnken. Sepura-Funkgerte knnen im traNSMIt INHIBIt-Modus benutzt werden, der die Sendeleistung in Gesundheitseinrichtungen und an anderen Orten, an denen durch HF-energie Gefahren entstehen knnen. sicherer Gebrauch des Funkgerts Prfen Sie immer, ob Ihr Gert der jeweils gltigen Norm entspricht, bevor Sie es in potenziell gefhrlichen Umgebungen einsetzen. Nur mit dem Hinweis intrinsically safe (ateX/IeCex) versehene Funkgerte drfen in gefhrlichen Umgebungen mit Gas, entflammbaren Chemikalien oder explosionsgefahr eingesetzt werden. Beim Gebrauch mit der Hand, am Krper oder in einer Halterung sollten Sie Ihr Funkgert in der normalen arbeitsstellung benutzen. Wird das Funkgert am Krper getragen, muss es mit einem von Sepura genehmigten Zubehrteil befestigt sein. Stellen Sie sicher, dass die entfernung zwischen Krper und antenne beim Senden mindestens 2,5 cm betrgt. Stellen Sie stets sicher, dass Ihr Funkgert sich in einem guten Zustand befindet und ordnungsgem funktioniert, bevor Sie ein Gebiet betreten, in dem mgliche risiken fr die persnliche Sicherheit bestehen. 5 PROOF 1DE Montieren oder entfernen Sie NIeMaLS die antenne, Batterie, Smart/microSD-Karte oder Zubehrteile

(einschlielich zustzlicher abdeckungen Ihres Funkgerts) in einer potenziell gefhrlichen Umgebung. schutz vor Gehrschden Halten Sie NIeMaLS Ihr Funkgert wie ein Mobiltelefon direkt ans Ohr, wenn Sie mit der Ptt-taste eine rufdurchsage machen. Ihr Funkgert verfgt ber einen starken Lautsprecher, der Ihr Gehr schdigen kann, wenn er sich unmittelbar neben dem Ohr befindet. Prfen Sie stets die eingestellte Lautstrke, bevor Sie einen Funkspruch absetzen oder annehmen. Verwenden Sie mit Ihrem Funkgert immer von Sepura zugelassenes audio-Zubehr. Die Verwendung nicht zugelassenen audio-Zubehrs kann das Gehr schdigen. sicherheit am steuer von Fahrzeugen Befolgen Sie stets lokale Gesetze und Vorschriften zum Gebrauch drahtloser Funkgerte, wenn Sie ein Fahrzeug steuern. Benutzen Sie Ihr Funkgert nicht, wenn es Sie daran hindert, sicher zu fahren und die Verkehrsbedingungen zu beachten. Schalten Sie Ihr Funkgert immer aus oder in den traNSMIt INHIBIt-Modus, bevor Sie eine tankstelle ansteuern. Beachten und befolgen Sie alle Warnhinweise zum Gebrauch drahtloser Funkgerte in der Nhe von tankstellen. Einsatzbedingungen Halten Sie sich an die fr Ihr Funkgert und seine Batterie vorgesehenen Betriebsbedingungen. Wenn das Funkgert ber einen lngeren Zeitraum, etwa hinter Glas und unter direkter Sonneneinstrahlung, extremen temperaturen ausgesetzt wird (mehr als 55 C, 131 F), knnen Gehuse oder Batterie beschdigt werden. Versuchen Sie, Ste zu vermeiden. Wichtige sicherheitshinweise zur Antenne Berhren Sie NIeMaLS die antenne, wenn Ihr Funkgert gerade sendet: es knnen kleinere Hautverbrennungen entstehen und die reichweite der antenne kann beeintrchtigt werden. aUF KeINeN FaLL sollten Sie Ihr Funkgert an der antenne halten oder umher schwingen, da dies das Funkgert und die antenne beschdigen kann. Benutzen Sie Ihr Funkgert NIeMaLS, wenn es anzeichen einer Beschdigung aufweist. Benutzen Sie Ihr Funkgert NIeMaLS ohne antenne, es sei denn, Ihr Funkgert wird mit einer externen antenne (etwa einer rSM-antenne) verwendet. ein Betrieb ohne antenne kann Ihr Funkgert beschdigen. Benutzen Sie nur antennen, die von Sepura fr dieses Gert zugelassen wurden. Batterien Benutzen Sie mit diesem Gert ausschlielich von Sepura zugelassene Batterien. Sepura tetra-

Funkgerte wurden mit Batterien getestet und zertifizert, die Sepura zuvor zugelassen hat. Der Gebrauch nicht zugelassener Batterien kann das Gert beschdigen und wird zu einem nicht regel-

und gesetzeskonformen Gebrauch fhren, die Betriebssicherheit des Gerts beeintrchtigen und die Betriebszeit verringern. Die Produktgarantie erlischt. Seien Sie vorsichtig beim Umgang mit Batterien und beim Laden. Versehentliche Kurzschlsse des Batterie-Stromkreises knnen (bei Batterie-Funkgerten) krperliche Verletzungen verursachen. Benutzen Sie NIeMaLS eine Batterie, die anzeichen einer Beschdigung aufweist (kleine Kratzer sind unbedenklich), fallen gelassen wurde oder einen harten Schlag erhalten hat. Batterieschden sind nicht immer auf anhieb erkennbar. Zubehr Benutzen Sie mit diesem Gert ausschlielich von Sepura zugelassene Zubehrteile. all Sepura-

Produkte wurden auf die einhaltung strenger richtlinien zur persnlichen Sicherheit und der 6 PROOF 1DE Betriebsbedingungen geprft. Der Gebrauch nicht zugelassener Zubehrteile kann das Gert beschdigen und wird zu einem nicht regel- und gesetzeskonformen Gebrauch fhren, die Betriebssicherheit des Gerts beeintrchtigen und die Betriebszeit verringert. Die Produktgarantie erlischt. Lesen Sie immer die mit dem Zubehr gelieferten anweisungen. Dort finden Sie zustzliche Sicherheitshinweise. Wenn ein Zubehrteil nicht benutzt wird, decken Sie bitte den anschluss ab. Im Connector-Protector-Modus (nicht bei allen Gerten verfgbar) ist es nicht ntig, den Facilities-

anschluss abzudecken. sichere Installation in Fahrzeugen HF-energie kann die elektronische Steuerungstechnik von Fahrzeugen (z. B. aBS, traktionskontrolle) beeintrchtigen. Beachten Sie daher stets die Hinweise im Handbuch des Fahrzeugherstellers und beachten Sie technische Informationen zu elektronischen Modulen und ihren Kabelbumen, bevor Sie ein drahtloses HF-Gert in einem Fahrzeug installieren. Installieren Sie das Gert nicht im Wirkungsbereich der airbags. andernfalls knnte Ihr Funkgert, falls sich ein airbag ffnet, mit groer Wucht weg geschleudert werden und so schwere Verletzungen verursachen. service und Reparaturen Versuchen Sie nicht, das Gert zu ffnen oder auseinander zu bauen. Service und reparaturen an diesem Gert mssen von ausgebildeten Service- technikern in einer von Sepura zugelassenen Werkstatt durchgefhrt werden. Unzulssige Vernderungen knnten dazu fhren, dass das Gert nicht mehr funktioniert. Die Sicherheit ist nicht mehr gewhrleistet und die Garantie erlischt. Der Benutzer ist dafr verantwortlich, dass das Funkgert sich stets in einem einwandfreien Zustand befindet. Sepura tetra-Funkgerte erzeugen, nutzen und emittieren HFenergie. Funkgerte, welche die Grenzwerte fr digitale Gerte der Klasse a einhalten, werden gem abschnitt 15 der FCC-Vorschriften mit einem FCC-Zertifizierungs-Symbol unter der Batterie gekennzeichnet. Behrdliche Anforderungen Vorschriften der Federal Communication Commission (FCC) nderungen oder Umbauten, die nicht ausdrcklich von der fr Konformitt zustndigen Stelle genehmigt wurden, knnen dazu fhren, dass die Berechtigung des Benutzer zum Betrieb des Gerts erlischt (abschnitt 15.21 der Vorschrift). Dieses Gert entspricht teil 15 der FCC-Vorschriften. Der Betrieb erfolgt unter den folgenden zwei Bedingungen: (1) Dieses Gert darf keine Funkstrungen verursachen und (2) dieses Gert muss strsignalfest sein, auch in Bezug auf Interferenzen, die zu einem unerwnschtes Betriebsverhalten fhren knnten. UsA und Kanada Einhaltung der FCC-strahlungsvorschriften Dieses Funkgert ist fr den beruflichen/kontrollierten Gebrauch vorgesehen, bei dem die Benutzer ber mgliche Strahlungsrisiken aufgeklrt wurden und ihre Belastung selbst kontrollieren knnen. Dieses Gert ist nicht fr den Gebrauch durch die allgemeine Bevlkerung, durch Verbraucher oder hnliche anwendungsbereiche zugelassen. Dieser Sender darf nicht in unmittelbarer Nhe anderer antennen oder Sender oder gemeinsam mit diesen betrieben werden. Warnung gem IC Rss Die abkrzung IC: vor der Zertifizierungs-/registrierungsnummer bedeutet nur, dass die technischen Vorschriften eingehalten werden. 7 PROOF 1DE Einhaltung der IC-strahlungsvorschriften Dieses Funkgert ist fr den beruflichen/kontrollierten Gebrauch vorgesehen, bei dem die Benutzer ber mgliche Strahlungsrisiken aufgeklrt wurden und ihre Belastung selbst kontrollieren knnen. Dieses Gert ist nicht fr den Gebrauch durch die allgemeine Bevlkerung, durch Verbraucher oder hnliche anwendungsbereiche zugelassen. Dieser Sender darf nicht in unmittelbarer Nhe anderer antennen oder Sender oder gemeinsam mit diesen betrieben werden. EU-Vorschriften Sepura erklrt, dass seine Funkgertprodukte tetra den grundlegenden anforderungen und anderen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der europischen richtlinie 2014/53/eU ber die Harmonisierung der rechtsvorschriften der Mitgliedstaaten ber die Bereitstellung von Funkanlagen auf dem Markt und zur aufhebung der richtlinie 1999/5/eG entsprechen. Diese Produkte entsprechen darber hinaus der richtlinie 2011/65/eU und wurden gem den roHS-anforderungen entwickelt und hergestellt. Vereinfachte EU-Konformittserklrung Sepura, dass die Funkgerttypen SC21, SC20, die Handfunkgerte der Serie StP9000 sowie das mobile Funkgerte SrG3900, SCG22 die richtlinie 2014/53/eU erfllen. Der vollstndige text der eU-

Konformittserklrung kann unter der folgenden Internetadresse abgerufen werden:

www.sepura.com/support/compliance-documents. Hinweise zu Abfllen und zur Entsorgung elektronischer Gerte Wenn dieses Zeichen auf dem Produkt oder seiner Verpackung angebracht ist, darf es nicht als Haushaltsoder Gewerbeabfall entsorgt werden. In einigen Lndern gibt es Sammel- und Wiederverwertungssysteme fr elektroschrott. Sorgen Sie dafr, dass dieses Produkt korrekt entsorgt wird. Damit verhindern Sie mgliche Schden an der Umwelt und der menschlichen Gesundheit und tragen zum erhalt der natrlichen Lebensgrundlagen bei. Bitte entsorgen Sie Ihr Produkt gem nationalen und lokalen Vorschriften. Wenn Sie mehr Informationen zur entsorgung dieses Produkts in Ihrer region wnschen, kontaktieren Sie Sepura oder Ihren Dienstleister. Sepura-tetra handfunkgerte werden mit einem akku (wiederaufladbare Batterie) geliefert. Dieses Symbol auf dem akku oder seiner Verpackung bedeutet, dass er nicht mit dem Haus-oder Entsorgung von Akkus Gewerbemll entsorgt werden darf. Bitte entsorgen Sie nicht mehr funktionierende akkus gem nationalen und lokalen Vorschriften. Wenn Sie Informationen zur Wiederverwertung von akkus in Ihrer region wnschen, kontaktieren Sie Ihren Dienstleister oder Sepura. Ihr Funkgert kann in den folgenden Frequenzbndern mit der maximal bertragbaren Hochfrequenz-(HF-)Leistung betrieben werden:

Diese Funkausrstung kann ber einen greren Frequenzbereich betrieben werden als es laut den Lndervorgaben zulssig ist. Daher unterliegt die Verwendung dieses Produkts einschrnkungen. Weitere Informationen dazu finden Sie ber http://www.efis.dk/ und https://www.efis.dk/views2/

national_frequency_table.jsp, wenn Sie den Links zu der regulierungsbehrde des jeweiligen Landes folgen. Die ausrstung muss gem den vorgeschriebenen Lizenzanforderungen betrieben werden, die die regulierungsbehrde des jeweiligen Landes vorgibt. Funkgert

-typ tEtRA frequenzband

(MHz) tEtRA Max. nennleistung W) StP9x38 StP9x40 380-430 407-473 1.8 @ 7.4VDC, 1.5a 1.8 @ 7.4VDC, 1.5a Bluetooth frequenz band

(MHz) 2402-2480 2402-2480 Bluetooth bertragene stromversorgung

(dBm) (EIRP) 4 4 Wi-Fi frequenz band

(MHz) GPs frequenz band

(MHz) 1559-1610 N/a 1559-1610 N/a Wi-Fi bertragene stromversorgung

(dBm) (EIRP) N/a N/a 8 PROOF 11 FR DE Funkgert

-typ tEtRA frequenzband

(MHz) tEtRA Max. nennleistung W) 380-430 SC2020 403-470 SC2024 380-430 SC2120 403-470 SC2124 380-430 StP8Xx38 StP8Xx40 407-473 SrG3900 tW 380-430 SrG3900 UW 407-473 SCG2229 tU 380-470 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 1 @ 7.6VDC, 1a 1 @ 7.6VDC, 1a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a Bluetooth frequenz band

(MHz) 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 N/a N/a 2402-2480 Bluetooth bertragene stromversorgung

(dBm) (EIRP) 10 10 9 9 4 4 N/a N/a 7*

Wi-Fi frequenz band

(MHz) 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 GPs frequenz band

(MHz) 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 N/a 1559-1610 N/a 1559-1610 N/a 1559-1610 N/a 1559-1610 2402-2480 Wi-Fi bertragene stromversorgung

(dBm) (EIRP) 17 17 17 17 N/a N/a N/a N/a 15*

*Da das SCG2229 mit einem antennenanschluss ausgestattet ist, handelt es sich bei den Nennleistungen fr Bluetooth und Wi-Fi um elektrisch bertragene Werte, nicht die Strahlungsleistung (eIrP). scurit LE PRsENt GUIDE CONtIENt DEs INFORMAtIONs IMPORtANtEs EN MAtIRE DE sCURIt. PRENEZ-EN CONNAIssANCE AVANt tOUtE UtILIsAtION DU PRODUIt. Attention !

Les produits Sepura sont conus pour tre utiliss par le personnel mobile, travaillant souvent seul, dans des conditions professionnelles et contrles. Il incombe lutilisateur de veiller en permanence utiliser le produit en toute scurit et dans le respect des lois et rglementations locales en vigueur concernant lutilisation des dispositifs radiolectriques (rF) sans fil. respectez les panneaux et les instructions relatives lutilisation des dispositifs radiolectriques sans fil. Nous vous recommandons de suivre une formation afin dapprendre utiliser ce produit en toute scurit. La mauvaise utilisation de ce produit pourrait compromettre votre scurit. Ce produit ne doit pas tre utilis hors des environnements spcifis dans sa fiche technique. Exposition aux ondes radiolectriques Sepura conoit et fabrique des produits conformment des directives strictes et des normes internationales en matire dondes radiolectriques et de risques pour la sant associs lutilisation de dispositifs radiolectriques sans fil. Si vous avez des inquitudes concernant les risques long terme associs avec lutilisation de dispositifs radiolectriques sans fil, faites-en part votre employeur. Lindice DaS (dbit dabsorption spcifique) mesure la quantit de rayonnements lectromagntiques absorbe par le corps humain lors de lutilisation dun dispositif mobile sans fil. en europe, les recommandations formules par la Commission internationale pour la protection contre les rayonnements non ionisants (ICNIrP) ont t adoptes. tous les produits mobiles Sepura sont conformes ces limites professionnelles. Votre employeur doit vous proposer une formation sur lutilisation correcte de ce produit pour sassurer du respect des limites dexposition contrle/professionnelle. Interfrence des ondes radiolectriques avec lquipement lectronique Certains dispositifs mdicaux personnels (entre autres, les appareils auditifs et les stimulateurs cardiaques) peuvent tre affects par les ondes radiolectriques. Demandez conseil votre employeur ou au fabricant de votre dispositif mdical avant toute utilisation dun dispositif radiolectrique sans fil. 9 PROOF 1FR Certains dispositifs lectroniques sont sensibles aux ondes radiolectriques. respectez toujours les panneaux interdisant lutilisation de dispositifs radiolectriques sans fil. Les radios Sepura disposent dun mode traNSMIt INHIBIt (BLOCaGe De La traNSMISSION). Ce mode limite la transmission lors dune utilisation proximit dtablissements de soins de sant ou dautres zones sensibles aux ondes radiolectriques. Utilisation de votre radio en toute scurit Vrifiez toujours les cotes de conformit de votre radio avant de lutiliser dans des environnements potentiellement dangereux. Seules les radios intrinsquement sres (ateX/IeCex) peuvent tre utilises dans des environnements dangereux comme les zones dmanations de gaz, les zones contenant des produits chimiques inflammables ou les zones de dynamitage. Utilisez le mode de fonctionnement normal de votre radio lorsque vous la tenez en main, lorsque vous la portez sur le corps ou lorsquelle est fixe dans une nacelle. Lorsque vous la portez sur le corps, votre radio doit tre accroche avec une fixation approuve par Sepura. Vrifiez que lantenne se trouve au moins 2,5 cm (1 po) de votre corps lors de toute transmission. assurez-vous toujours que votre radio est en bon tat et quelle fonctionne parfaitement avant de pntrer dans un environnement prsentant des risques potentiels pour votre scurit. Ninstallez ou ne retirez JaMaIS lantenne, la batterie, la carte Smart/microSD ou un autre accessoire

(notamment les protections supplmentaires sur votre radio) lorsque vous utilisez la radio dans un environnement dangereux. Protection contre la perte auditive Ne placez JaMaIS votre radio votre oreille comme un tlphone portable lors dun appel Ptt. Votre radio dispose dun puissant haut-parleur, lequel peut savrer dangereux pour votre audition sil est tenu trop prs des oreilles. Vrifiez toujours le niveau du volume avant de passer ou de recevoir un appel. Utilisez toujours des accessoires auditifs approuvs par Sepura avec votre radio. Lutilisation daccessoires auditifs non approuvs peut se traduire par des pertes auditives. scurit lors de la conduite dun vhicule respectez toujours les lois et les rglementations locales rgissant lutilisation de dispositifs radiolectriques sans fil lorsque vous conduisez un vhicule. Nutilisez pas votre radio si cela vous distrait, vous empche de conduire prudemment et dtre attentif aux conditions de la route. teIGNeZ toujours votre radio, ou passez en mode traNSMIt INHIBIt (BLOCaGe De La traNSMISSION) dans les stations-service. Soyez toujours attentif aux panneaux davertissement relatifs lutilisation de dispositifs radiolectriques sans fil proximit des stations-service et respectez-les. Conditions de fonctionnement respectez scrupuleusement les conditions de fonctionnement indiques pour votre radio et votre batterie. Une exposition prolonge des tempratures extrmes (plus de 55C ou 131F), par exemple, directement au soleil derrire une vitre, peut endommager le botier du produit et la batterie. Prenez soin dviter les impacts mcaniques. Remarques de scurit importante sur lantenne Ne touchez JaMaIS lantenne lorsque la radio transmet, vous risquez de vous brler lgrement et de perturber la porte de fonctionnement de lantenne. Ne manipulez, tenez ou balancez PaS votre radio par son antenne, vous risquez dendommager la radio et lantenne. Nutilisez JaMaIS votre radio si lantenne semble endommage. 10 PROOF Nutilisez JaMaIS votre radio sans antenne, sauf si vous lutilisez avec une antenne externe (comme une antenne rSM). toute transmission sans antenne peut endommager votre radio. Utilisez uniquement des antennes approuves par Sepura et conues pour tre utilises avec ce produit. Batteries Utilisez uniquement des batteries approuves par Sepura avec ce produit. Les radios tetra de Sepura ont t testes et certifies avec des batteries approuves par Sepura. Lutilisation de batteries non approuves risque dendommager le produit, entranera sa non-conformit aux exigences rglementaires, compromettra ses cotes de scurit, ralentira son fonctionnement et invalidera sa garantie. Faites preuve de prudence lorsque vous manipulez et chargez des batteries. Un court-circuit accidentel du circuit lectrique de la batterie (radios batterie) par un objet mtallique peut entraner des blessures physiques (comme des brlures). Nutilisez JaMaIS une batterie qui prsente des traces de dtrioration (autres que de petites raflures), qui est tombe ou qui a reu un coup violent. Lendommagement de la batterie nest pas toujours vident. Accessoires Utilisez uniquement des accessoires approuvs par Sepura avec ce produit. Les produits Sepura ont t tests conformment des directives strictes en matire de scurit et de conditions de fonctionnement. Lutilisation daccessoires non approuvs risque dendommager le produit, entranera sa non-conformit aux exigences rglementaires, compromettra ses cotes de scurit et invalidera sa garantie. Lisez toujours les instructions fournies avec les accessoires pour plus dinstructions en matire de scurit. Des protections doivent tre installes sur le connecteur de votre radio lorsque vous nutilisez pas daccessoire. Une protection doit tre installe sur le connecteur dquipement lorsque votre radio fonctionne en mode Connector Protector (Protection du connecteur) (cette fonction nest peut-tre pas disponible sur votre radio). Installation sre dans des vhicules Les mcanismes de contrle lectroniques dun vhicule (notamment les commandes de laBS et de la transmission) peuvent tre affects par les ondes radiolectriques. reportez-vous toujours aux informations techniques et aux instructions du fabricant automobile concernant les modules lectroniques et leurs faisceaux de cbles avant dinstaller un dispositif radiolectrique sans fil dans un vhicule. Ninstallez pas le produit dans la zone de dploiement de lairbag. en cas de dploiement de lairbag, votre radio pourrait tre violemment projete et provoquer de graves blessures. Entretiens et rparations Nessayez pas de dmonter ce produit. Les entretiens et les rparations de ce produit doivent tre raliss par des techniciens de maintenance qualifis dans des centres approuvs par Sepura. toute modification non autorise peut compromettre le fonctionnement du produit. en outre, elle invalidera ses cotes de scurit et sa garantie. Il incombe lutilisateur de sassurer que la radio est maintenue en bon tat de fonctionnement. 1FR 11 PROOF 1FR Rglementation Rglementation de la FCC (Federal Communication Commission) Les radios tetra de Sepura gnrent, utilisent et mettent des ondes radiolectriques. Une tiquette portant un identifiant de certification FCC (situe sous la batterie) permet didentifier les radios conformes aux limites tablies pour les dispositifs numriques de classe a, conformment la section 15 de la rglementation de la FCC. Les changements ou les modifications qui ne sont pas expressment approuvs par la partie responsable de la conformit sont susceptibles de rvoquer les droits dutilisation de cet quipement (section 15.21). Ce dispositif est conforme la partie 15 des rgles de la FCC. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes :

(1) Ce dispositif ne peut pas causer dinterfrences nuisibles, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences qui peuvent causer un fonctionnement indsirable. Marchs amricains et canadiens Dclaration de conformit FCC sur lexposition aux rayonnements Cette radio est destine des applications professionnelles ou contrles. elle doit tre utilise par un personnel inform des risques potentiels entrans par lexposition aux rayonnements et capable de grer cette exposition. Ce produit nest pas autoris pour la population et les consommateurs ordinaires, ni pour une utilisation gnrale. Ce transmetteur ne doit pas se trouver proximit dune autre antenne ou dun autre transmetteur, ni tre utilis avec ceux-ci. Avertissement Rss IC La mention IC prcdant le numro de certification/denregistrement indique simplement que les spcifications techniques ISeDC sont respectes. Dclaration de conformit IC sur lexposition aux rayonnements Cette radio est destine des applications professionnelles ou contrles. elle doit tre utilise par un personnel inform des risques potentiels entrans par lexposition aux rayonnements et capable de grer cette exposition. Ce produit nest pas autoris pour la population et les consommateurs ordinaires, ni pour une utilisation gnrale. Ce transmetteur ne doit pas se trouver proximit dune autre antenne ou dun autre transmetteur, ni tre utilis avec ceux-ci. Sepura dclare que ses produits radiolectriques tetra sont conformes aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions applicables de la directive europenne 2014/53/Ue relative lharmonisation des lgislations des tats membres concernant la mise Rglementation europenne disposition sur le march dquipements radiolectriques et abrogeant la directive 1999/5/Ce. Ces produits sont galement conformes la directive 2011/65/Ue, car ils ont t conus et fabriqus conformment aux exigences de la directive roHS. Dclaration de conformit UE simplifie Sepura dclare que les quipements radiolectriques de type radios portables des sries SC21, SC20 et StP9000 et radios mobiles de la srie SrG3900 et SCG22 sont conformes la directive 2014/53/Ue. Le texte intgral de la dclaration de conformit Ue est disponible ladresse suivante:

www.sepura.com/support/compliance-documents. Informations relatives llimination des quipements lectriques et lectroniques usags Ce symbole, appos sur le produit ou sur son emballage, indique que le produit ne doit pas tre jet avec les dchets mnagers ou commerciaux. Certains pays disposent de systmes de collecte et de recyclage pour les produits lectriques et lectroniques usags. en vous assurant que ce produit est limin correctement, vous contribuez viter des consquences potentiellement 12 PROOF 111 ES FR nfastes pour lenvironnement et la sant, tout en aidant la conservation des ressources naturelles. Conformez-vous aux rglementations nationales et locales en vigueur pour liminer votre produit usag. Contactez Sepura ou votre prestataire de services pour en savoir plus sur les dispositions dlimination de ce produit dans votre rgion du monde. Les radios portables Sepura sont fournies avec une batterie rechargeable. Ce symbole, appos sur la batterie ou sur son emballage, indique que la batterie ne doit pas tre jete avec les dchets mnagers ou commerciaux. Conformez-vous aux rglementations nationales et locales limination des batteries usages en vigueur pour liminer vos batteries usages. Contactez votre prestataire de services ou Sepura pour en savoir plus sur llimination des batteries dans votre rgion du monde. Votre radio fonctionne la puissance radiolectrique transmise maximale dans les bandes de frquences suivantes :

Les quipements radiolectriques peuvent fonctionner sur une plage de frquences plus large que celle autorise par les rglementations nationales. Par consquent, les restrictions dutilisation du produit sappliquent. Pour en savoir plus, consultez les pages http://www.efis.dk/ et https://www.efis. dk/views2/national_frequency_table.jsp, ou contactez lautorit rglementaire comptente du pays en suivant ces liens. Les quipements doivent tre utiliss conformment aux exigences de permis imposes par lorganisme de rglementation du pays. type de radio tEtRA bande de frquences tEtRA Max. puissance de sortie nominale max (W) 380-430 StP9x38 407-473 StP9x40 380-430 SC2020 403-470 SC2024 380-430 SC2120 403-470 SC2124 380-430 StP8Xx38 StP8Xx40 407-473 SrG3900 tW 380-430 SrG3900 UW 407-473 SCG2229 tU 380-470 1.8 @ 7.4VDC, 1.5a 1.8 @ 7.4VDC, 1.5a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 1 @ 7.6VDC, 1a 1 @ 7.6VDC, 1a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a Bande de frquence Bluetooth

(MHz) 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 N/a N/a 2402-2480 Puissance transmise par Bluetooth

(dBm) (EIRP) 4 4 10 10 9 9 4 4 N/a N/a 7*

Bande de Frquence GPs (MHz) Bande de frquence Wi-Fi (MHz) Puissance transmise par Wi-Fi (dBm)

(EIRP) 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 N/a N/a 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 N/a N/a N/a N/a 2402-2480 N/a N/a 17 17 17 17 N/a N/a N/a N/a 15*

*tant donn que le SCG2229 est fourni avec un connecteur dantenne, les puissances nominales du Bluetooth et du wi-fi sont des valeurs de conduction, et non des valeurs eIrP. seguridad EstA GUA CONtIENE INFORMACIN DE sEGURIDAD IMPORtANtE. LEA EstA GUA ANtEs DE UtILIZAR EL PRODUCtO. Atencin Los productos Sepura estn diseados para su uso por parte de profesionales que se desplazan de un lugar a otro y que suelen trabajar solos, y estn destinados para su uso en entornos profesionales y controlados. 13 PROOF 1ES es responsabilidad de la persona que utiliza el producto garantizar su uso seguro en todo momento y que se cumplen las leyes y normativas locales relativas al uso de dispositivos inalmbricos de radiofrecuencia (rF). Cumpla todas las seales e instrucciones relacionadas con el uso de dispositivos inalmbricos de rF. es recomendable obtener formacin acerca de cmo utilizar este producto con seguridad. Su seguridad personal podra verse afectada si no sabe utilizar este producto correctamente. No debe utilizar este producto en entornos que superen los valores indicados en la ficha de datos tcnicos del producto. Exposicin a la energa de RF Los productos fabricados y diseados por Sepura cumplen directrices muy estrictas y normas internacionales relacionadas con la energa de radiofrecuencia (rF) y los posibles riesgos para la salud relacionados con el uso de dispositivos inalmbricos de rF. Si tiene alguna duda acerca de los riesgos para la salud a largo plazo relacionados con el uso de dispositivos inalmbricos de rF, consulte con su superior. el coeficiente de absorcin especfica (Sar, por sus siglas en ingls) es una medida de la cantidad de radiacin electromagntica absorbida por el cuerpo humano al utilizar dispositivos inalmbricos mviles. en europa, se han adoptado las recomendaciones presentadas por la Comisin internacional para la proteccin contra las radiaciones no ionizantes (ICNIrP, por sus siglas en ingls). todos los productos porttiles de Sepura cumplen con estos lmites. Su superior deber proporcionarle formacin acerca del uso correcto de este producto para garantizar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin controlados/profesionales. Interferencia de la energa de RF con los equipos electrnicos algunos dispositivos mdicos personales, como audfonos y marcapasos, pueden verse afectados por la energa de rF. Solicite ayuda a su superior o al fabricante de su dispositivo mdico antes de utilizar dispositivos inalmbricos de rF. algunos dispositivos electrnicos son sensibles a la energa de rF. respete siempre las seales que prohban el uso de los dispositivos inalmbricos de rF. Las radios de Sepura pueden utilizarse en modo de inhibicin de la transmisin; este modo permite restringir la transmisin al trabajar en centros de salud o en otros lugares sensibles a la energa de rF. Uso seguro de la radio Compruebe siempre las clasificaciones de cumplimiento de la radio antes de utilizarla en entornos potencialmente peligrosos. Solo las radios intrnsecamente seguras (ateX/IeCex) pueden utilizarse en entornos peligrosos como lugares donde emanen gases, haya productos qumicos inflamables o haya riesgo de explosin. Debe utilizar la radio en su posicin de funcionamiento normal cuando la sostenga con la mano, la lleve en contacto con el cuerpo o la haya colocado en un soporte. Cuando la lleve en contacto con el cuerpo, deber asegurar la radio con un accesorio homologado por Sepura. asegrese de que la antena est al menos a 2,5 cm (1 in) del cuerpo cuando transmita. asegrese siempre de que la radio se encuentra en buenas condiciones operativas y que funciona correctamente antes de acceder a cualquier entorno en el que existan posibles riesgos para la seguridad personal. NUNCa instale o extraiga la antena, la batera, la tarjeta Smart/microSD o un accesorio (incluidas las tapas accesorias de la radio) cuando est utilizando el producto en un entorno potencialmente peligroso. Proteccin contra la prdida de audicin NUNCa acerque la radio al odo como si fuera un telfono mvil cuando realice una llamada Ptt. La radio tiene un potente altavoz que podra daar el odo si la acerca a l. 14 PROOF Compruebe siempre el nivel de volumen antes de realizar y recibir llamadas. Utilice siempre accesorios de audio homologados por Sepura con la radio. el uso de accesorios de audio no homologados podra causar la prdida de audicin. seguridad al conducir un vehculo respete siempre las leyes y normativas locales acerca del uso de dispositivos inalmbricos de rF al conducir un vehculo. No utilice la radio si supone una distraccin y le impide conducir con seguridad y prestar atencin al estado de la carretera. Siempre DeSCONeCte o ajuste la radio en el modo de inhibicin de la transmisin en las estaciones de servicio. tenga en cuenta y cumpla siempre las seales de advertencia relacionadas con el uso de dispositivos inalmbricos de rF en las inmediaciones de las estaciones de servicio. Condiciones operativas No supere las condiciones operativas de la radio y la batera. 1eS Una exposicin prolongada a temperaturas extremas (superiores a 55 C o 131 F), por ejemplo tras un cristal a plena luz del sol, podra causar daos en la carcasa y en la batera del producto. Debe prestar atencin para evitar impactos mecnicos. Indicaciones de seguridad importantes acerca de la antena NUNCa toque la antena cuando la radio est transmitiendo; esto podra provocar una quemadura leve en la piel y podra afectar el lmite de alcance de la antena. NO manipule, sujete ni balancee la radio por la antena, ya que podra daar la radio y la antena. NUNCa utilice la radio si la antena muestra daos visibles. NUNCa utilice la radio sin la antena a menos que utilice la radio con una antena externa (como una antena rSM). Si transmite sin antena, podra daar la radio. Utilice solo antenas homologadas por Sepura diseadas para el uso con este producto. Bateras Utilice solo bateras homologadas por Sepura con este producto. Las radios tetra de Sepura se han probado y certificado con bateras homologadas por Sepura. el uso de bateras no homologadas podra daar el producto, dar como resultado el incumplimiento de los requisitos normativos, pondr en peligro las clasificaciones de seguridad del producto, afectar al tiempo de funcionamiento e invalidar la garanta del producto. tenga cuidado al manipular y al cargar las bateras. Un cortocircuito accidental del circuito elctrico de la batera (radios de batera) por objetos de metal podra causar lesiones corporales como quemaduras. NUNCa utilice una batera que muestre daos visibles (no pequeos araazos), se haya cado o haya recibido un golpe fuerte. es posible que algunos daos de la batera no sean tan evidentes. Accesorios Utilice solo accesorios homologados por Sepura con este producto. Los productos de Sepura se han probado para cumplir estrictas directrices para la seguridad personal y las condiciones operativas. el uso de accesorios no homologados podra daar el producto, dar como resultado el incumplimiento de los requisitos normativos, pondr en peligro las clasificaciones de seguridad del producto e invalidar la garanta del producto. Lea siempre las instrucciones facilitadas con el accesorio para obtener instrucciones de seguridad adicionales. Deber colocar las tapas del conector de la radio cuando no utilice un accesorio. No es necesario colocar la tapa en el conector Facilities cuando la radio funcione en el modo de proteccin del conector

(puede que esta funcin no est disponible en su radio). 1ES 15 PROOF 1ES Instalacin segura en vehculos Los mecanismos de control electrnico de un vehculo pueden verse afectados por el uso de energa de rF; entre los sistemas que pueden verse afectados se encuentran el aBS y los controles de transmisin. Consulte siempre las instrucciones del fabricante del vehculo y la informacin tcnica relacionada con los mdulos electrnicos y los mazos de cables antes de instalar un dispositivo inalmbrico de rF en un vehculo. No coloque el producto en la zona de despliegue del airbag. en caso de que el airbag se infle, la radio podra salir despedida con mucha fuerza y causar graves lesiones. Mantenimiento y reparaciones No intente desmontar este producto. Las labores de mantenimiento y reparacin de este producto deben encomendarse a tcnicos cualificados de servicio en los centros de servicio homologados por Sepura. Las modificaciones no autorizadas podran hacer que el producto dejase de funcionar e invalidaran las clasificaciones de seguridad y la garanta del producto. es responsabilidad del usuario garantizar que la radio se mantenga en perfectas condiciones de uso. Normativa Normativa de la Comisin Federal de Comunicaciones (FCC) Las radios tetra de Sepura generan, utilizan y emiten energa de rF. Las radios que cumplen con los lmites para un dispositivo digital de Clase a conforme al apartado 15 de las normas de la FCC se identifican mediante una etiqueta de certificacin de la FCC

(situada bajo la batera). Los cambios o modificaciones no aprobadas expresamente por el responsable de cumplimiento podran anular la autoridad del usuario para utilizar el equipo

(apartado 15.21 de la norma). este dispositivo cumple con la Seccin 15 de la normativa de la FCC. el funcionamiento est sujeto a las dos siguientes condiciones: (1) este dispositivo no puede causar interferencias dainas, y (2) este dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia que reciba, incluidas las interferencias que pueden causar un funcionamiento no deseado. Mercados de EE. UU. y Canad Declaracin de exposicin a la radiacin de la FCC esta radio est diseada para su uso en entornos controlados o profesionales donde los usuarios conozcan los posibles riesgos de la exposicin y puedan controlar su exposicin. este producto no est autorizado para su uso entre la poblacin general o similar. este transmisor no debe colocarse en el mismo sitio ni utilizarse con ninguna otra antena o transmisor. Advertencia Rss de IC el trmino IC: que aparece antes del nmero de registro o certificacin solo significa que se cumplen las especificaciones tcnicas de ISeDC. Declaracin de exposicin a la radiacin de IC esta radio est diseada para su uso en entornos controlados o profesionales donde los usuarios conozcan los posibles riesgos de la exposicin y puedan controlar su exposicin. este producto no est autorizado para su uso entre la poblacin general o similar. este transmisor no debe colocarse en el mismo sitio ni utilizarse con ninguna otra antena o transmisor. Normativas europeas 16 Sepura declara que sus productos de radio tetra cumplen con los requisitos esenciales y otras disposiciones pertinentes de la Directiva europea de equipos de radio 2014/53/

Ue sobre la armonizacin de las leyes de los estados miembros relativas a la puesta a PROOF 1ES disposicin en el mercado de equipos de radio y por la que se deroga la Directiva 1999/5/Ce. estos productos tambin cumplen con la Directiva 2011/65/Ue, puesto que se han diseado y fabricado de acuerdo con los requisitos de la Directiva roHS. Declaracin de conformidad simplificada de la UE Sepura declara que los tipos de equipos de radio SC21, SC20, as como las radios porttiles de la serie StP9000 y la radio mvil SrG3900, SCG22 cumplen con la Directiva 2014/53/Ue. el texto completo de la declaracin de conformidad de la Ue est disponible en la siguiente direccin de Internet: www. sepura.com/support/compliance-documents. Informacin para desechar sistemas elctricos o electrnicos este smbolo en el producto o en su envase indica que no debe desecharse junto a los residuos domsticos o comerciales. algunos pases han establecido sistemas de recogida y reciclaje para sistemas elctricos y electrnicos. Si desecha correctamente este producto, ayudar a evitar posibles consecuencias negativas para el medio ambiente y la salud humana, y ayudar a conservar los recursos naturales. Deseche el producto segn la normativa local o nacional vigente. Pngase en contacto con Sepura o con su proveedor de servicios para obtener ms informacin acerca de cmo desechar este producto en su regin. Las radios porttiles Sepura se suministran con una batera recargable. este smbolo en la batera y en su envase indica que no debe desecharse junto a los residuos domsticos o comerciales. Desecho de las bateras Deseche las bateras segn la normativa local o nacional vigente. Pngase en contacto con su proveedor de servicios o con Sepura para obtener ms informacin acerca del reciclaje de bateras en su regin. su radio funciona en las siguientes bandas de frecuencia con la mxima potencia de radiofrecuencia (RF) transmitida:

este equipo de radio puede funcionar en un mayor intervalo de frecuencia del permitido por la normativa del pas y, por tanto, se aplican las restricciones de uso de este producto. Dispone de ms informacin en http://www.efis.dk/, https://www.efis.dk/views2/national_frequency_table.jsp y con la autoridad reguladora del pas correspondiente a travs de esos enlaces. el equipo debe utilizarse conforme a los requisitos de licencia requeridos por el organismo regulador del pas. tipo de radio tEtRA banda de frecuencia

(MHz) 380-430 StP9x38 407-473 StP9x40 380-430 SC2020 403-470 SC2024 380-430 SC2120 403-470 SC2124 380-430 StP8Xx38 StP8Xx40 407-473 SrG3900 tW 380-430 SrG3900 UW 407-473 SCG2229 tU 380-470 tEtRA potencia de salida nominal mxima (W) 1.8 @ 7.4VDC, 1.5a 1.8 @ 7.4VDC, 1.5a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 1 @ 7.6VDC, 1a 1 @ 7.6VDC, 1a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a Banda de frecuencia Bluetooth

(MHz) 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 N/a N/a 2402-2480 4 4 10 10 9 9 4 4 N/a N/a 7*

Potencia transmitida por Bluetooth (dBm)

(EIRP) Banda de frecuencia GPs (MHz) Banda de frecuencia Wi-Fi (MHz) 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 N/a N/a 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 N/a N/a N/a N/a 2402-2480

*Puesto que el SCG2229 se suministra con un conector de antena, las potencias nominales para Bluetooth y wifi se refieren a los valores de conduccin, no a los valores PIre. Potencia transmitida por Wi-Fi (dBm)

(EIRP) N/a N/a 17 17 17 17 N/a N/a N/a N/a 15*

17 PROOF 1IT sicurezza QUEstA GUIDA CONtIENE IMPORtANtI INFORMAZIONI RELAtIVE ALLA sICUREZZA. LEGGERE LA PREsENtE GUIDA PRIMA DI UtILIZZARE IL PRODOttO. Attenzione!

I prodotti Sepura sono progettati per i professionisti che operano in attivit esterne, spesso da soli, e sono destinati alluso in contesti lavorativi e controllati. Loperatore ha la responsabilit di verificare che il prodotto sia sempre utilizzato in sicurezza e in conformit alle leggi e alle norme locali che disciplinano lutilizzo di dispositivi wireless a radiofrequenza

(rF). rispettare tutte le indicazioni e le istruzioni relative allimpiego di dispositivi wireless rF. Si consiglia una formazione sullutilizzo sicuro di questo prodotto. La mancata comprensione delle modalit di funzionamento di questo prodotto potrebbe compromettere la sicurezza personale dellutente. Il prodotto non deve essere utilizzato in condizioni ambientali che eccedano quelle indicate nella scheda tecnica. Esposizione allenergia RF I prodotti Sepura sono progettati e realizzati in conformit a severi regolamenti e standard internazionali in materia di energia a radiofrequenza (rF) e potenziali rischi per la salute associati allimpiego di dispositivi wireless rF. In caso di dubbi su eventuali rischi a lungo termine per la salute associati allimpiego di dispositivi wireless rF, consultarsi con il datore di lavoro. Il tasso di assorbimento specifico (Sar, Specific absorption rate) misura la quantit di radiazioni elettromagnetiche assorbite dal corpo umano durante lutilizzo di un dispositivo mobile wireless. In europa sono state adottate le raccomandazioni della Commissione internazionale per la protezione dalle radiazioni non ionizzanti (ICNIrP, International Commission on Non-Ionising radiation Protection). tutti i prodotti palmari Sepura sono conformi a detti limiti professionali. Il datore di lavoro dovrebbe offrire agli operatori unadeguata formazione atta a garantire lutilizzo del prodotto in conformit alle limitazioni previste per i contesti professionali/controllati. Interferenze RF con le apparecchiature elettroniche Le interferenze rF potrebbero influire sul funzionamento di alcuni dispositivi medicali personali, ad esempio apparecchi acustici e pacemaker. Prima di utilizzare dispositivi wireless rF, consultare il datore di lavoro o il produttore del dispositivo medicale. alcuni dispositivi elettronici sono sensibili allenergia rF. rispettare sempre le indicazioni che limitano lutilizzo di dispositivi wireless rF. Le radio Sepura possono funzionare nella modalit traNSMIt INHIBIt

(INIBIZIONe traSMISSIONe), che limita la trasmissione quando si lavora in strutture sanitarie o altre aree sensibili allenergia rF. Utilizzo sicuro della radio Verificare sempre le classificazioni di conformit della radio prima di utilizzarla in ambienti potenzialmente pericolosi. In ambienti pericolosi, ad esempio zone caratterizzate da atmosfere esplosive, vapori gassosi, sostanze chimiche infiammabili, utilizzare esclusivamente sistemi radio a sicurezza intrinseca (ateX/IeCex). Quando tenuta in mano, indossata o fissata con un supporto, la radio dovrebbe essere utilizzata nella posizione di funzionamento normale. Se indossata, la radio deve essere fissata con un dispositivo apposito approvato da Sepura. Durante la trasmissione, verificare che lantenna si trovi a una distanza dal corpo pari ad almeno 2,5 cm (1 pollice). Prima di accedere a un ambiente potenzialmente pericoloso per la sicurezza personale, verificare sempre che le condizioni della radio siano adeguate e che il dispositivo funzioni correttamente. MaI montare o rimuovere lantenna, la batteria, la scheda Smart/microSD o gli accessori (incluse le coperture accessorie della radio) durante lutilizzo in ambienti potenzialmente pericolosi. 18 PROOF 1IT Protezione delludito MaI avvicinare la radio allorecchio, come si farebbe con un telefono cellulare, quando si effettua una chiamata Ptt. La radio ha un altoparlante potente che potrebbe danneggiare ludito se tenuto vicino allorecchio. Prima di effettuare chiamate o di rispondere, controllare sempre il livello del volume. Utilizzare sempre accessori audio approvati da Sepura insieme alla radio. Lutilizzo di accessori audio non approvati pu provocare la perdita delludito. sicurezza alla guida rispettare sempre le leggi e le norme locali che disciplinano lutilizzo di dispositivi wireless rF alla guida. Non utilizzare la radio qualora possa distogliere lattenzione dalla strada e impedire di guidare in sicurezza. Spegnere sempre la radio o impostarla sulla modalit traNSMIt INHIBIt (INIBIZIONe traSMISSIONe) presso le stazioni di rifornimento. rispettare sempre i segnali di avvertenza relativi allutilizzo di dispositivi wireless rF nelle vicinanze delle stazioni di rifornimento. Condizioni di esercizio Non superare le condizioni di esercizio previste per radio e batteria. Lesposizione prolungata a temperature estreme (oltre 55 C o 131 F), ad esempio dietro un vetro e sotto la luce solare diretta, pu danneggiare la scocca del prodotto e la batteria. Cercare di evitare impatti meccanici. Note importanti sulla sicurezza dellantenna MaI toccare lantenna durante la trasmissione per evitare di subire ustioni cutanee lievi e di compromettere il raggio di trasmissione dellantenna. NON maneggiare, sorreggere o far dondolare la radio tenendola per lantenna, poich ci potrebbe danneggiare sia lantenna sia la radio. MaI utilizzare la radio se lantenna presenta segni di danneggiamento. MaI utilizzare la radio senza unantenna collegata, a meno che la radio non venga usata con unantenna esterna (ad esempio, unantenna rSM). La trasmissione senza antenna pu provocare danni alla radio. Utilizzare esclusivamente antenne progettate per questo prodotto e approvate da Sepura. Batterie Utilizzare con questo prodotto soltanto batterie approvate da Sepura. Le radio tetra di Sepura sono state testate e certificate con le batterie approvate da Sepura. Luso di batterie non approvate pu provocare danni al prodotto, costituisce una violazione dei requisiti normativi, compromette le classificazioni di sicurezza del prodotto, riduce la durata di utilizzo e rende nulla la garanzia. Maneggiare e caricare le batterie con attenzione. Un corto circuito accidentale del circuito elettrico della batteria (radio a batteria) causato da oggetti metallici pu provocare lesioni personali, ad esempio ustioni. MaI utilizzare una batteria che appare danneggiata (piccoli graffi non sono considerati segni di danneggiamento), sia caduta o abbia subito un forte urto. I danni alla batteria non risultano sempre evidenti. Accessori Utilizzare con questo prodotto soltanto accessori approvati da Sepura. I prodotti Sepura sono stati sottoposti a test di garanzia della conformit a severe linee guida per la sicurezza personale e le condizioni di esercizio. Luso di accessori non approvati pu provocare danni al prodotto, costituisce una violazione dei requisiti normativi, compromette le classificazioni di sicurezza del prodotto e rende nulla la garanzia. 19 PROOF 1IT Per ulteriori indicazioni relative alla sicurezza, leggere sempre le istruzioni fornite con laccessorio. Quando non si utilizzano accessori, montare sulla radio gli appositi copriconnettori. Non necessario montare un copriconnettore sul connettore impianti quando la radio viene utilizzata in modalit Connector Protector (Protezione connettore). Questa funzione non disponibile su tutte le radio. Installazione sicura allinterno dei veicoli I meccanismi elettronici di controllo allinterno di un veicolo, quali controlli della trasmissione e aBS, possono essere influenzati dalluso di energia rF. Prima di installare un dispositivo wireless rF allinterno di un veicolo, consultare sempre le istruzioni del produttore di questultimo e le informazioni tecniche sui moduli elettronici e i relativi cavi di collegamento. Non installare il prodotto nellarea di apertura dellairbag. In caso di attivazione dellairbag, la radio potrebbe staccarsi ed essere proiettata a grande velocit, con conseguente rischio di lesioni gravi. Manutenzione e riparazione Non tentare di smontare il prodotto. Gli interventi di manutenzione e riparazione devono essere eseguiti esclusivamente da tecnici adeguatamente formati e presso i centri di assistenza approvati da Sepura. Modifiche non autorizzate potrebbero compromettere il funzionamento del prodotto e rendere nulle le classificazioni di sicurezza e la garanzia. responsabilit dellutente garantire che la radio sia mantenuta in condizioni di funzionamento ottimali. Norme Norme FCC (Federal Communication Commission) Le radio tetra di Sepura generano, utilizzano e irradiano energia rF. Le radio conformi ai limiti previsti per i dispositivi digitali di Classe a, ai sensi della Parte 15 delle norme FCC, sono contraddistinte da unetichetta recante lID della certificazione FCC (posta sotto la batteria). Modifiche o alterazioni non espressamente approvate dal soggetto responsabile della conformit potrebbero invalidare il diritto dellutente a utilizzare lapparecchiatura (Parte 15.21 delle norme). Il presente dispositivo conforme alla Parte 15 del regolamento FCC. Il funzionamento soggetto alle seguenti due condizioni: (1) il dispositivo non pu causare interferenze dannose; (2) il dispositivo deve accettare le interferenze ricevute, incluse le interferenze che potrebbero determinare un funzionamento indesiderato. Mercato statunitense e canadese Dichiarazione FCC sullesposizione alle radiazioni Questa radio destinata allutilizzo in contesti professionali/controllati in cui gli operatori abbiano ricevuto unadeguata formazione sui potenziali rischi derivanti dallesposizione al prodotto e siano quindi in grado di evitarli. Il prodotto non destinato alluso non professionale da parte di consumatori generici n a qualsiasi altro utilizzo. Non consentito installare o utilizzare questo trasmettitore insieme ad altri trasmettitori o antenne. Avviso IC Rss Il termine IC: prima del numero di registrazione/certificazione indica semplicemente la conformit alle specifiche tecniche ISeDC. Dichiarazione IC sullesposizione alle radiazioni Questa radio destinata allutilizzo in contesti professionali/controllati in cui gli operatori abbiano ricevuto unadeguata formazione sui potenziali rischi derivanti dallesposizione al prodotto e siano quindi in grado di evitarli. Il prodotto non destinato alluso non professionale da parte di consumatori generici n a qualsiasi altro utilizzo. Non consentito installare o utilizzare questo trasmettitore insieme ad altri trasmettitori o antenne. 20 PROOF 1IT Norme europee Sepura dichiara che i prodotti radio tetra sono conformi ai requisiti essenziali e ad altre disposizioni pertinenti della Direttiva reD (radio equipment Directive) 2014/53/

Ue relativa allarmonizzazione delle leggi degli Stati Membri in merito allintroduzione di apparecchiature radio sul mercato e alla Direttiva abrogata 1999/5/Ce. Questi prodotti sono inoltre conformi alla Direttiva 2011/65/Ue, essendo essi progettati e prodotti secondo gli standard roHS. Dichiarazione di conformit UE semplificata Sepura dichiara che i tipi di apparecchiature radio serie SC21, SC20 e le radio portatili serie StP9000, nonch la radio serie SrG3900, SCG22 sono conformi alla Direttiva 2014/53/Ue. Il testo completo della dichiarazione di conformit Ue disponibile al seguente indirizzo Web:

www.sepura.com/support/compliance-documents. Informazioni sullo smaltimento di rifiuti da apparecchiature elettriche ed elettroniche Se il prodotto o la sua confezione reca questo simbolo, significa che il dispositivo non deve essere smaltito come rifiuto domestico o commerciale. alcuni Paesi hanno elaborato sistemi per la raccolta e il riciclaggio di rifiuti da prodotti elettrici ed elettronici. Garantendo il corretto smaltimento del prodotto, si contribuisce a prevenire potenziali conseguenze negative sullambiente e sulla salute umana e a preservare le risorse naturali. Smaltire i prodotti di scarto in conformit alle norme locali e nazionali. Per informazioni sullo smaltimento di questo prodotto nella propria regione, rivolgersi a Sepura o al fornitore di servizi. smaltimento delle batterie di scarto Le radio portatili Sepura sono dotate di una batteria ricaricabile. Se la batteria o la sua confezione reca questo simbolo, significa che il dispositivo non deve essere smaltito con i rifiuti domestici o commerciali. Smaltire le batterie di scarto in conformit alle norme locali e nazionali. Per informazioni sul riciclaggio delle batterie nella propria regione, rivolgersi a Sepura o al fornitore di servizi. La radio funziona con le seguenti bande di frequenza alla massima potenza di radio-

frequenza (RF) di trasmissione:

Questa apparecchiatura radio pu funzionare con gamme di frequenza superiori rispetto a quelle consentite dalle normative nazionali, pertanto luso di questo prodotto soggetto a limitazioni. Maggiori informazioni sono disponibili su http://www.efis.dk/, https://www.efis.dk/views2/national_frequency_ table.jsp e presso le autorit normative nazionali competenti, indicate in tali pagine. Lapparecchiatura deve essere utilizzata entro i requisiti di licenza imposti dallente normativo nazionale. tipo di radio tEtRA banda di frequenza

(MHz) 380-430 StP9x38 StP9x40 407-473 380-430 SC2020 403-470 SC2024 380-430 SC2120 403-470 SC2124 380-430 StP8Xx38 StP8Xx40 407-473 SrG3900 tW 380-430 tEtRA Max. potenza nominale in uscita

(W) 1.8 @ 7.4VDC, 1.5a 1.8 @ 7.4VDC, 1.5a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 1 @ 7.6VDC, 1a 1 @ 7.6VDC, 1a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a Banda di frequenza Bluetooth

(MHz) 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 N/a Potenza trasmessa Bluetooth

(dBm) (EIRP) 4 4 10 10 9 9 4 4 N/a Banda di frequenza GPs (MHz) Banda di frequenza Wi-Fi (MHz) 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 N/a N/a 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 N/a N/a N/a Potenza trasmessa Wi-Fi

(dBm) (EIRP) N/a N/a 17 17 17 17 N/a N/a N/a 21 PROOF 111 pT IT tipo di radio tEtRA banda di frequenza

(MHz) tEtRA Max. potenza nominale in uscita

(W) SrG3900 UW 407-473 380-470 SCG2229 tU 10 @13.2VDC, 3a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a Banda di frequenza Bluetooth

(MHz) N/a 2402-2480 Potenza trasmessa Bluetooth

(dBm) (EIRP) N/a 7*

Banda di frequenza GPs (MHz) Banda di frequenza Wi-Fi (MHz) 1559-1610 1559-1610 N/a 2402-2480 Potenza trasmessa Wi-Fi

(dBm) (EIRP) N/a 15*

*Poich il modello SCG2229 viene fornito con connettore per antenna, la potenza nominale per Bluetooth e Wi-Fi espressa in valori di conduzione, non eIrP. segurana EstE GUIA CONtM INFORMAEs IMPORtANtEs DE sEGURANA. LEIA EstE GUIA ANtEs DE UsAR O PRODUtO. Ateno!

Os produtos da Sepura foram projetados para serem utilizados por foras de trabalho mveis, que muitas vezes trabalham sozinhas, e se destinam ao uso em condies profissionais e controladas. de responsabilidade da pessoa que opera o produto garantir que ele seja operado com segurana em todos os momentos, e que sejam observadas as leis e normas locais que controlam a utilizao de dispositivos sem fio de radiofrequncia (rF). Obedea a todos os sinais e instrues referentes utilizao de dispositivos sem fio de rF. recomendvel que voc receba treinamento sobre como operar com segurana este produto. Sua segurana pessoal poderia ser afetada caso voc no entenda como operar este produto corretamente. este produto no deve ser utilizado em ambientes cujas caractersticas excedam aquelas constantes na ficha tcnica do produto. Exposio energia de RF a Sepura projeta e fabrica produtos que atendem s rgidas diretrizes e normas internacionais relativas energia de radiofrequncia (rF) e aos potenciais riscos para a sade associados com o uso de dispositivos sem fio de rF. Se voc tiver qualquer preocupao referente aos riscos a longo prazo para a sade associados com o uso de dispositivos sem fio de rF, dever receber orientao do seu empregador. a Sar (taxa de absoro especfica) uma medida que determina a quantidade de radiao eletromagntica que absorvida pelo corpo humano durante a utilizao de um dispositivo mvel sem fio. Na europa, foram adotadas as recomendaes estabelecidas pela Comisso Internacional de Proteo contra radiaes No Ionizantes (ICNIrP, International Commission on Non-Ionising radiation Protection). todos os produtos manuais da Sepura respeitam esses limites permitidos. Dever ser fornecido treinamento por parte do seu empregador sobre a correta utilizao deste produto, a fim de garantir que sejam respeitados os limites de exposio profissional/controlada. Interferncia de energia de RF com equipamentos eletrnicos alguns dispositivos mdicos pessoais, como aparelhos auditivos e marca- passos, podem ser afetados pela energia de rF. Obtenha orientao do seu empregador ou do fabricante de seu dispositivo mdico antes de utilizar dispositivos sem fio de rF. alguns dispositivos eletrnicos so sensveis energia de rF. Sempre obedea aos sinais que restringem o uso de dispositivos sem fio de radiof requncia. Os rdios da Sepura podem operar em modo traNSMIt INHIBIt, que restringe a transmisso, ao se trabalhar em instalaes mdicas ou em outras reas que sejam sensveis energia de rF. 22 PROOF 1pT Operao segura do rdio Verifique sempre as classificaes de conformidade do seu rdio antes de utiliz-lo em ambientes potencialmente perigosos. apenas os rdios intrinsecamente seguros (ateX/IeCex) podem ser operados em ambientes perigosos, por exemplo, naqueles em que pode haver vapores de gs, produtos qumicos inflamveis ou em reas de detonao. O rdio deve ser utilizado em posio normal de funcionamento quando for utilizado manual, fixado ao corpo ou encaixado em uma base. Quando for utilizado junto ao corpo, o rdio deve ser fixado com um acessrio aprovado pela Sepura. assegure-se de que a antena fique a pelo menos 2,5 cm (1 pol.) de distncia do corpo durante a transmisso. Sempre garanta que seu rdio esteja em boas condies operacionais e funcionando corretamente antes de entrar em qualquer ambiente que apresente possvel risco para a segurana pessoal. NUNCa instale ou remova a antena, a bateria, o carto Smart/microSD ou um acessrio (incluindo tampas de acessrios no seu rdio) ao operar em um ambiente potencialmente perigoso. Proteo contra perda de audio NUNCa coloque o rdio ao lado da orelha, como um telefone celular, ao fazer uma chamada Ptt. O rdio tem um alto-falante poderoso que pode acabar prejudicando sua audio se for segurado prximo ao ouvido. Sempre verifique o nvel de volume antes de fazer e receber chamadas. Sempre utilize acessrios de udio aprovados pela Sepura com o rdio. a utilizao de acessrios de udio no aprovados poder causar perda de audio. segurana ao dirigir um veculo Sempre obedea s leis e normas locais que controlam o funcionamento de dispositivos sem fio de rF quando conduzir um veculo. No opere o rdio, pois ele cria uma distrao e impede que o motorista dirija com segurana e observe as condies das estradas. Sempre DeSLIGUe ou coloque o rdio no modo traNSMIt INHIBIt em postos de gasolina. Sempre observe e obedea aos sinais de alerta referentes utilizao de dispositivos sem fio de rF nas imediaes dos postos de gasolina. Condies operacionais No exceda as condies operacionais para o rdio e para a bateria. a exposio prolongada a temperaturas extremas (acima de 55C ou 131F), por exemplo, atrs de vidros com luz solar direta, pode causar danos embalagem do produto e bateria. Deve-se tomar cuidado para evitar impactos mecnicos. Informaes de segurana importantes sobre a antena NUNCa toque na antena quando o rdio est transmitindo; isso poder causar uma pequena queimadura na pele e poder afetar o alcance operacional da antena. NO manuseie, segure ou balance o rdio pela antena; isso poder danificar o aparelho e a antena. NUNCa use o rdio se a antena mostrar sinais de avarias. NUNCa utilize o rdio sem uma antena acoplada, a menos que seu rdio esteja sendo utilizado com uma antena externa (como uma antena rSM). a transmisso sem antena poder danificar o rdio. Utilize apenas antenas aprovadas pela Sepura, projetadas para utilizao com este produto. Baterias Utilize apenas baterias aprovadas pela Sepura com este produto. Os rdios tetra da Sepura foram testados e certificados com baterias aprovadas pela Sepura. a utilizao de baterias no aprovadas poder danificar o produto, resultar na no conformidade com as normas regulatrias, comprometer as classificaes de segurana do produto, reduzir a durao do tempo de funcionamento e invalidar a garantia do produto. 23 PROOF 1pT tenha cuidado ao manusear e carregar as baterias. O curto-circuito acidental do circuito eltrico da bateria (rdios com bateria) por objetos metlicos poder causar ferimentos como queimaduras. NUNCa use uma bateria que mostra sinais de avarias (no incluindo pequenos riscos), ou que caiu ou que recebeu uma pancada. Os danos bateria talvez no sejam sempre bvios. Acessorios Utilize apenas acessrios aprovados pela Sepura com este produto. Os produtos da Sepura foram testados para atender s rgidas normais para as condies operacionais e de segurana pessoal. a utilizao de acessrios no aprovadps poder danificar o produto, resultar na no conformidade com as normas regulatrias, comprometer as classificaes de segurana do produto e invalidar a garantia do produto. Leia sempre as instrues fornecidas com o acessrio para obter instrues adicionais de segurana. as tampas do conector do rdio devem estar encaixadas no lugar quando um acessrio no estiver em uso. a tampa no precisa estar encaixada no conector Facilities quando o rdio estiver operando no modo Connector Protector (esse recurso pode no estar disponvel no seu rdio). Instalao segura em veculos Os mecanismos de controle eletrnico em um veculo podem ser afetados pela utilizao de energia de rF, tais como controles de aBS e transmisso. Consulte sempre as instrues do fabricante do veculo e as informaes tcnicas relativas aos mdulos eletrnicos e sua fiao eltrica antes de instalar um dispositivo sem fio de rF em um veculo. No instale o produto na rea de abertura do airbag. Caso o air bag seja acionado, o rdio poder ser arremessado com muita fora, podendo causar leses graves. Manuteno e consertos No tente desmontar este produto. a manuteno e os consertos deste produto devem ser realizados por funcionrios treinados dos centros de servio aprovados da Sepura. Modificaes no autorizadas podero fazer com que o produto perca a funcionalidade e invalidaro as classificaes de segurana e a garantia do produto. de responsabilidade do usurio garantir que o rdio seja mantido em boas condies de funcionamento. Normativo Normas da Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Os rdios tetra da Sepura geram, utilizam e irradiam energia de radiofrequncia (rF). Os rdios que respeitam os limites de um dispositivo digital Classe a, de acordo com a parte 15 das regras da FCC, so identificados por uma etiqueta de ID da certificao FCC (localizada embaixo da bateria). as alteraes ou modificaes que no forem aprovadas expressamente pela parte responsvel podem anular a autoridade do usurio para operar o equipamento (parte 15.21 da regra). este dispositivo est em conformidade com a Parte 15 das regras do FCC. a operao est sujeita s duas condies a seguir: (1) este dispositivo no pode causar interferncia prejudicial, e (2) este dispositivo deve aceitar qualquer interferncia recebida, incluindo aquela que pode causar operaes indesejadas. EUA e Canad Declarao da FCC de exposio radiao este rdio se destina ao uso em aplicaes profissionais/controladas, nas quais os usurios foram avisados dos riscos potenciais com a exposio e podem exercer controle sobre a exposio. este produto no autorizado para uso da populao em geral, pelo consumidor final, ou para outros usos 24 PROOF semelhantes. este transmissor no deve ser colocado nem operado junto a nenhuma outra antena ou outro transmissor. Advertncia de Rss IC O termo IC: antes do nmero de certificao/inscrio significa apenas que foram atendidas as especificaes tcnicas da ISeDC. Declarao de exposio radiao da IC este rdio se destina ao uso em aplicaes profissionais/controladas, nas quais os usurios foram avisados dos riscos potenciais com a exposio e podem exercer controle sobre a exposio. este produto no autorizado para uso geral na populao ou no consumidor final, ou para outros usos semelhantes. este transmissor no deve ser colocado junto a nenhuma outra antena ou outro transmissor nem operado em conjunto com nenhum desses equipamentos. Normas europeias a Sepura declara que seus produtos de rdio tetra esto em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies relevantes da Diretiva europeia de equipamentos de rdio 2014/53/eU relativa harmonizao das legislaes dos estados-Membros em relao disponibilizao no mercado de equipamentos de rdio e Diretiva revogadora 1999/5/Ce. estes produtos tambm so compatveis com a diretiva 2011/65/eU, que foi concebida e fabricada para as exigncias roHS. Declarao de conformidade simplificada da UE Por meio deste documento, a Sepura declara que os equipamentos de rdio do tipo SC21, SC20, os rdios portteis da srie StP9000 e o rdio mvel SrG3900, SCG22 esto em conformidade com a Diretiva 2014/53/eU. O texto completo da declarao de conformidade da Ue est disponvel no seguinte endereo na Internet: www.sepura.com/support/compliance-documents. Informaes sobre o descarte de equipamentos eletroeletrnicos gastos esse smbolo no produto ou em sua embalagem indica que esse produto no deve ser descartado junto com o lixo domstico ou comercial. alguns pases criaram sistemas de coleta e reciclagem para os produtos eletroeletrnicos gastos. ao garantir que este produto seja descartado da forma correta, voc vai ajudar a evitar possveis consequncias negativas para o meio ambiente e a sade humana, e a conservar os recursos naturais. Descarte os produtos gastos de acordo com suas normas nacionais e locais. entre em contato com a Sepura ou com o fornecedor do servio para obter informaes sobre o descarte deste produto na sua regio. Os rdios de mo portteis Sepura so fornecidos com uma bateria recarregvel. este smbolo na bateria e em sua embalagem indica que ela no deve ser descartada junto com o lixo Descarte de bateriais gastas domstico ou comercial. Descarte as baterias gastas de acordo com suas normas nacionais e locais. entre em contato com o fornecedor do servio ou com a Sepura para obter informaes sobre a reciclagem das baterias na sua regio. seu rdio funciona nas seguintes bandas de frequncia com a potncia de rdio-

frequncia (RF) mxima transmitida:

este equipamento de rdio pode operar em uma faixa de frequncia maior do que os regulamentos do pas permitem e, portanto, so aplicadas restries para o uso deste produto. H mais informaes disponveis nos site http://www.efis.dk/, https://www.efis.dk/views2/national_frequency_table.jsp e com a autoridade normativa do pas em questo atravs desses links. O equipamento deve ser operado de acordo com os requisitos de licena exigidos pelo rgo regulador do pas. 11pT 25 PROOF 111 NL pT tipo de rdio tEtRA faixa de frequncia

(MHz) StP9x38 380-430 407-473 StP9x40 380-430 SC2020 403-470 SC2024 380-430 SC2120 403-470 SC2124 380-430 StP8Xx38 StP8Xx40 407-473 SrG3900 tW 380-430 SrG3900 UW 407-473 SCG2229 tU 380-470 tEtRA potncia mx. nominal de sada (W) 1.8 @ 7.4VDC, 1.5a 1.8 @ 7.4VDC, 1.5a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 1 @ 7.6VDC, 1a 1 @ 7.6VDC, 1a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a Banda de frequncia Bluetooth

(MHz) 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 N/a N/a 2402-2480 Potncia transmitida por Bluetooth

(dBm) (EIRP) 4 4 10 10 9 9 4 4 N/a N/a 7*

Banda de frequncia GPs (MHz) Banda de frequncia Wi-Fi

(MHz) 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 1559-1610 N/a 1559-1610 N/a 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 N/a 1559-1610 N/a 1559-1610 N/a 1559-1610 N/a 1559-1610 2402-2480 Potncia transmitida por Wi-Fi

(dBm) (EIRP) N/a N/a 17 17 17 17 N/a N/a N/a N/a 15*

*Como o SCG2229 fornecido com um conector de antena, as potncias nominais do Bluetooth e do Wi-Fi so valores conduzidos, no eIrP. Veiligheid DEZE HANDLEIDING BEVAt BELANGRIJKE VEILIGHEIDsINFORMAtIE. NEEM DEZE HANDLEIDING DOOR VOORDAt U HEt PRODUCt GEBRUIKt. Let op!

Producten van Sepura zijn bedoeld voor gebruik door mobiel personeel, dat vaak alleen werkt, en zijn bedoeld voor gebruik in beroepsmatige en gecontroleerde omgevingen. Het is de verantwoordelijkheid van de gebruiker van het product om ervoor te zorgen dat het te allen tijde veilig wordt gebruikt en dat de plaatselijke wet-en regelgeving voor het gebruik van radiofrequente

(rF) draadloze apparaten in acht wordt genomen. Volg alle tekens en instructies op betreffende het gebruik van rF draadloze apparaten. We raden aan dat u wordt getraind in het veilig gebruiken van dit product. Uw persoonlijke veiligheid is in het geding als u niet weet hoe dit product correct moet worden gebruikt. Dit product mag niet gebruikt worden in omgevingen die op het technische gegevensblad van het product staan aangegeven. Blootstelling aan radiofrequente energie Sepura ontwerpt en produceert haar producten om te voldoen aan strenge richtlijnen en internationale normen voor radiofrequente (rF) energie en de mogelijke gezondheidsrisicos die gepaard gaan met het gebruik van rF draadloze apparatuur. als u vragen hebt over gezondheidsrisicos op de lange termijn in verband met het gebruik van rF draadloze apparaten, kunt u advies vragen aan uw werkgever. Sar (specifieke absorptieratio) is een meting van hoeveel elektromagnetische straling er door het menselijk lichaam wordt opgenomen tijdens het gebruik van een draadloos mobiel apparaat. In europa leeft men de aanbevelingen van de internationale commissie voor bescherming van non-Ioniserende straling (ICNIrP) na. alle Sepura handheld-producten voldoen aan deze beroepsmatige limieten. Uw werkgever moet u trainen in het juiste gebruik van dit product om ervoor te zorgen dat er aan de beroepsmatige/gecontroleerde blootstellingslimieten wordt voldaan. 26 PROOF 1NL Interferentie van RF-energie met elektronische apparatuur Sommige persoonlijke medische apparatuur, zoals gehoorapparaten en pacemakers, kunnen verstoord worden door rF-energie. Vraag uw werkgever of de fabrikant van uw medische apparaat om advies voordat u rF draadloze apparaten gebruikt. Sommige elektronische apparaten zijn gevoelig voor rF-energie. Leef waarschuwingen voor het beperken van het gebruik van rF draadloze apparaten al tijd na. radios van Sepura werken in de modus traNSMIt INHIBIt, waardoor er niet verzonden kan worden als er gewerkt wordt in zorginstellingen of op andere plekken die gevoelig zijn voor rF-energie. Uw radio veilig gebruiken Controleer altijd de normwaarden van uw radio voordat u deze gebruikt in mogelijk gevaarlijke omgevingen. alleen intrinsiek (ateX/IeCex) veilige radios kunnen worden gebruikt in gevaarlijke omgevingen, zoals omgevingen met gasdampen, brandbare chemicalin of explosiegebieden. Uw radio moet gebruikt worden in de standaard werkstand wanneer deze in de hand wordt gehouden, op het lichaam gedragen wordt of in een station staat. als u uw radio op het lichaam draagt, moet deze met een door Sepura goedgekeurde bevestiging worden vastgemaakt. Zorg ervoor dat de antenne ten minste 2,5 cm van het lichaam is verwijderd als er verzonden wordt. Zorg er altijd voor dat uw radio in een juiste operationele staat verkeert en correct werkt voordat u een gebied betreedt waarin uw persoonlijke veiligheid niet gegarandeerd kan worden. Plaats of verwijder NOOIt de antenne, batterij, Smart-/micro SD-kaart of een accessoire (inclusief accessoireklepjes op uw radio) als er in een mogelijk gevaarlijke omgeving wordt gewerkt. Bescherming van het gehoor Plaats de radio NOOIt vlak bij uw oor, zoals een mobiele telefoon, als u een Ptt- gesprek voert. Uw radio heeft een krachtige luidspreker die uw gehoor kan beschadigen als deze vlak bij uw oor wordt gehouden. Controleer altijd het volumeniveau voordat u een binnenkomend gesprek beantwoordt. Gebruik altijd door Sepura goedgekeurde audio-accessoires voor uw radio. Het gebruik van niet-

goedgekeurde audio-accessoires kan tot gehoorbeschadiging leiden. Veiligheid tijdens het besturen van een voertuig Neem altijd de plaatselijke wet- en regelgeving in acht voor het bedienen van draadloze apparaten tijdens het rijden. Gebruik uw radio niet als dit betekent dat u niet veilig kunt rijden en de weg niet in de gaten kunt houden. Schakel uw radio bij tankstations altijd UIt of zet hem in de modus traNSMIt INHIBIt. Neem waarschuwingen over het gebruik van rF draadloze apparatuur in de buurt van tankstations altijd in acht. voorwaarden Overschrijd de operationele voorwaarden voor uw radio en batterij niet. Langdurige blootstelling aan extreme temperaturen (meer dan 55 C), bijvoorbeeld achter glas in direct zonlicht, kan de behuizing van het product en de batterij beschadigen. Mechanische impact moet worden vermeden. Belangrijke veiligheidsopmerkingen over de antenne raak de antenne NOOIt aan als uw radio aan het verzenden is. Dit kan een kleine brandwond veroorzaken en kan het operationele bereik van de antenne benvloeden. Gebruik de antenne NIet om uw radio te hanteren, vast te houden of te draaien. Dit kan uw radio en de antenne beschadigen. Gebruik uw radio NOOIt als de antenne beschadigd lijkt. Gebruik uw radio NOOIt zonder antenne, tenzij uw radio wordt gebruikt met een externe antenne 27 PROOF 1NL

(bijvoorbeeld een rSM-antenne). Verzenden zonder een antenne kan uw radio beschadigen. Gebruik uitsluitend door Sepura goedgekeurde antennes die met dit product gebruikt kunnen worden. Batterijen Gebruik uitsluitend door Sepura goedgekeurde batterijen met dit product. tetra-radios van Sepura zijn getest en goedgekeurd voor gebruik met door Sepura goedgekeurde batterijen. Gebruik van niet-goedgekeurde batterijen kan het product beschadigen, resulteert in het niet in acht nemen van de regelgevende vereisten, is niet in overeenstemming met de productveiligheidswaarden, vermindert de gebruiksduur en maakt de productgarantie ongeldig. Wees voorzichtig als u batterijen gebruikt en vervangt. Metalen voorwerpen kunnen kortsluiting veroorzaken in het elektrische circuit van de batterij (batterijen van de radio), wat bijvoorbeeld tot brandwonden kan leiden. Gebruik NOOIt batterijen die beschadigd lijken (niet kleine krasjes) of die zijn gevallen of een ferme tik hebben gehad. Schade aan de batterij hoeft niet altijd zichtbaar te zijn. Accessoires Gebruik uitsluitend door Sepura goedgekeurde accessoires met dit product. Producten van Sepura zijn getest om te voldoen aan strenge vereisten voor persoonlijke veiligheid en operationele voorwaarden. Gebruik van niet-goedgekeurde accessoires kan het product beschadigen, resulteert in het niet in acht nemen van de regelgevende vereisten, is niet in overeenstemming met de productveiligheidswaarden en maakt de productgarantie ongeldig. Neem voor aanvullende veiligheidsinstructies altijd de met het accessoire meegeleverde instructies door. als een accessoire niet wordt gebruikt, moeten de aansluitingen op uw radio worden afgedekt. De aansluiting Facilities hoeft niet te worden afgedekt als uw radio in de modus Connector Protector staat

(deze functie is wellicht niet beschikbaar op uw radio). Veilige installatie in voertuigen elektronische controlemechanismen zoals aBS en transmissiecontroles in een voertuig kunnen verstoord worden door rF-energie. raadpleeg altijd de instructies van de fabrikant van het voertuig en de technische gegevens met betrekking tot elektronische modules en hun kabelbomen, voordat u een rF draadloos apparaat in een voertuig installeert. Installeer het product niet binnen het werkbereik van een airbag. als er een airbag wordt opgeblazen, kan uw radio met veel kracht worden gelanceerd met mogelijk serieus letsel tot gevolg. Onderhoud en reparaties Probeer dit product niet te demonteren. Onderhoud en reparaties aan dit product moeten worden uitgevoerd door getrainde servicemonteurs bij door Sepura goedgekeurde servicecentra. Ongeoorloofde aanpassingen kunnen ervoor zorgen dat het product niet meer werkt en maken productveiligheidswaarden en de productgarantie ongeldig. De gebruiker is ervoor verantwoordelijk dat de radio in een goede staat wordt gehouden. Regelgeving Regelgeving Federale Communicatiecommissie (FCC) ID-label (onder de batterij). Veranderingen of wijzigingen die niet uitdrukkelijk zijn goedgekeurd door de partij die verantwoordelijk is voor naleving, kunnen de bevoegdheid van de gebruiker om het tetra-radios van Sepura genereren en gebruiken radiofrequente energie en stralen deze uit. radios die voldoen aan de limieten voor een Klasse a digitaal apparaat, in navolging van deel 15 van de FCCregelgeving, worden gedentificeerd door een FCC-identificatie 28 PROOF apparaat te gebruiken opheffen (deel 15.21 van de regelgeving). Dit apparaat voldoet aan deel 15 van de FCC- voorschriften. De werking ervan is onderworpen aan de volgende twee voorwaarden: (1) Dit apparaat mag geen schadelijke interferentie veroorzaken, en (2) dit apparaat moet bestand zijn tegen de ontvangst van elke mate van interferentie, waaronder interferentie die een ongewenste werking kan veroorzaken. Amerikaanse en Canadese markten FCC-verklaring inzake blootstelling aan straling Deze radio is bedoeld voor gebruik in bedrijfsmatige/gecontroleerde toepassingen waarbij gebruikers op de hoogte zijn van mogelijke blootstellingsrisicos en hun blootstelling zelf kunnen regelen. Dit product is niet goedgekeurd voor algemeen gebruik, gebruik door consumenten, etc. De zender mag niet geplaatst en gebruikt worden op een locatie waar zich al een andere antenne of zender bevindt. IC Rss-waarschuwing De term IC: die voor het certificerings-/registratienummer staat, betekent alleen maar dat er aan de technische specificaties van ISeDC is voldaan. IC-verklaring inzake blootstelling aan straling Deze radio is bedoeld voor gebruik in bedrijfsmatige/gecontroleerde toepassingen waarbij gebruikers op de hoogte zijn van mogelijke blootstellingsrisicos en hun blootstelling zelf kunnen regelen. Dit product is niet goedgekeurd voor algemeen gebruik, gebruik door consumenten, etc. De zender mag niet geplaatst en gebruikt worden op een locatie waar zich al een andere antenne of zender bevindt. Europese regelgeving Sepura verklaart dat haar tetra-radioproducten voldoen aan de essentile vereisten en andere relevante bepalingen van de europese richtlijn voor radioapparatuur 2014/53/eU betreffende de harmonisatie van de wetgevingen van de lidstaten inzake het op de markt aanbieden van radioapparatuur en tot intrekking van richtlijn 1999/5/eG. Deze producten voldoen ook aan richtlijn 2011/65/eU, aangezien ze zijn ontworpen en vervaardigd volgens de roHS-vereisten. Vereenvoudigde EU-conformiteitsverklaring Sepura dat de draagbare radios uit de SC21-, SC20- en StP9000-serie en de mobiele radios uit de SrG3900-, SCG22 voldoen aan richtlijn 2014/53/eU. De volledige tekst van de eU-

conformiteitsverklaring is beschikbaar op het volgende internetadres: www.sepura.com/support/

compliance-documents. Informatie over het weggooien van elektrische en elektronische apparatuur Dit symbool op het product en de verpakking betekent dat dit product niet weg mag worden gegooid bij het huishoudelijk of bedrijfsafval. Sommige landen beschikken over inzamelings-

en recyclingsystemen voor elektrische en elektronische producten. Door ervoor te zorgen dat dit product op de juiste wijze wordt weggegooid, voorkomt u negatieve gevolgen voor het milieu en de volksgezondheid en bespaart u natuurlijke hulpbronnen. Gooi uw afvalproduct weg volgens de nationale en plaatselijke regelgeving. Neem contact op met Sepura of uw serviceprovider voor informatie over het weggooien van het product in uw land. Overbodige batterijen weggooien Sepura-tetra hand portables radios worden geleverd met een oplaadbare batterij. Dit symbool op de batterij en de verpakking betekent dat de batterij niet mag worden weggegooid bij het huishoudelijk of bedrijfsafval. Gooi uw lege batterijen weg volgens de nationale en plaatselijke regelgeving. Neem contact op met uw serviceprovider of Sepura voor informatie over het recyclen van batterijen in uw land. 1NL 29 PROOF 1NL Uw radio werkt op de volgende frequentiebanden op het maximale radiofrequentievermogen:

Deze radioapparatuur kan over een groter frequentiebereik werken dan de landelijke regelgeving toestaat; er gelden daarom beperkingen voor het gebruik van dit product. Verdere informatie is beschikbaar op http://www.efis.dk/, https://www.efis.dk/views2/national_frequency_table.jsp en bij de regelgevingsautoriteit van het relevante land via die links. De apparatuur moet worden gebruikt binnen de verplichte vergunningseisen opgesteld door de regelgevingsinstantie van het land. tEtRA Max. nominaal uitgangsvermogen

(W) Bluetooth zendvermogen

(dBm) (EIRP) GPs frequentie band (MHz) Wi-Fi zendvermogen

(dBm) (EIRP) Radiotype tEtRA Frequentie band

(MHz) 380-430 StP9x38 407-473 StP9x40 380-430 SC2020 403-470 SC2024 380-430 SC2120 403-470 SC2124 380-430 StP8Xx38 StP8Xx40 407-473 SrG3900 tW 380-430 SrG3900 UW 407-473 SCG2229 tU 380-470 1.8 @ 7.4VDC, 1.5a 1.8 @ 7.4VDC, 1.5a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 2.7 @ 7.4VDC, 2a 1 @ 7.6VDC, 1a 1 @ 7.6VDC, 1a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a 10 @13.2VDC, 3a Bluetooth frequentie band

(MHz) 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 N/a N/a 2402-2480 4 4 10 10 9 9 4 4 N/a N/a 7*

Wi-Fi frequentie band

(MHz) N/a N/a 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 2402-2480 N/a N/a N/a N/a 2402-2480 N/a N/a 17 17 17 17 N/a N/a N/a N/a 15*

1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610 1559-1610

*aangezien de SCG2229 is uitgerust met een antenneconnector, zijn nominale vermogens van bluetooth en wifi geleide waarden, niet eIrP. 30 PROOF stP8x series safety and compliance tHE stP8x RADIO MUst NOt BE UsED IN ENVIRONMENts ExCEEDING tHOsE LIstED ON tHE PRODUCt tECHNICAL DAtA sHEEt. Product certification Intrinsic safety Certification numbers:

IeCex: BaS 12.0001X ateX: Baseefa 12ateX0002X StP8X Additional in country intrinsic safety certificates:

Brazil: Iex 12.0081x russia: C-GB.Ha65.B.00035/19 (No 0637074) International IECEx specifications:

Gas environment: ex ib IIC t4 Gb (-20C<=ta<=+55C) Dust environment: ex ib IIIC t90C Db (-20C<=ta<=+55C) European AtEx specifications :

Gas environment: II 2G ex ib IIC t4 Gb (-20C<=ta<=+55C) Dust environment: II 2D ex ib IIIC t90C Db (-20C<=ta<=+55C) stP8x conditions for safe use Please observe these additional safety instructions for the StP8X radios. a Sepura approved intrinsically safe ateX/IeCex battery, accessory and antenna must be used with the StP8x series radios. the use of non-approved batteries, accessories and antennas may damage the product and will result in the non-compliance with regulatory requirements and product safety ratings. NeVer fit or remove the antenna, battery, Smart/microSD card or an accessory when operating in a hazardous environment. NeVer operate your radio without the ruSC cover fitted when an accessory is not fitted. When attaching the ruSC cover, tighten the screw to 0.15 Nm. When attaching an accessory, tighten the screw to 0.25 Nm to ensure that the seal is maintained between your radio and the accessory. ensure that the seal between the antenna and your radio is maintained. to secure the antenna, rotate the antenna until it is finger tight, then apply another 1/4 turn. If a Smart/microSD card is fitted, ensure that the compartment cover is secure. tighten the screw to 0.1 Nm (pinch tight). sicherheit und Vorschriftsmigkeit der stP8x-Baureihe DAs FUNKGERt stP8x DARF NICHt IN EINER UMGEBUNG EINGEsEtZt WERDEN, DEREN BEDINGUNGEN NICHt DEN IM tECHNIsCHEN DAtENBLAtt GENANNtEN ANFORDERUNGEN ENtsPRECHEN. Produktzertifizierung Eigensicherheits-Zertifizierungsnummern:

IeCex: BaS 12.0001X ateX: Baseefa 12ateX0002X russland: C-GB.Ha65.B.00035/19 (No 0637074) Zustzliche nationale Eigensicherheits Zertifizierungsnummern:

Brasilien: Iex 12.0081x 31 PROOF StP8X Internationale IECEx-spezifikationen:

angaben zu Gasen: ex ib IIC t4 Gb (-20C<=ta<=+55C) angaben zu Staub: ex ib IIIC t90C Db (-20C<=ta<=+55C) Europische AtEx-spezifikationen :

angaben zu Gasen: II 2G ex ib IIC t4 Gb (-20C<=ta<=+55C) angaben zu Staub: II 2D ex ib IIIC t90C Db (-20C<=ta<=+55C) Bedingungen fr den sicheren betrieb der stP8x-baureihe Bitte beachten Sie die zustzlichen Sicherheitshinweise fr StP8X-Funkgerte. Mit StP8x-Funkgerten mssen eigensichere (intrinsically safe) ateX/IeCex- Batterien verwendet werden. Batterie, Zubehr und antenne mssen von Sepura zugelassen sein. Der Gebrauch nicht zugelassener Batterien, Zubehrteile und antenne kann das Produkt beschdigen und fhrt zur Nichteinhaltung von Vorschriften und Sicherheitsregeln. Sie drfen NIeMaLS die antenne, Batterie, Smart/microSD-Karte oder ein Zubehrteil einsetzen bzw. montieren oder entfernen, wenn Sie das Gert in einer Gefahrenzone betreiben. Betreiben Sie Ihr Funkgert, sofern kein Zubehrteil montiert ist, NIeMaLS ohne den ruSC-Deckel. Ziehen Sie beim anbringen des ruSC-Deckels die Schraube mit 0,15 Nm fest. Beim anbringen eines Zubehrteils ziehen Sie die Schraube mit 0,25 Nm fest. So stellen Sie sicher, dass die abdichtung zwischen Ihrem Funkgert und dem Zubehrteil sicher funktioniert. Stellen Sie sicher, dass die abdichtung zwischen der antenne und dem Funkgert funktioniert. Um die antenne zu sichern, schrauben Sie sie handfest an und dann noch eine 1/4 Umdrehung weiter. Stellen Sie beim einsetzen einer Smart/microSD-Karte sicher, dass der entsprechende Deckel gut sitzt. Ziehen Sie die Schraube mit 0.1 Nm fest. scurit et conformit des radios de la srie stP8x LA RADIO stP8x NE DOIt PAs tRE UtILIsE HORs DEs ENVIRONNEMENts sPCIFIs sUR sA FICHE tECHNIQUE. Certification du produit Numros de certification de scurit intrinsque:

IeCex: BaS 12.0001X ateX: Baseefa 12ateX0002X Autres numros de certification de scurit intrinsque nationaux:

Brsil: Iex 12.0081x russie: C-GB.Ha65.B.00035/19 (No 0637074) spcifications IECEx internationales:

environnement avec prsence de gaz: ex ib IIC t4 Gb (-20C<=ta<=+55C) environnement avec prsence de poussires: ex ib IIIC t90C Db (-20C<=ta<=+55C) spcifications AtEx europennes :

environnement avec prsence de gaz: II 2G ex ib IIC t4 Gb (-20C<=ta<=+55C) environnement avec prsence de poussires:

II 2D ex ib IIIC t90C Db (-20C<=ta<=+55C) scurit dutilisation de la radio stP8x Veuillez respecter les instructions de scurit suivantes pour les radios StP8X. 32 PROOF StP8X Utilisez uniquement des batteries, accessoires et antennes ateX/IeCex intrinsquement srs et approuvs par Sepura avec les radios de la srie StP8x. toute utilisation de batteries, daccessoires et dantennes non approuvs peut endommager le produit et entranera sa non-conformit aux exigences des rglementations et aux cotes de scurit. Ninstallez ou ne retirez JaMaIS lantenne, la batterie, la carte Smart/microSD ou un autre accessoire lorsque vous utilisez la radio dans un environnement dangereux. Nutilisez JaMaIS votre radio sans la protection ruSC (rugged Side Connector) lorsquaucun accessoire nest install. Lorsque vous installez le couvercle ruSC, serrez la vis 0,15 Nm. Lorsque vous installez un accessoire, serrez la vis 0,25 Nm pour solidariser fermement votre radio et laccessoire. Vrifiez la fixation entre lantenne et votre radio. Pour fixer lantenne, serrez-la autant que vous le pouvez la main, puis faites-la encore tourner dun quart de tour. Si une carte Smart/microSD est installe, assurez-vous que la protection du compartiment est bien fixe. Serrez la vis 0,1 Nm ( la main). seguridad y cumplimiento de la serie stP8x LA RADIO stP8x NO DEBE UtILIZARsE EN ENtORNOs QUE sUPEREN LOs VALOREs INDICADOs EN LA FICHA DE DAtOs tCNICOs DEL PRODUCtO. Certificacin del producto Nmeros de certificacin de seguridad intrnseca:

IeCex: BaS 12.0001X ateX: Baseefa 12ateX0002X Cdigo adicional de los nmeros de certificacin de seguridad intrnseca del pas:

Brasil: Iex 12.0081x rusia: C-GB.Ha65.B.00035/19 (No 0637074) Especificaciones IECEx internacionales:

entorno de gas: ex ib IIC t4 Gb (-20C<=ta<=+55C) entorno de polvo: ex ib IIIC t90C Db (-20C<=ta<=+55C) Especificaciones AtEx europeas :

entorno de gas: II 2G ex ib IIC t4 Gb (-20C<=ta<=+55C) entorno de polvo: II 2D ex ib IIIC t90C Db (-20C<= ta<=+55C) Condiciones para uso seguro de stP8x tenga en cuenta estas instrucciones de seguridad adicionales para las radios StP8X. es necesario utilizar una batera ateX/IeCex intrnsecamente segura, un accesorio y una antena homologados por Sepura con las radios de la serie StP8x. el uso de bateras, accesorios y antenas no homologados puede daar el producto y dar como resultado el incumplimiento de los requisitos normativos y las clasificaciones de seguridad del producto. NUNCa instale o extraiga la antena, la batera, la tarjeta Smart/microSD o un accesorio cuando est utilizando el producto en un entorno peligroso. NUNCa ponga en funcionamiento la radio sin la tapa ruSC si no ha instalado un accesorio. al montar la tapa ruSC, apriete el tornillo a 0,15 Nm. al fijar un accesorio, apriete el tornillo a 0,25 Nm para garantizar la estanquidad entre la radio y el accesorio. asegrese de conservar la estanquidad entre la antena y la radio. Para fijar la antena, grela para apretarla a mano y, por ltimo, grela un 1/4 de vuelta ms. Si instala una tarjeta Smart/microSD, asegrese de que la tapa del compartimiento est bien fijada. apriete el tornillo a 0,1 Nm (a mano). 33 PROOF StP8X sicurezza e conformit della serie stP8x NON UtILIZZARE LA RADIO stP8x IN CONDIZIONI AMBIENtALI NON PREVIstE NELLA sCHEDA tECNICA DEL PRODOttO. Certificazione del prodotto Numeri delle certificazioni di sicurezza intrinseca:

IeCex: BaS 12.0001X ateX: Baseefa 12ateX0002X Numeri delle certificazioni nazionali aggiuntive di sicurezza intrinseca:

Brasile: Iex 12.0081x russia: C-GB.Ha65.B.00035/19 (No 0637074) specifiche IECEx internazionali:

ambiente gassoso: ex ib IIC t4 Gb (-20C<=ta<=+55C) ambiente polveroso: ex ib IIIC t90C Db (-20C<=ta<=+55C) specifiche AtEx europee :

ambiente gassoso: II 2G ex ib IIC t4 Gb (-20C<=ta<=+55C) ambiente polveroso: II 2D ex ib IIIC t90C Db (-20C<=ta<=+55C) Condizioni per lutilizzo sicuro della serie stP8x Osservare le seguenti istruzioni di sicurezza aggiuntive per le radio StP8X. Con le radio della serie StP8x, utilizzare batterie, accessori e antenne a sicurezza intrinseca ateX/IeCex approvate da Sepura. Luso di batterie, antenne e accessori non approvati pu danneggiare il prodotto e costituisce una non conformit ai requisiti normativi e alle classificazioni di sicurezza del prodotto. MaI montare o rimuovere lantenna, la batteria, la scheda Smart/microSD o gli accessori durante lutilizzo in ambienti pericolosi. MaI utilizzare la radio senza la copertura ruSC quando non montato alcun accessorio. Per montare il coperchio ruSC, serrare la vite a 0,15 Nm. Per collegare un accessorio, serrare la vite a 0,25 Nm per garantire la tenuta tra radio e accessorio. Verificare che la tenuta tra antenna e radio sia adeguata. Per fissare lantenna, ruotarla con le dita stringendola bene, quindi avvitarla di un ulteriore quarto di giro. Se si utilizza una scheda Smart/microSD, verificare che il coperchio del relativo vano sia fissato saldamente. Serrare la vite a 0,1 Nm (con una pinza). segurana e conformidade da srie stP8x O RDIO stP8x NO DEVE sER UtILIZADO EM AMBIENtEs CUJAs CARACtERstICAs ExCEDAM AQUELAs CONstANtEs NA FICHA tCNICA DO PRODUtO. Certificao do produto Nmeros de Certificao de segurana Intrnseca:

IeCex: BaS 12.0001X ateX: Baseefa 12ateX0002X Adicional aos nmeros de certificao de segurana intrnseca do pas:

Brasile: Iex 12.0081x rssia: C-GB.Ha65.B.00035/19 (No 0637074) Especificaes IECEx internacionais:

ambiente de gs: ex ib IIC t4 Gb (-20C<=ta<=+55C) ambiente de poeira: ex ib IIIC t90C Db (-20C<=ta<=+55C) 34 PROOF StP8X Especificaes AtEx europeias :

ambiente de gs: II 2G ex ib IIC t4 Gb (-20C<=ta<=+55C) ambiente de poeira: II 2D ex ib IIIC t90C Db (-20C<=ta<=+55C) Condies para utilizao segura do stP8x Observe as seguintes instrues adicionais de segurana para os rdios StP8X. Com os rdios da srie StP8X, devem ser utilizados bateria, antena e acessrios ateX/IeCex intrinsecamente seguros aprovados pela Sepura. a utilizao de baterias, acessrios e antenas no aprovados poder danificar o produto e resultar na no conformidade com as normas regulatrias e com as classificaes de segurana do produto. NUNCa instale ou remova a antena, a bateria, o carto Smart/microSD ou um acessrio ao operar em um ambiente perigoso. NUNCa opere o rdio sem a tampa ruSC encaixada, quando um acessrio no estiver instalado. ao acoplar a tampa ruSC, aperte o parafuso com torque de 0,15 Nm. ao acoplar um acessrio, aperte o parafuso com torque de 0,25 Nm para garantir que seja mantida a vedao entre seu rdio e o acessrio. Garanta que a vedao entre a antena e seu rdio seja mantida. Para prender a antena, gire-a at que fique firme apenas com a presso da mo, e depois aplique mais 1/4 de volta. Se for utilizado um carto Smart/microSD, garanta que a tampa do compartimento esteja presa. aperte o parafuso com torque de 0,1 Nm (apertando firmemente com os dedos). Veiligheid en naleving stP8x-serie DE stP8x-RADIO MAG NIEt WORDEN GEBRUIKt IN OMGEVINGEN DIE OP HEt tECHNIsCHE GEGEVENsBLAD VAN HEt PRODUCt stAAN AANGEGEVEN. Productcertificering Intrinsieke veiligheidscertificeringsnummers:

IeCex: BaS 12.0001X ateX: Baseefa 12ateX0002X Aanvullende landelijke intrinsieke veiligheidscertificeringsnummers:

Brazilie: Iex 12.0081x rusland: C-GB.Ha65.B.00035/19 (No 0637074) Internationale IECEx-specificaties:

Gasrijke omgeving: ex ib IIC t4 Gb (-20C<=ta<=+55C) Stoffige omgeving: ex ib IIIC t90C Db (-20C<=ta<=+55C) Europese AtEx-specificaties :

Gasrijke omgeving: II 2G ex ib IIC t4 Gb (-20C<=ta<=+55C) Stoffige omgeving: II 2D ex ib IIIC t90C Db (-20C<=ta<=+55C) Voorwaarden voor veilig gebruik van de stP8x Volg deze aanvullende veiligheidsinstructies op voor StP8X-radios. er moeten door Sepura goedgekeurde intrinsiek veilige ateX/IeCex-batterijen, accessoires en antennes worden gebruikt met de radios uit de StP8x-serie. Het gebruik van niet-goedgekeurde batterijen, accessoires en antennes kan het product beschadigen en resulteert in het niet naleven van de wettelijke vereisten en productveiligheidswaarderingen. Plaats of verwijder NOOIt de antenne, batterij, Smart-/micro SD-kaart of een accessoire als er in een gevaarlijke omgeving wordt gewerkt. 35 PROOF StP8X Gebruik uw radio NOOIt zonder dat het ruSC-klepje is geplaatst als er geen accessoire is aangesloten. Draai de schroef aan tot 0,15 Nm als u het ruSC- klepje aanbrengt. Draai de schroef aan tot 0,25 Nm als u een accessoire aanbrengt, om ervoor te zorgen dat de afdichting tussen uw radio en het accessoire behouden blijft. Zorg ervoor dat de afdichting tussen de antenne en uw radio behouden blijft. Om de antenne vast te zetten, draait u deze met de hand vast en draait u vervolgens nog een kwartslag. als er een Smart-/micro SD-kaart is geplaatst, controleert u of het klepje goed afgesloten is. Draai de schroef stevig vast tot 0,1 Nm. 36 PROOF suppliers Declaration of Conformity (sDoC) 47 CFR 2.1077 Compliance Information Model SC2028 SC2124 SCG2229 XX6SCG2229 FCC ID XX6SC2028 XX6SC2124 Responsible Party Powertrunk Inc. 66 York Street, Jersey City, NJ 07302 email: sales@powertrunk.com FCC Compliance statement:

this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 37 PROOF a Hytera company 9000 Cambridge research Park Beach Drive, Waterbeach Cambridge, CB25 9tL United Kingdom sepura.com PROOF

Mobile Radio Full Installation Guide SCG22 Series Transceiver Original Instructions: ENGLISH Document Number: SPR-DOC-04384 Issue 1.0_W Copyright Sepura Limited 20022020 All rights reserved. This document is intended for the use of Sepura Limited customers and/or other parties only for the purposes of the agreement or arrangement under which this document is submitted, and no part of it may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or means without the prior written permission of Sepura Limited. Disclaimer Sepuras policy is to continually improve its products. The features and facilities described in this document were correct at publication, but are subject to change without notice. 9000 Cambridge Research Park Contact Details Sepura Limited Beach Drive Waterbeach Cambridge CB25 9TL United Kingdom sepura.com Contents Safety Information .......................................................................... 2 Exposure to RF Energy ........................................................ 2 Operation .............................................................................. 2 Regulatory Compliance ........................................................ 2 Unpacking ............................................................................. 2 SCG22 Model Variant Options ...................................................... 2 Console Options and Accessories ............................................... 2 Isolating Power ..................................................................... 2 Mobile Radio Internal Back-up Battery ........................................ 3 Installation Precautions ................................................................. 3 Certified Antenna Types........................................................ 3 RF Energy ............................................................................ 4 Specialised Vehicles ............................................................. 4 Installation Guidelines and Recommendations .......................... 4 Operator Access and Safety ................................................. 4 Temperature and Orientation Considerations ............................. 5 Location Considerations ....................................................... 5 Connector Sealing ................................................................ 6 RF Compatibility Checks ............................................................... 6 SCG22 Variants .............................................................................. 7 Parts Supplied ................................................................................ 7 Additional Equipment .................................................................... 7 Connecting Leads ................................................................. 7 Mounting Kits ........................................................................ 7 SCG22 Components and Connections ........................................ 8 Rear Panel ............................................................................ 8 Front Panel ........................................................................... 8 Fitting a SIM Card ........................................................................... 9 DIN Slot Mounting Considerations ............................................... 9 Front Mounting the SCC3 Console ............................................. 10 SCG22 Mounting Kit Options ...................................................... 13 SCG22 DIN Mount Kit ........................................................ 13 Mounting Bracket ................................................................ 15 SCG22 U Bracket Mount Kit ............................................... 15 SCG22 Cabling and Connections ............................................... 16 Loudspeaker Connections .................................................. 16 DC Supply Connection ....................................................... 16 Antenna Connections ......................................................... 17 Cabling and Connections Overview - All Models ................ 18 Cabling and Connections to an SRG Installation ............... 19 USB Programming Lead (300-02009) ................................ 20 SCG Power/Ignition Lead (300-02010) .............................. 20 Loudspeaker and IO Connection Options .......................... 20 Programmable I/O .............................................................. 22 LED Indicator ...................................................................... 22 SCC3 Console .............................................................................. 23 SCC3 Connections and Cabling ......................................... 23 SCC3 Mounting Options ..................................................... 24 Handset-Based Console (HBC3) ................................................. 30 Configuring the HBC3 ......................................................... 32 Fist Microphone/Handset ............................................................ 32 Remote Microphone and Switches Installation ................... 32 Programming/Customising the SCG22 ...................................... 33 Programming ...................................................................... 33 Customising ........................................................................ 33 Connecting a Remote SIM Reader .............................................. 34 Mobile Data Terminal ................................................................... 34 1 Safety Information READ THE TETRA PRODUCT SAFETY GUIDE (SPR-DOC-00170) SUPPLIED WITH THE SCG22 FOR IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT SAFELY OPERATING THIS PRODUCT. ALWAYS POWER OFF the mobile radio in environments where RF wireless devices could potentially cause an explosion. Potentially hazardous areas are not always signed. Obey all signs and instructions relating to the usage of RF wireless devices. DO NOT touch the antenna when the mobile radio is powered on. In order to reduce the risk of RF burns, the antenna must always remain connected when the equipment is powered on. DO NOT connect or disconnect the antenna whilst the equipment is powered on. Potential risk of burn injury. DO NOT touch the heatsink fins when the transceiver is powered on. ONLY fit an approved accessory. If a non-approved accessory is fitted, it may compromise the product safety ratings and may void any product warranty. DO NOT attempt to dismantle this product. Servicing and repairs to this product must be performed by trained service technicians at Sepura approved service centres. Exposure to RF Energy Sepura designs and manufactures products to meet strict guidelines and international standards relating to Radio Frequency (RF) energy and the potential health risks associated with using RF wireless devices. If you have any concerns relating to long term health risks associated with using RF wireless devices, you should obtain advice from your employer. Operation It is the responsibility of the person operating the product to ensure that it is operated safely at all times, and that local laws and regulations governing the usage of Radio Frequency (RF) wireless devices are observed. Obey all signs and instructions relating to the usage of RF wireless devices. Regulatory Compliance This product must be installed in accordance with national and local radio communications authorities and/or Health and Safety regulations. This product may affect public broadcast radio, security code alarm systems and some engine management systems. 2 Unpacking Unpack the container(s) and ensure that all items specified on any delivery note are present and received in good condition. If any of the goods are damaged or not supplied, contact your service provider within 10 days of receipt of equipment. Consoles or accessories are not shipped in the container with the SCG22 mobile radio due to the many combinations available. Note that the accessory pack must be specified at the time of ordering. ALWAYS keep documentation supplied with the product for future reference and pass on to any person who is responsible for operating the product. SCG22 Model Variant Options The SCG22 mobile radio is supplied in model variants, with different functions and connections to suit the installation. This installation guide describes all the functionality and connections available, highlighting options where appropriate. Console Options and Accessories There are many options available for the installation of the SCG22. Depending on the model variant, the SCG22 can accommodate up to two remote consoles, for example an SCC3 and an HBC3, with additional accessories such as a fist microphone or handset connected through the SCC3. The mobile radio is designed to be installed within a vehicle, on a motorcycle or as a standalone unit within an office environment using a Desk Mount Unit

(DMU). There are a number of vehicle, motorcycle and desktop accessories that can be attached to the SCC3. Refer to the installation instructions supplied with these products. See our website for more information (sepura.com). Isolating Power Vehicle Installation CAUTION! The fuse in the power supply line must be used as the isolation mechanism and removed before any connections are made to the SCG22. Desk Mount Unit (DMU) Installation CAUTION! The power supply connector must be used as the isolation mechanism and must be removed before any connections are made to the SCG22. Mobile Radio Internal Back-up Battery Contact the vehicle manufacturer if you are not certain if it is safe to install this product. CAUTION! The SGC22 contains a backup battery. The battery must not be replaced by the user. The equipment must be disposed of using correct WEEE requirements. The equipment must not be dismantled, or left in conditions outside of the stated environmental storage and operating specifications. The SCG22 mobile radio has a small rechargeable internal back-up battery. This battery powers the internal Real Time Clock in the event that the main power to the product is removed. The battery may have discharged during the manufacturing process or if the product has been in storage for some time. When the product is connected to its main supply, the back-up battery will charge regardless of whether the product is powered on or not. The period for a full charge may be up to 48 hours. Installation Precautions WARNING! DO NOT smoke or use naked flames when working near the vehicles fuel system. WARNING! This equipment is not suitable for use in locations where children are likely to be present. CAUTION! Only use hand tools and do not over-tighten screws and fixings. CAUTION! Risk of product damage. When carrying out installation requiring the removal of product covers, ESD precautions must be taken. READ ALL THE INSTRUCTIONS before attempting to install the SCG22. If you do not understand the instructions, STOP and contact your service provider or Sepura for assistance. Always read the vehicle manufacturers handbook before starting to install the product. Installation of this product may affect the vehicle electrical systems. CAUTION! Prolonged operation of the SCG22 with the vehicle engine powered OFF, may drain the vehicles battery. Disconnect the vehicles battery before commencing installation (be aware of the effect on the public broadcast radio security code, alarm systems and some engine management systems). Ensure that fuel lines, hydraulic lines and existing cables are not damaged during installation. Ensure that the installation does not impede the normal operation of the vehicle, including the operation of any safety device, e.g., airbags and seatbelt tensioners. Speed control, fuel injection, anti-lock braking, navigation, air bag and other electronic systems are relatively immune to RF interference. However, if difficulty is experienced or faulty operation is suspected, consult the vehicles dealer. ALWAYS perform RF compatibility checks after installation. See "RF Compatibility Checks" on page 6. Certified Antennas The SCG2229 is certified for use with a 2 dBi gain Bluetooth / Wi-Fi antenna and a 7 dBi TETRA antenna. Higher gain antennas should not be used to ensure compliance with RF field strength limits. Minimum distances from antenna to users are given in the following table:

Region Occupational Minimum Distance General Public Minimum Distance Canada 0.4 m USA 1 m EU / UK 0.5 m 1.2 m 1 m 1 m 3 RF Energy Motor vehicle manufacturers make use of electronic vehicle control systems, e.g., ignition, anti-skid devices etc. The following information is supplied to ensure that there is no radio frequency interference effect upon the vehicle's electronic systems. To prevent interference with any other electronic systems in the vehicle, the antenna should be mounted as far away as possible from these units and their associated cables. Refer to the vehicle manufacturer's handbook to locate these items. Consult the manufacturer's handbook to establish whether it is practical to disconnect the vehicle battery without affecting devices, such as central locking mechanisms, engine management computers, security-coded in-car entertainment units etc. Specialised Vehicles The installation on certain specialised vehicles, such as fuel tankers and fire-

fighting vehicles may be subject to additional safety regulations which must be closely observed. Prior to commencing an installation on such a vehicle, make sure that any relevant safety regulations are fully understood. Petrol/Diesel Powered Vehicles Ensure that there are no petrol/diesel leaks before commencing an installation involving the use of electric tools as these can produce sparks. Ensure that no damage to the fuel tank or fuel lines occurs when drilling holes. Gas Powered Vehicles Before installation starts ensure that there are no gas leaks before commencing an installation involving the use of electric tools as these can produce sparks. DO NOT USE A NAKED FLAME. Butane and propane are heavier than air, so if there is a leak the gas may lay on the floor of the boot. The gas is detectable by its characteristic smell. The point of escaping gas may show signs of frosting. The vehicle owner should arrange for the leak to be repaired before the installation is commenced. Ensure that no damage to the gas tank or gas lines occurs when drilling holes. Supply cables should be run, if possible, on the opposite side of the vehicle to the gas fuel pipe. Vehicles Fitted with Electronic Devices In theory, any vehicle electronic systems could be affected by the presence of an RF field of sufficient intensity, which when detected may cause the device to malfunction. The source of RF may be an SCG22 installed in the vehicle itself or one operating in another vehicle in close proximity. If interaction did occur, loss of control could result for the duration of the transmission. In the interests of safety, the user must be asked to test the vehicle when the installation is complete. Installation Guidelines and Recommendations This installation guide provides basic information about installing the mobile radio into land based vehicles (not marine based vehicles or motorcycles). The installation of this product must be performed by a suitably skilled and technical competent person such as a qualified vehicle installation technician. This product can be installed into various makes and models of vehicles and therefore these instructions are not a definitive guide to installing the product into vehicles. The installation should comply with FCS1362 CODE OF PRACTICE for the installation of mobile radio and related ancillary equipment in land based vehicles (see http://www.fcs.org.uk). Before you start the installation, ensure that you have all the accessories, including cables. Operator Access and Safety Install the console in a position where the operator has easy access to the controls and the microphone when wearing a seat belt. The controls must also be within the driver's normal field of vision. DO NOT fit the console above the driver's or passenger's head, or in other positions where the console would become a hazard in an accident or is at risk of damage from any occupant or carried items. The microphone/handset hook mount must be fitted such that the microphone/

handset is easily accessible and the cable cannot interfere with the vehicle control, or with the driver's feet. Preferably, the loudspeaker should be installed such that the grille is facing the operator, but out of sight of the remote hands-free microphone (if fitted). 4 Temperature and Orientation Considerations WARNING! The heatsink may become hot after long periods of transmission. Ensure accidental contact with the heatsink is not possible. Reliable transmit operation will be achieved if the SCG22 is mounted such that the heat sink fins receive a free flow of air, i.e., if it is mounted within 15 of the normal vertical orientation with no restriction to the flow of convected air. For any other orientation, varying degrees of degradation may result. Fitting the SCG22 or console on top of the dashboard is not recommended. Location Considerations The SCG22 must be fitted within the interior of the vehicle

(excluding the engine compartment) and protected from the external environment and vehicle cleaning operations. Locate the SCG22 away from sources of strong electromagnetic interference including cables powering the starter motor or the electric traction motor in electric vehicles. Ensure that the installation does not impede the normal operation of the vehicle, including the operation of any safety devices such as airbags and seatbelt retainers. The SCG22 should be positioned so that it does not obstruct, or become at risk of damage from, any occupant or carried items. Mount the SCG22 with the top of the heatsink facing upwards as shown. Protect the rear connectors and connecting cables from the risk of impact damage. Exposure to direct sunlight may cause the temperature to rise to over 80 C (176F). Prolonged exposure to these temperatures may damage the equipment and invalidate any product warranty. Do not mount the SCG22 close to a heat source, e.g., in front of a heater vent. Ensure the heatsink fins are in free air as much as possible. If a connector is not in use, the dust covers or seal bungs provided must be fitted to reduce the risk of damage or dust/moisture ingress. Ensure sufficient space is provided above the installation to allow fitment and removal of the SCG22. 5 Connector Sealing To maintain the product's IP54 rating to protect against dust and moisture ingress, the SCG22 must be fitted with connector seals. Any unused connectors must be fitted with a sealing bung or cap. An IP54 Sealing Kit is provided with the SCG22 consisting of all the sealing parts required. D-Connectors 1. Carefully peel the adhesive backing from a D-sub seal. 2. Fit the seal over a D-connector in the correct orientation and press firmly to attach. 3. If the D-connector is currently unused, fit an appropriate seal bung

(male or female) fully into the seal housing. Other Connectors If the SMA or SMC sockets are unused, fit the cover seals provided 6 If the RJ45 socket is unused, fit the bung provided, observing the correct orientation RF Compatibility Checks On completion of the installation, the following checks must be carried out if the vehicle is equipped with electronic anti-skid, electronic ignition or engine management systems. WARNING! In the event of an apparent malfunction in the braking or any other systems during RF compatibility checks, the SCG22 installation should be rendered inoperative and the vehicle manufacturer should be contacted before any further use is made of the SCG22 installation. Unqualified persons should not attempt to modify these units in any way. The transmitter should be operated only for the time required to make an observation. Ideally these checks should be performed on the TETRA system. If this is not possible, perform the checks in DMO. An assistant will be required for the following checks:

1. With the vehicle stationary and the engine running at fast idle, operate the transmitter. Check that the brake lights do not illuminate and that the engine continues to run normally, i.e., with no surging or cutting out. 2. Operate the brake pedal, key the transmitter and check that the brake lights do not extinguish. 3. Put the vehicle into motion at a speed of 15 25 km/h (10 15 mph), key the transmitter and operate the brake pedal simultaneously. Check that the braking action is normal and that the engine does not surge or cut out. SCG22 Variants The following variants of the product are available:

Single Console Single Console + SD Card Single Console + BT WiFi +SD Card Single Console + BT WiFi + SD Card + ESM Dual Console + BT WiFi + SD Card Dual Console + BT WiFi + SD Card + ESM Parts Supplied The following items are supplied with the SCG22. Additional Equipment Connecting Leads Part no. Description 300-02007 SCG Power / Ign / IO Adapter Lead 300-02009 SCG USB Programming Lead 300-02010 SCG Power / Ignition Lead 300-02011 SCG Loudspeaker / IO Lead 300-02012 SCG Loudspeaker / IO USB Host Lead 300-02014 SCG Expansion Board Loudspeaker / 8 GPIO Lead 300-02015 SCG Ethernet Sealing Kit Part no. Description Qty Mounting Kits 300-02010 300-02011 300-00086 SCG Power / Ignition Lead SCG Loudspeaker / IO Lead Transceiver Plate Mount Kit SPR-DOC-04439 Mobile Radio Compact Installation Guide SPR-DOC-00170 Product Safety Guide IP54 Connector Sealing Kit 1 1 1 1 1 1 Part no. Description 300-02050 SCG22 Local Console Adaptor Kit 300-02051 SCG22 DIN Mount Kit 300-02052 SCG22 U Bracket Mount Kit 300-01117 Console Dash-Mount Kit 300-00804 Console DIN Fitting Kit 300-00784 Console AMPS Backplate 300-00629 AMPS Fitting Kit 300-00860 AMPS Base Plate (1" ball) 300-00861 Handlebar Bracket 300-00862 RAM Double Socket Arm 7 SCG22 Components and Connections Rear Panel Front Panel Component/Connector Connector Type Description TETRA Antenna LED Indicator Connection for a suitable external TETRA antenna Illuminates red when the SCG22 has booted up I/O1/SPK1/PRG 9 Way D-sub, Female 4 Console 1 15 way D-sub, Female First console loudspeaker, USB programming , 2 GPIO lines, PEI and packet data over USB First Console (HBC3/SCC3) supporting radio programming, PEI, packet data and remote SIM card reader over serial interface 5 GNSS Antenna Connection for a suitable external GNSS antenna (e.g., GPS) Bluetooth & Wi-Fi Antenna*

Connection for a suitable external Bluetooth/Wi-Fi antenna 15 way D-sub, Male Second console loudspeaker and 8 GPIO lines (controlled by AppSPACE only) BNC N/A SMC SMA RJ45 10 Console 2*

15 way D-sub, Female Second Console (HBC3/SCC3) supporting radio programming, PEI, Packet data and Remote SIM card reader over Serial interface 9 Way D-sub, Male DC power input to the SCG22 with ignition sense (e.g. from a vehicle) 11 SIM Card Cover N/A

*Optional connections depending on the model variant. I/O2/SPK2*

Ethernet*

Power 1 2 3 6 7 8 9 8 Fitting a SIM Card DIN Slot Mounting Considerations 1. Undo the cover securing screw and tilt open the SIM card cover. PZ-2 CAUTION! Ensure there is enough depth in the DIN slot to accommodate the SCG22 and connected cables without causing damage. If the SCG22 is mounted into a DIN slot, consideration must be given to the depth available to safely accommodate the radio and any connecting cables. If there is a depth restriction in the DIN slot:

The screw is retained on the cover. 2. Carefully fit the SIM card into the slot, pushing in fully until it clicks into position. CAUTION! To maintain the product IP seal rating, ensure that the SIM card cover is refitted and the securing screw is fully hand-tightened. If there are no depth restrictions:

Note: For installations where a remote SIM reader is used, see the section "Connecting a Remote SIM Reader" on page 34. Fit the longer clips, supplied with the DIN Slot Mount Kit 9 3. Carefully pull the fascia cover away from the SCG22. Apply even pressure to ensure the D-connector PCB is removed without damaging the connectors. Front Mounting the SCC3 Console The SCC3 console can be fitted directly to the front panel of the SCG22 using the SCG22 Local Console Adaptor Kit (300-02050). The combined unit can then be mounted using one of the bracket options, or into a DIN mount slot in the vehicle. Note: For installations where the SCC3 is mounted separately to the SCG22, see the section "SCC3 Mounting Options" on page 24. 1. Undo the SIM card cover screw. The screw is retained on the cover. PZ-2 2. Remove the four front fascia fixing screws and retain them for re-use. 4. If the SCG22 is to be fitted in a DIN slot with depth restrictions, an optional bezel is provided in the kit to act as a spacer. Slide the bezel over the front panel of the SCG22 in the orientation shown. 10 T10 5. Fit the connecting cable supplied in the mounting kit to the front connector on the SCG22. Ensure the connector is firmly clipped in position. CAUTION! ESD precautions must be taken during replacement of the rear cover. 7. Remove the eight screws on the rear of the SCC3 and remove the existing cover. Retain the screws for re-use. IMPORTANT! Fit a SIM card before fitting the SCC3 adapter plate. The SIM card is not accessible after the SCC3 has been fitted. 6. Fit the SCC3 adapter plate using the four screws removed in step 2. T10 MAX 0.5 Nm 11 CAUTION! To maintain the product IP seal rating, care must be taken not to damage the rear cover seal. Do not stretch the seal when refitting. 8. Carefully remove the rear cover seal from the existing cover. Fit the seal into the channel on the adaptor rear cover included with the mounting kit. 10. Fit the other end of the cable to the socket on the of the SCC3. 9. Fit the new rear cover to the SCC3 using the eight screws removed in step 6. 11. Fit the SCC3 on to the adapter plate, taking care to ensure the cable is neatly folded in the seal housing and does not get trapped. Secure in position using the four screws provided. 12 T10 12. If fitted, slide the optional bezel up to the rear cover of the SCC3. SCG22 Mounting Kit Options The SCG22 can be mounted using a range of options to suit the installation. The mounting options can be used with or without the SCC3 console fitted to the front panel of the SCG22. SCG22 DIN Mount Kit 1. Fit the appropriate length DIN mount clips to both sides of the SCG22 and secure in position with the screws provided. PZ01 Short clips Long clips 13 2. Fit the DIN cage into the slot within the vehicle. 3. When all the cabling has been routed and connected to the rear panel of the SCG22, slide the unit fully into the DIN cage. 14 To remove, use the DIN release tools (provided) SCG22 U Bracket Mount Kit The SCG22 can be fitted to the optional U Bracket Mount Kit (300-

02052), providing a flexible mounting solution to a flat surface. If the SCC3 console is fitted to the front panel of the SCG22, the bracket can be tilted to provide an optimum viewing angle. 1. Fix the bracket securely in position, using an appropriate number and type of fixing screws for the surface material. Mounting Bracket CAUTION! Ensure fixing screws are of an appropriate type and length for the surface material the bracket is being mounted on to. If the SCG22 needs to be installed on a flat surface, such as in a car boot, the fixed mounting bracket option supplied (in the box) can be used. Fit the mounting plate to the bottom of the SCG22 using the four screws supplied. Secure the mounting bracket and SCG22 assembly to the desired surface using four screws. The bracket can be used as a template to mark and pre-drill the holes if required. IMPORTANT! Allow sufficient space around the SCG22 for cables and access to connectors 205 190 179 15 61 122 91 133 Rear connector locations 149 All dimensions are in millimetres Outline of SCG22 profile. Drill four holes at the fixing centres indicated to suit the fastener type (5 mm MAX diameter) 29 Front connector location 2. Lower the transceiver into the bracket and align the fixing holes. Fit the two adjustment knobs and tighten at the desired angle. 15 SCG22 Cabling and Connections WARNING! 12V supply leads, antenna cables and speaker wiring must be routed as far away as possible from gas or fuel lines, and any in-vehicle electrical wiring. This reduces the risk to safety in the event of a leak. CAUTION! Ensure that the cables are routed so that they are kept clear of any existing vehicle system cabling. Secure all cabling to eliminate the possibility of damage by sharp edges or moving parts. All cabling should be hidden and not left loose. CAUTION! Ensure that the colour console cable and any loudspeaker cables are routed so that they are kept well clear of antenna cables and of any other electronic devices such as electromagnetic systems or AM/FM radios. Note: Both the remote console and loudspeaker extension cables are colour coded blue at the SCG22 end to aid installation before the SCG22 is installed. DC Supply Connection CAUTION! The transceiver is designed for nominal 12V negative earth systems. DO NOT use on other supply systems because this will result in damage to the product. The following lead options provide connection to the DC supply:

SCG Power / Ignition Lead SCG Power / Ign / IO Adapter Lead 16 It is recommended that the power cable runs are kept as short as possible. In a new installation where the SCG Power / Ignition Lead is used:

1. With the SCG22 end of the power connector resting in its intended final position, route the wires to the vehicle battery, threading the cable through the bulkheads if necessary (include the blue wire where ignition switching is not required, see 3 below). 2. The positive power line must include a fuse as close as possible to the power source. The negative power line must be connected close to the battery-to-vehicle-body connection (not directly to the battery) and must not include a fuse. 3. The blue wire provides an ignition sensing input. If ignition switching is required, trim the wire to length so that it can be wired, via a fuse, to the ignition switch, using the splicing connector provided. Otherwise this wire must be connected, via a fuse, to the permanent positive supply. A fuse must always be fitted close to where the wire is connected. 4. Check the installation and fit the blade fuses. Fuse rating:

Positive supply 10A, Ignition sense 1A (Automotive 19 mm blade type - Littelfuse ATO). Loudspeaker Connections The following lead options provide connection to loudspeakers:

SCG Loudspeaker / IO Lead SCG Loudspeaker / IO USB Host Lead SCG Expansion Board Loudspeaker / 8 GPIO Lead CAUTION! The transceiver will be damaged if either of the loudspeaker conductors (grey twin conductor cable) is connected to ground. If the loudspeaker output is to be connected to other audio systems, an audio isolation transformer must be used. Digital I/O Connections The following lead options provide programmable IO connection lines:

Antenna Connections SCG Power / Ign / IO Adapter Lead SCG Loudspeaker / IO Lead SCG Loudspeaker / IO USB Host Lead SCG Expansion Board Loudspeaker / 8 GPIO Lead If any of these IO connection options are to be used, see the section

"Programmable I/O" on page 22. CAUTION! If not used, fold and tie any unterminated IO line wires so that they are tidy and cannot make electrical connection with other components or conductive surfaces. USB Connections A host* connection lead is available for connecting approved USB devices:

SCG Loudspeaker / IO USB Host Lead CAUTION! *Do not exceed the maximum current rating when powering USB devices. Ethernet Connection (optional) The SCG Ethernet connector provides an additional connection for data. WARNING! Observe all safety warnings relating to the location and use of the antennas. CAUTION! To maintain an IP54 rating, the BNC, SMC and SMA connectors must provide a seal. TETRA Antenna For best all round performance of the product, the antenna should be fitted on the centre of the vehicle roof. Alternative positions, such as wing mounting, will give degraded performance. The coaxial feeder should be secured along its length to eliminate the possibility of damage by sharp edges or moving parts. GNSS Antenna Installation The SCG22 can be licensed to activate the GNSS antenna socket. Please note that the transceiver tracks GLONASS and GPS satellites simultaneously. See customer support bulletin CUS-14-2045. The antenna unit connects to a SMC connector on the rear panel of the transceiver and should, ideally, be mounted on the highest point of the vehicle (i.e., roof) with an uninterrupted view of the sky, and as far from the TETRA antenna as possible. For mounting, follow the manufacturers installation instructions. It is recommended to fit the GNSS antenna connector before connecting the Remote Console Cable. An active antenna is recommended, the supply of which is on the centre pin, 5 V nominal, 40 mA maximum. This supply feed is short circuit protected. Bluetooth/Wi-Fi Antenna Installation (optional) If a Bluetooth/Wi-Fi receiver is fitted at the time of manufacture, a Bluetooth/Wi-Fi antenna socket will be fitted. The antenna unit connects to a SMA connector on the rear panel of the transceiver and should, ideally, be mounted on the highest point of the vehicle (i.e., roof), and as far from the TETRA antenna as possible. For mounting, follow the manufacturers installation instructions. It is recommended to fit the Bluetooth/Wi-Fi antenna connector before connecting the Remote Console Cable. 17 Cabling and Connections Overview - All Models 18 Cabling and Connections to an SRG Installation If the vehicle was previously fitted with an SRG mobile radio installation, the SCG22 can be connected to the existing SRG power cable using one of the optional adapter cables available. Existing ignition, IO and loudspeaker functions from the current installation will be retained. SCG Power / Ign / IO Adapter Lead (300-02007) SRG I/O Compatibility Only two of the existing SRG I/O lines are connected through the adapter lead and available for use with the SCG22. The I/O lines must be configured as shown to function correctly. SCG22 I/O I/O 0 an output must be configured as on the SCG22 I/O 0 I/O 1 as an must be configured input on the SCG22 I/O 1 SRG I/O Pink: Output 1 Light Green: Input 3 (not compatible) Yellow: Input 2 (not compatible) Orange: Input 1 19 USB Programming Lead (300-02009) The lead provides a USB slave connection for programming the SCG22. USB OTG USB Type A Plug (Slave) SCG Power/Ignition Lead (300-02010) The lead provides power for the SCG22. An ignition sense wire is also provided for connection to the vehicle ignition system. For important information about installing and connecting the lead see the section "DC Supply Connection" on page 16. Loudspeaker and IO Connection Options Different variants of Loudspeaker/IO leads are available to suit specific installation requirements. These include options for USB programming and connecting approved USB devices. SCG Loudspeaker / IO Lead (300-02011) 10A 1A Red Black Blue Vehicle +VE Vehicle -VE Ignition Sense Loudspeaker 1 output Grey Grey/Black Pink/White Orange/White I/O 0 I/O 1 20 SCG Loudspeaker / IO USB Host Lead (300-02012)

*USB 2.0 Host connector Type A - provides power to devices (5VDC at 0.5A max). SCG Expansion Board Loudspeaker / 8 GPIO Lead (300-02014) If the optional expansion board is fitted to the SCG22, an additional connector (I/O 2) provides connection for a second loudspeaker and 8 GPIO lines. Pink/White I/O 0 I/O 1 Orange/White USB Type A Socket (Host)*

Grey Grey/Black USB OTG Loudspeaker 1 output I/O 0 I/O 1 I/O 2 I/O 3 I/O 4 I/O 5 I/O 6 I/O 7 Pink/White Orange/White Orange Turquoise Pink Yellow Violet Violet/White Grey Grey/Black Loudspeaker 2 output 21 Programmable I/O The SCG22 supports the following programmable digital I/O lines, depending on the variant:

Hardware Characteristics for the I/O Lines The following characteristics apply to all the individual I/O lines, dependent on whether they are configured as inputs or outputs:

GPIO 1 Connector Two I/O lines available GPIO 2 Connector Eight I/O lines available Configuration Performance Each individual I/O line can be configured as either an input or an output, as required in the installation. Input The following example functions may be allocated on the input lines:

VIH min = 2.0V VIL max = 0.8V Protected against accidental application of external supply voltage, 15.6 V maximum Assertion time: >100ms Open drain, active low Max sink current = 500mA Max external voltage = 15.8V Internally protected against inductive loads, and with a re-settable fuse VOL max = 200mV @ 0.5A LED Indicator When power is applied to the SCG22 and it is running (booted up), the LED indicator on the rear panel illuminates red. The following example functions may be allocated to an output line:

Output External Alarm Input External Input Triggered Status Messages Mute the loudspeaker Trigger the radio to switch stack Change talk group remotely External Alert Output Status Message Triggered External Outputs Switch on emergency vehicle lights Operate a vehicle horn or siren Open an automated gate or barrier For details of how to program the functions refer to the Radio Manager documentation. For details of the signals and their characteristics, see the table in the next section. WARNING! To control devices from the programmable outputs which require more than 0.5 A, use a suitable automotive relay to ensure correct operation. Connect the relay coil between the output wire and the vehicle positive supply. The device must be protected by an appropriate fuse in its positive supply. Check with the local regulatory authority where the outputs are used to drive external alert devices such as horns or sirens. 22 This is particularly useful in installations where the SCG22 is used without a console connected and there is no other visual indicator. SCC3 Console Cabling the SCC3 The SCG22 can accommodate up to two SCC3 consoles, or a combination of an SCC3 console and an HBC3 handset-based console. CAUTION! ESD precautions must be taken during replacement of the rear cover. WARNING! Before starting to install the SCC3 console, see the section "Installation Precautions" on page 3. SCC3 Connections and Cabling WARNING! Ensure that the transceiver is powered OFF before making any connections to the SCC3. IMPORTANT! If the SCC3 is mounted directly to the SCG22 the internal connectors are not accessible. The SCC3 has four internal connectors that are used to provide connection to the transceiver and accessories as shown:

1. Connect the colour console cable into the connector marked TRANSCEIVER on the SCC3. Press the strain relief grommet into the recess in the channel. Connect the 16-way D-type connector to either the Console 1 connector on the rear panel, or the optional Console 2 connector on the front panel of the SCG22. See the section "Cabling and Connections Overview - All Models" on page 18. Note: If the SCC3 is being fitted with the DIN Mount Kit, proceed to the section "DIN Mount Kit" on page 26 for details on routing and securing the cables. 2. Connect all other accessories to the SCC3. 3. Route the cables through the channels on the internal moulding. Fit the split bung and the cable tie (supplied) around the cables (as shown). Tighten the cable tie behind the bung to secure the cables and allow slack at the 10-way plug termination. Connector Device AAI1 (Audio Accessory Interface 1) Remote Microphone and Switches OR Handset/Microphone AAI2 (Audio Accessory Interface 2) Handset/Microphone TRANSCEIVER SCG22 DDC (Dedicated Data Connector) Mobile Data Terminal (MDT) 1 2 3 4 CAUTION! Cables must be dressed correctly using the channels to prevent damage. Press the cable bung into the recess in the channel. Fit the bungs provided into any unused channels. Note: If a handset or fist-microphone accessory is used, the hands free kit must be plugged into the Audio Accessory Interface 1 connector (back left) to allow all cables to be routed correctly. 23 SCC3 Mounting Options There are a number of options available for mounting the SCC3 console within the vehicle, including direct mounting onto the front panel of the SCG22 (see "Front Mounting the SCC3 Console" on page 10). This guide provides information on installing the SCC3 using the AMPS or DIN slot mount kits designed for in-vehicle use. Choose the best mounting option to suit the vehicle. 72 58 Fixing Hole Positions 25 56 36.5 36.5 Note: For installations in marine environments, contact Sepura for available IP67 mounting options. Dash Mounted Pivot Kit CAUTION! The dash mount bracket must be fixed to a suitable and stable surface capable of bearing the weight of the SCC3. The SCC3 is mounted into the desired position utilising the console dash mounted pivot kit. This kit consists of a dash mount bracket onto which the pivot support bracket is attached. Ensure orientation is correct for the viewing situation (tilt up or tilt down) and access is considered to the RS232 data connector, if required. The SCC3 is then attached to the pivot support bracket. All dimensions are in millimetres 24 17 77 12 45 99 198 Extent of the SCC3 profile when orientated parallel to the mounting surface Extent of the SCC3 profile when orientated at 90 to the mounting surface Position of data connector - Allow for access to the connector if required Drill three holes at the fixing centres indicated to suit the fastener type (4.2 mm self-tapping screws supplied with the pivot mount kit) Note: The SCC3 profile includes a small clearance allowance. Additional allowances should be made for cables depending on the installation configuration. 24 1. Secure the dash mount bracket into position using the three self-tapping screws provided. 4. Slot the pivot mount support bracket into the dash mount bracket. Secure in place using the single fixed sprung screw knob. 2. Make the cable connections to the SCC3. See the section "Cabling the SCC3" on page 23. 3. Fix the Pivot mount support bracket to the rear of the SCC3 using the two screws provided (maximum tightening torque = 0.8 Nm). Ensure that all cables are routed correctly and will not become trapped when the backplate is fitted. MAX 0.8 Nm Do not over tighten The viewing angle of the SCC3 can be adjusted by loosening the release knob until the tilt mechanism is free enough to move. A ratchet action provides incremental positioning. The release knob should then be re-

tightened to fix the SCC3 into position. PH2 25 DIN Mount Kit The SCC3 can be fitted into the vehicle using a DIN mount kit and DIN cage. Note: Ensure that the cabling to the SCC3 is made to the SCG22 before DIN mount installation. Cabling to the SCC3 is completed when the cables are fed through the DIN cage and secured in the DIN mount. 1. Fit the DIN cage into the slot within the vehicle. 3. Feed the cables through the DIN mount and make the cable connections to the SCC3. See the section "Cabling the SCC3" on page 23. 4. Using the screws provided secure the DIN adapter to the SCC3

(maximum tightening torque = 0.8 Nm). PZ-2 MAX 0.8 Nm Do not over tighten 2. Feed the cables for the SCC3 through the DIN cage and DIN mount kit. 5. Fit the bungs provided into all cable channels in the SCC3 rear cover, as indicated. 26 6. Route the cables neatly in the channels on the rear of the DIN 8. Push the assembly fully into the DIN cage. adapter. Fit the bungs provided into any unused channels. 7. Fit the cable access cover over the cables and any bungs, using the screws provided. To remove, use the DIN release tools (provided) Din Mount Kit and IP55 Sealing If required for the installation, the SCC3 can be further protected so that it is sealed against front water ingress to IP55 standards when mounted using the DIN mount kit. PZ-2 CAUTION! Ensure all bungs have been fitted into unused channels on the SCC3 and mount kit, and that the appropriate sizes have been used. Bungs have a raised profile on their upper surface. When fitting, ensure that the position of its raised profile matches that of the moulded profile on either side of the channel being blocked. 27 1. Apply silicone sealant* to the occupied bung slots in the assembly. We recommend that you use a small diameter nozzle. Apply enough sealant to each slot to ensure that all the external rubber/plastic boundaries are protected. AMPS Mounting Options The SCC3 can be fitted into the vehicle using a range of AMPS mounts available to suit installation requirements. 1. Feed any cables required to the SCC3 and connect them as shown in the section "Cabling the SCC3" on page 23. 2. Using the screws supplied, secure the AMPS backplate to the SCC3

(maximum tightening torque = 0.8 Nm). Ensure all cables are routed correctly and will not be trapped when the backplate is fitted. PZ-2 MAX 0.8 Nm Do not over tighten 2. Place the assembly face-down on a flat surface until the sealant is dry.

*DOWSIL/Dow Corning 7091 Silicone Sealant is recommended. 28 2. Fit the other half of the bracket into position using four screws. AMPS Ratchet Hinge Mount The optional Ratchet Hinge Mount secures the SCC3 to the vehicles interior and provides viewing angle adjustment in the vertical plane. 1. Fit one half of the AMPS bracket to the AMPS backplate on the rear of the SCC3, using the screws and washers provided. Fit the optional p-clip to one of the mounting points, routing any cables through from the SCC3. PZ-1 MAX 0.8 Nm Do not over tighten CAUTION! Ensure fixing screws are of an appropriate type and length for the surface material the bracket is being mounted on to. 3. Fit the two brackets together using the screw and nut provided. Before fully tightening, adjust the SCC3 to the desired angle. PZ-1 CAUTION! Allow sufficient slack in the cables for hinge adjustments. 29 AMPS Ball Mount The optional ball mount provides flexible mounting options for the SCC3 when used in conjunction with the range of compatible mounting arms and brackets. 1. Fit the AMPS ball mount to the AMPS backplate on the rear of the SCC3 using suitable screws and washers. Fit the optional p-clip to one of the mounting points, routing any cables through from the SCC3. Handset-Based Console (HBC3) The HBC3 is supplied with a magnetic mounting bracket and interface box. The bracket can be mounted separately or on the box. CAUTION! The interface box is not sealed. Avoid positions with risk of exposure to water or dust entry. PZ-1 MAX 0.8 Nm CAUTION! ESD precautions must be taken during replacement of the rear cover. Do not over tighten 1. Open the interface box by removing the three screws from the cover of the box. PZ-2 2. Fit a compatible mounting kit to the ball mount, such as a double socket arm. Ensure any mounting components are fully tightened after adjustments. 30 2. Connect the transceiver to the 16-way header in the interface box using a Remote Console cable. Ensure that the strain relief bung is seated at the cable entry in the box front with the flat face down. 3. Press the inner wires of the Remote Console cable into the clips on 6. Plug the HBC3 into the interface box through the retaining clip and fold the clip back over the connector body to retain it securely in position. the PCB. Note: Before fitting the optional remote microphone and switches cable see the section "Remote Microphone and Switches Installation" on page 32. 4. Connect the optional remote microphone and switches cable into the 10-way connector. Route the cables neatly through the cable entry points. CAUTION! Take care not to damage fine wiring or trap any cables. 7. Fit the mounting bracket to the vehicle dash in a suitable location or directly to the interface box. Place the handset in the mounting bracket with the display facing the user. 5. Screw the box halves back together securely, ensuring any cables are fitted correctly through the cable entry points. 31 Remote Microphone and Switches Installation It is recommended that the microphone is located away from any wind noise in a position suitable for the user, such as near the internal rear view mirror. The switch unit should also be located centrally for the user to access. A self-adhesive hook and loop pad is provided for mounting the remote PTT on a flat surface, such as the dashboard. Only one hands free microphone can be used in an installation, which can be connected to either audio accessory interface socket on the rear panel of the SCC3. See the section "SCC3 Connections and Cabling" on page 23. Connector Wiring Terminations The remote microphone is supplied unterminated for ease of installation. Terminate to the SCC3 as shown below after the switch unit and microphone are positioned. Switch Unit Remote Mic Black Red White Black White Identification Link Configuring the HBC3 The HBC3 can be configured for either Handset mode or Fist Mic mode as part of the installation. Configuration is done when powering on the handset, whilst pressing and holding the PTT and Navi-keys as described below. The mode persists even if the power supply is disconnected. To power on the handset:

HBC3 Press and hold the Cancel/Home key until the green LED illuminates, and then release To configure a mode:

Handset Mode Fist Mic. Mode Press and hold the PTT and the Navi-key whilst powering up. After the LED flashes green twice

(Handset Mode), release the PTT and Navi-key Press and hold the PTT and the + Navi-key whilst powering up. After the LED flashes blue twice (Fist Mic Mode), release the PTT and the + Navi-key Fist Microphone/Handset The Fist microphone and/or Handset should be located centrally for the operator(s) to access, using the screws provided. Ensure that the cables are placed in the rear of the SCC3 so that the grommets seal correctly. Specific accessories attach to the Vehicle Accessory Connector (VAC). These should be used when mounting in a DIN slot. Note: If replacing a rear connecting handset with a front connecting handset, also replace the magnetic hook rest with the one supplied. Multiple Fist Microphones and/or Handsets may be connected in an installation, which may be connected to either audio accessory interface. 32 When used in conjunction with the HBC3, the soft key of the remote microphone and switches accessory is only operational with the interface box revision 2.0 or later. Programming/Customising the SCG22 Before re-programming or customising the internal software in the SCG22 you will need the following items:

To enable it with the revision 1.0 interface box, an additional shorting link must be added between pins 4 and 6. The revision of the interface box is indicated by the fourth digit of the serial number on the product label. Radio Manager 2 Power connection to the SCG22 Connect one of the power lead options to the Power/Ignition connector on the rear panel of the SCG22. The red and black wires in the power lead should be connected to a suitable power supply set to 12 V nominal with a rating of 5 A. Connect the blue ignition wire in the power lead to the positive terminal on the power supply. All other wires may be left unconnected. For more information see the section "DC Supply Connection" on page 16. Programming IMPORTANT! Only use the USB Programming Lead to program the SCG22. Programming is not supported by using a serial connection. To program the SCG22, connect the USB Programming Lead (300-

02009) to the GPIO 1 Connector on the rear panel of the SCG22 and a spare USB socket on the PC running Radio Manager. Customising To customise the SCG22, use either a:

USB connection: Described above for programming Serial connection: Connect to the PC com port via the Dedicated Data Cable (DDC) from the rear panel of the SCC3 or to a USB port using the USB Data Cable from the Front Accessory Connector (VAC). 33 Connecting a Remote SIM Reader Mobile Data Terminal To install an optional Remote SIM Reader, connect the device to the console 1 connector on the rear panel of the SCG22 using a remote console cable not exceeding 7m in length. If a console is connected to the console 1 connector, connect a Console Interface Box (part no. 300-00221) between the SCG22 and the console using remote console cables. Ensure that the combined cable lengths from the SCG22 to the Remote SIM Reader/console does not exceed 7m. This guide does not include specific details about installing with a Mobile Data terminal (MDT). However, connect the MDT to the 8-way Dedicated Data Connector (DDC) in the SCC3 using a DDC PEI Tail and Data Lead or to the Vehicle Accessory Connector (VAC) on the front of the SCC3 using a USB Data Cable. Alternatively, connect to a spare 15-way interface on the transceiver using a Data Lead. If a spare 15-way interface is not available, connect a Console Interface Box (part no. 300-00221) between the SCG22 and the SCC3 using remote console cables not exceeding 10m in total length. Connect the MDT to the spare 15-way connector on the interface box. Console Interface Box Cable to console 34 Remote SIM Reader 35 36 37

Mobile Radio Compact Installation Guide SCG22 Series Transceiver electric traction motor in electric vehicles. Locate the SCG22 away from sources of strong electromagnetic interference including cables powering the starter motor or the

(excluding the engine compartment) and protected from the external environment and vehicle cleaning operations. The SCG22 must be fitted within the interior of the vehicle Location Considerations Do not mount the SCG22 close to a heat source, e.g., in front of a heater vent. invalidate any product warranty. temperature to rise to over 80 C (176F). Prolonged exposure to these temperatures may damage the equipment and Fitting the SCG22 or console on top of the dashboard is not recommended. Exposure to direct sunlight may cause the orientation, varying degrees of degradation may result. i.e., if it is mounted within 15 of the normal vertical orientation with no restriction to the flow of convected air. For any other Reliable transmit operation will be achieved if the SCG22 is mounted such that the heat sink fins receive a free flow of air, Temperature and Orientation Considerations free microphone (if fitted). Preferably, the loudspeaker should be installed such that the grille is facing the operator, but out of sight of the remote hands-

cannot interfere with the vehicle control, or with the drivers feet. The microphone/handset hook mount must be fitted such that the microphone/handset is easily accessible and the cable in an accident or is at risk of damage from any occupant or carried items. DO NOT fit the console above the drivers or passengers head, or in other positions where the console would become a hazard belt. The controls must also be within the drivers normal field of vision. Install the console in a position where the operator has easy access to the controls and the microphone when wearing a seat Operator Access and Safety Before you start the installation, ensure that you have all the accessories, including cables. equipment in land based vehicles (see http://www.fcs.org.uk). The installation should comply with FCS1362 CODE OF PRACTICE for the installation of mobile radio and related ancillary guide to installing the product into vehicles. This product can be installed into various makes and models of vehicles and therefore these instructions are not a definitive vehicle installation technician. The installation of this product must be performed by a suitably skilled and technical competent person such as a qualified vehicles or motorcycles). This installation guide provides basic information about installing the mobile radio into land based vehicles (not marine based Installation Guidelines and Recommendations transmission. In the interests of safety, the user must be asked to test the vehicle when the installation is complete. operating in another vehicle in close proximity. If interaction did occur, loss of control could result for the duration of the detected may cause the device to malfunction. The source of RF may be an SCG22 installed in the vehicle itself or one In theory, any vehicle electronic systems could be affected by the presence of an RF field of sufficient intensity, which when Vehicles Fitted with Electronic Devices opposite side of the vehicle to the gas fuel pipe. Ensure that no damage to the gas tank or gas lines occurs when drilling holes. Supply cables should be run, if possible, on the signs of frosting. The vehicle owner should arrange for the leak to be repaired before the installation is commenced. the gas may lay on the floor of the boot. The gas is detectable by its characteristic smell. The point of escaping gas may show as these can produce sparks. DO NOT USE A NAKED FLAME. Butane and propane are heavier than air, so if there is a leak Before installation starts ensure that there are no gas leaks before commencing an installation involving the use of electric tools Gas Powered Vehicles produce sparks. Ensure that no damage to the fuel tank or fuel lines occurs when drilling holes. Ensure that there are no petrol/diesel leaks before commencing an installation involving the use of electric tools as these can Petrol/Diesel Powered Vehicles relevant safety regulations are fully understood. safety regulations which must be closely observed. Prior to commencing an installation on such a vehicle, make sure that any The installation on certain specialised vehicles, such as fuel tankers and fire-fighting vehicles may be subject to additional Specialised Vehicles devices, such as central locking mechanisms, engine management computers, security-coded in-car entertainment units etc. Consult the manufacturers handbook to establish whether it is practical to disconnect the vehicle battery without affecting possible from these units and their associated cables. Refer to the vehicle manufacturers handbook to locate these items. To prevent interference with any other electronic systems in the vehicle, the antenna should be mounted as far away as information is supplied to ensure that there is no radio frequency interference effect upon the vehicles electronic systems. Motor vehicle manufacturers make use of electronic vehicle control systems, e.g., ignition, anti-skid devices etc. The following RF Energy ALWAYS perform RF compatibility checks after installation. See RF Compatibility Checks on page 3. interference. However, if difficulty is experienced or faulty operation is suspected, consult the vehicles dealer. Speed control, fuel injection, anti-lock braking, navigation, air bag and other electronic systems are relatively immune to RF e.g., airbags and seatbelt tensioners. Ensure that the installation does not impede the normal operation of the vehicle, including the operation of any safety device, Ensure that fuel lines, hydraulic lines and existing cables are not damaged during installation. broadcast radio security code, alarm systems and some engine management systems). battery. Disconnect the vehicles battery before commencing installation (be aware of the effect on the public CAUTION! Prolonged operation of the SCG22 with the vehicle engine powered OFF, may drain the vehicles vehicle electrical systems. Contact the vehicle manufacturer if you are not certain if it is safe to install this product. Always read the vehicle manufacturers handbook before starting to install the product. Installation of this product may affect the contact your service provider or Sepura for assistance. READ ALL THE INSTRUCTIONS before attempting to install the SCG22. If you do not understand the instructions, STOP and CAUTION! Only use hand tools and do not over-tighten screws and fixings.. ESD precautions must be taken. CAUTION! Risk of product damage. When carrying out installation requiring the removal of product covers, WARNING! DO NOT smoke or use naked flames when working near the vehicles fuel system. Installation Precautions for future reference and pass on to any person who is responsible for operating the product. Note that the accessory pack must be specified at the time of ordering. ALWAYS keep documentation supplied with the product Consoles or accessories are not shipped in the container with the SCG22 mobile radio due to the many combinations available. If any of the goods are damaged or not supplied, contact your service provider within 10 days of receipt of equipment. Unpack the container(s) and ensure that all items specified on any delivery note are present and received in good condition. Unpacking systems. Safety regulations.This product may affect public broadcast radio, security code alarm systems and some engine management This product must be installed in accordance with national and local radio communications authorities and/or Health and Regulatory Compliance relating to the usage of RF wireless devices. and regulations governing the usage of Radio Frequency (RF) wireless devices are observed. Obey all signs and instructions It is the responsibility of the person operating the product to ensure that it is operated safely at all times, and that local laws Operation term health risks associated with using RF wireless devices, you should obtain advice from your employer.

(RF) energy and the potential health risks associated with using RF wireless devices. If you have any concerns relating to long Sepura designs and manufactures products to meet strict guidelines and international standards relating to Radio Frequency Exposure to RF Energy technicians at Sepura approved service centres. DO NOT attempt to dismantle this product. Servicing and repairs to this product must be performed by trained service void any product warranty. ONLY fit an approved accessory. If a non-approved accessory is fitted, it may compromise the product safety ratings and may Potential risk of burn injury. DO NOT touch the heatsink fins when the transceiver is powered on. NOT connect or disconnect the antenna whilst the equipment is powered on. In order to reduce the risk of RF burns, the antenna must always remain connected when the equipment is powered on. DO DO NOT touch the antenna when the mobile radio is powered on. Potentially hazardous areas are not always signed. Obey all signs and instructions relating to the usage of RF wireless devices. ALWAYS POWER OFF the mobile radio in environments where RF wireless devices could potentially cause an explosion. INFORMATION ABOUT SAFELY OPERATING THIS PRODUCT. READ THE TETRA PRODUCT SAFETY GUIDE (SPR-DOC-00170) SUPPLIED WITH THE SCG22 FOR IMPORTANT Safety Information https://ic.sepura.com/login To view, download or print the Mobile Radio Full User Guide, visit:

Programming, customising and data connections Connecting, mounting and configuring the HBC3 SCC3 mounting options Cable and connection information SCG22 mounting options Fitting a SIM Card or SIM card reader Mounting options Connecting leads Connector sealing Model variants and options Parts supplied Full safety information and instructions required to install the SCG22, including:

The Mobile Radio Full Installation Guide (SPR-DOC-04384) provides all the additional information conjunction with the Mobile Radio Full Installation Guide. instructions for installing the SCG22. It is intended to be used as a quick reference guide in The Mobile Radio Compact Installation Guide provides critical safety information and Ensure that the installation does not impede the normal operation of the vehicle, including the operation of any safety devices such as airbags and seatbelt retainers. The SCG22 should be positioned so that it does not obstruct, or become at risk of damage from, any occupant or carried items. Ensure sufficient space is provided above the installation to allow fitment and removal of the SCG22. Protect the rear panel connectors and connecting cables from the risk of impact damage. If a connector is not in use, the dust covers or seal bungs provided must be fitted to reduce the risk of damage or dust/moisture ingress. RF Compatibility Checks On completion of the installation, the following checks must be carried out if the vehicle is equipped with electronic anti-skid, electronic ignition or engine management systems. WARNING! In the event of an apparent malfunction in the braking or any other systems during RF compatibility checks, the SCG22 installation should be rendered inoperative and the vehicle manufacturer should be contacted before any further use is made of the SCG22 installation. Unqualified persons should not attempt to modify these units in any way. The transmitter should be operated only for the time required to make an observation. Ideally these checks should be performed on the TETRA system. If this is not possible, perform the checks in DMO. An assistant will be required for the following checks:

1. With the vehicle stationary and the engine running at fast idle, operate the transmitter. Check that the brake lights do not illuminate and that the engine continues to run normally, i.e., with no surging or cutting out. 2. Operate the brake pedal, key the transmitter and check that the brake lights do not extinguish. 3. Put the vehicle into motion at a speed of 15 25 km/h (10 15 mph), key the transmitter and operate the brake pedal simultaneously. Check that the braking action is normal and that the engine does not surge or cut out. SCG22 Components and Connections Rear Panel Front Panel TETRA Antenna 5 GNSS Antenna 9 Power Bluetooth & Wi-Fi Antenna*

10 Console 2*

11 SIM Card Cover 6 7 8 I/O2/SPK2*

Ethernet*

1 2 3 LED Indicator I/O1/SPK1/PRG 4 Console 1 Mounting Bracket CAUTION! Ensure fixing screws are of an appropriate type and length for the surface material the bracket is being mounted on to. USB Connections A host* connection lead is available for connecting approved USB devices:

*Optional connections depending on the model variant. Digital I/O Connections The following lead options provide programmable IO connection lines:

SCG Power / Ign / IO Adapter Lead SCG Loudspeaker / IO Lead SCG Loudspeaker / IO USB Host Lead SCG Expansion Board Loudspeaker / 8 GPIO Lead If the SCG22 needs to be installed on a flat surface, such as in a car boot, the fixed mounting bracket option supplied (in the box) can be used. Fit the mounting plate to the bottom of the SCG22 using the four screws supplied. Secure the mounting bracket and SCG22 assembly to the desired surface using four screws. The bracket can be used as a template to mark and pre-drill the holes if required. IMPORTANT! Allow sufficient space around the SCG22 for cables and access to connectors. SCG22 Cabling and Connections WARNING! 12V supply leads, antenna cables and speaker wiring must be routed as far away as possible from gas or fuel lines, and any in-vehicle electrical wiring. This reduces the risk to safety in the event of a leak. CAUTION! Ensure that the cables are routed so that they are kept clear of any existing vehicle system cabling. Ensure that the colour console cable and any loudspeaker cables are routed so that they are kept well clear of antenna cables and of any other electronic devices such as electromagnetic systems or AM/FM radios. Secure all cabling to eliminate the possibility of damage by sharp edges or moving parts. All cabling should be hidden and not left loose. Note: Both the remote console and loudspeaker extension cables are colour coded blue at the SCG22 end to aid installation before the SCG22 is installed. DC Supply Connection CAUTION! The transceiver is designed for nominal 12V negative earth systems. DO NOT use on other supply systems because this will result in damage to the product. The following lead options provide connection to the DC supply:

SCG Power / Ignition Lead SCG Power / Ign / IO Adapter Lead It is recommended that the power cable runs are kept as short as possible. In a new installation where the SCG Power / Ignition Lead is used:

1. With the SCG22 end of the power connector resting in its intended final position, route the wires to the vehicle battery, threading the cable through the bulkheads if necessary (include the blue wire where ignition switching is not required, see 3 below). 2. The positive power line must include a fuse as close as possible to the power source. The negative power line must be connected close to the battery-to-vehicle-body connection (not directly to the battery) and must not include a fuse. 3. The blue wire provides an ignition sensing input. If ignition switching is required, trim the wire to length so that it can be wired, via a fuse, to the ignition switch, using the splicing connector provided. Otherwise this wire must be connected, via a fuse, to the permanent positive supply. A fuse must always be fitted close to where the wire is connected. 4. Check the installation and fit the blade fuses. Fuse rating:

Positive supply 10A, Ignition sense 1A (Automotive 19 mm blade type - Littelfuse ATO). Loudspeaker Connections The following lead options provide connection to loudspeakers:

SCG Loudspeaker / IO Lead SCG Loudspeaker / IO USB Host Lead SCG Expansion Board Loudspeaker / 8 GPIO Lead CAUTION! The transceiver will be damaged if either of the loudspeaker conductors (grey twin conductor cable) is connected to ground. If the loudspeaker output is to be connected to other audio systems, an audio isolation transformer must be used. SCG Loudspeaker / IO USB Host Lead CAUTION! *Do not exceed the maximum current rating when powering USB devices. Ethernet Connection (optional) The SCG Ethernet connector provides an additional connection for data. TETRA Antenna For best all round performance of the product, the antenna should be fitted on the centre of the vehicle roof. Alternative positions, such as wing mounting, will give degraded performance. The coaxial feeder should be secured along its length to eliminate the possibility of damage by sharp edges or moving parts. GNSS Antenna Installation The SCG22 can be licensed to activate the GNSS antenna socket. Please note that the transceiver tracks GLONASS and GPS satellites simultaneously. See customer support bulletin CUS-14-2045. The antenna unit connects to a SMC connector on the rear panel of the transceiver and should, ideally, be mounted on the highest point of the vehicle (i.e., roof) with an uninterrupted view of the sky, and as far from the TETRA antenna as possible. For mounting, follow the manufacturers installation instructions. It is recommended to fit the GNSS antenna connector before connecting the Remote Console Cable. An active antenna is recommended, the supply of which is on the centre pin, 5 V nominal, 40 mA maximum. This supply feed is short circuit protected. The SCC3 has four internal connectors that are used to provide connection to the transceiver and accessories as shown:

Connector Device AAI1 (Audio Accessory Interface 1) Remote Microphone and Switches or Handset/Microphone AAI2 (Audio Accessory Interface 2) Handset/Microphone TRANSCEIVER SCG22 DDC (Dedicated Data Connector) Mobile Data Terminal (MDT) 1 2 3 4 Cabling the SCC3 CAUTION! ESD precautions must be taken during replacement of the rear cover. 1. Connect the colour console cable into the connector marked TRANSCEIVER on the SCC3. Press the strain relief grommet into the recess in the channel. Connect the 16-way D-type connector to either the Console 1 connector on the rear panel, or the optional Console 2 connector on the front panel of the SCG22.Connect all other accessories to the SCC3. Note: If the SCC3 is being fitted with the DIN Mount Kit, refer to the full installation guide for details on routing and securing the cables. 2. Route the cables through the channels on the internal moulding. Fit the split bung and the cable tie (supplied) around the cables (as shown). Tighten the cable tie behind the bung to secure the cables and allow slack at the 10-way plug termination. CAUTION! Cables must be routed correctly using the channels to prevent damage. Press the cable bung into the recess in the channel. Fit the bungs provided into any unused channels. Note: If a handset or fist-microphone accessory is used, the hands free kit must be plugged into the Audio Accessory Interface 1 connector (back left) to allow all cables to be routed correctly. Fist Microphone/Handset The Fist microphone and/or Handset should be located centrally for the operator(s) to access, using the screws provided. Ensure that the cables are placed in the rear of the SCC3 so that the grommets seal correctly. Specific accessories attach to the Vehicle Accessory Connector (VAC). These should be used when mounting in a DIN slot. Note: If replacing a rear connecting handset with a front connecting handset, also replace the magnetic hook rest with the one supplied. Multiple Fist Microphones and/or Handsets may be connected in an installation, which may be connected to either audio accessory interface. Remote Microphone and Switches Installation It is recommended that the microphone is located away from any wind noise in a position suitable for the user, such as near the internal rear view mirror. The switch unit should also be located centrally for the user to access. A self-adhesive hook and loop pad is provided for mounting the remote PTT on a flat surface, such as the dashboard. Only one hands free microphone can be used in an installation, which can be connected to either audio accessory interface socket on the rear panel of the SCC3. See the section SCC3 Connections and Cabling on page 5. Connector Wiring Terminations The remote microphone is supplied unterminated for ease of installation. Terminate to the SCC3 as shown after the switch unit and microphone are positioned. Bluetooth/Wi-Fi Antenna Installation (optional) If a Bluetooth/Wi-Fi receiver is fitted at the time of manufacture, a Bluetooth/Wi-Fi antenna socket will be fitted. The antenna unit connects to a SMA connector on the rear panel of the transceiver and should, ideally, be mounted on the highest point of the vehicle (i.e., roof), and as far from the TETRA antenna as possible. For mounting, follow the manufacturers installation instructions. It is recommended to fit the Bluetooth/Wi-Fi antenna connector before connecting the Remote Console Cable. Cabling and Connections Overview - All Models Programmable I/O The SCG22 supports the following programmable digital I/O lines, depending on the variant:

GPIO 1 Connector Two I/O lines available GPIO 2 Connector Eight I/O lines available WARNING! To control devices from the programmable outputs which require more than 0.5 A, use a suitable automotive relay to ensure correct operation. Connect the relay coil between the output wire and the vehicle positive supply. The device must be protected by an appropriate fuse in its positive supply. Check with the local regulatory authority where the outputs are used to drive external alert devices such as horns or sirens. Cabling and Connections to an SRG Installation If the vehicle was previously fitted with an SRG mobile radio installation, the SCG22 can be connected to the existing SRG power cable using one of the optional adapter cables available. Existing ignition, IO and loudspeaker functions from the current installation will be retained. SCG Power / Ign / IO Adapter Lead (300-02007) SRG I/O Compatibility Only two of the existing SRG I/O lines are connected through the adapter lead and available for use with the SCG22. The I/O lines must be configured on the SCG22 so that I/O0 is an output and I/O1 is an input. SCC3 Console The SCG22 can accommodate up to two SCC3 consoles, or a combination of an SCC3 and an HBC3 handset-based console. WARNING! Before starting to install the SCC3 console, see the section Installation Precautions on page 1. SCC3 Connections and Cabling WARNING! Ensure that the transceiver is powered OFF before making any connections to the SCC3. IMPORTANT! If the SCC3 is mounted directly to the SCG22 the internal connectors are not accessible.

01 August 2020 SEPURA XX6SCG2229 Sample Product Label Sepura Limited 9000 Cambridge Research Park, Beach Drive, Waterbeach, Cambridge, CB25 9TL, UK Tel: +44 (0) 1223 876000 sepura.com Going further in critical communications Sepura Limited. Registered in England No: 4353801 Registered office: 9000 Cambridge Research Park, Beach Drive, Waterbeach, Cambridge, CB25 9TL, UK Tel: +44 (0) 1223 876000 www.sepura.com

Sepura Limited 9000 Cambridge Research Park, Beach Drive, Waterbeach, Cambridge, CB25 9TL, UK Tel: +44 (0) 1223 876000 sepura.com 01 August 2020 TUV SUD BABT Octagon House Concorde Way Segensworth North Fareham Hampshire PO15 5RL WLAN Declaration:

FCC ID XX6SCG2229 IC:8739A-SCG2229 Sincerely, Company Officer:

Chris Beecham Telephone Number:

+44 (01223) 876000 Email:

chris.beecham@sepura.com Position:

Conformance Engineer Due to a technical issue found during the product testing of WLAN on the named products, we the manufacturer have excluded WLAN from the test plan at this time, we plan to include WLAN as a class 2 change at a later date. Some of the product documentation includes references to WLAN, however, with the removal of WLAN capabilities, any mention of WLAN in any document submitted with this application should be disregarded. Going further in critical communications Sepura Limited. Registered in England No: 4353801 Registered office: 9000 Cambridge Research Park, Beach Drive, Waterbeach, Cambridge, CB25 9TL, UK Tel: +44 (0) 1223 876000 www.sepura.com

01 August 2020 Sepura Limited 9000 Cambridge Research Park, Beach Drive, Waterbeach, Cambridge, CB25 9TL, UK Tel: +44 (0) 1223 876000 sepura.com TUV SUD BABT Octagon House Concorde Way Segensworth North Fareham Hampshire PO15 5RL Confidentiality Request Pursuant to sections 0.457(d)(1)(ii) and 0.459 of the Commissions rules, Sepura Limited hereby requests permanent confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below:

BOMs Circuit Diagrams Circuit Descriptions Operating Descriptions Block Diagrams PCB Layouts PCB Schematics The above material contains trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these matters might be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The applicant understands that pursuant to rule 0.457(d)(1)(ii), disclosure of this application and all accompanying material will not be made before the date of the grant for this application. Yours sincerely, Company Officer:

Telephone Number:

Email:

Position:

chris.beecham@sepura.com Conformance Engineer

+44 (0) 1223 876000 Chris Beecham Going further in critical communications Sepura Limited. Registered in England No: 4353801 Registered office: 9000 Cambridge Research Park, Beach Drive, Waterbeach, Cambridge, CB25 9TL, UK Tel: +44 (0) 1223 876000 www.sepura.com

Sepura Limited 9000 Cambridge Research Park, Beach Drive, Waterbeach, Cambridge, CB25 9TL, UK Tel: +44 (0) 1223 876000 sepura.com Data Port connection in relation to the following products:

ATTESTATION: I attest that the data port on the above product is used during the manufacturing process. It is also used during the initial configuration / programming of the product by the service provider (licensee) using a product specific software tool before the product is put into service, during this process the product is inoperable. The end user (operator) is unable to change transmitter frequencies, only the service provider (licensee), service technicians and maintenance personal have access to this software tool. In addition, there are no RF ports on this connector. 01 August 2020 TUV SUD BABT Octagon House Concorde Way Segensworth North Fareham Hampshire PO15 5RL FCC CFR 47 Part 15B RSS-Gen, Clause 3.2 FCC ID XX6SCG2229 IC:8739A-SCG2229 Sincerely, Company Officer:

Chris Beecham Telephone Number:

+44 (01223) 876000 Email:

chris.beecham@Sepura.com Conformance Engineer Going further in critical communications Position:

Sepura Limited. Registered in England No: 4353801 Registered office: 9000 Cambridge Research Park, Beach Drive, Waterbeach, Cambridge, CB25 9TL, UK Tel: +44 (0) 1223 876000 www.sepura.com

The Supplier's Declaration of Conformity can be found at the back of the accompanying SPR-DOC-00170-14 Product Safety Guide